SierraSoft Geomatics Suite 2009 Topko User guide

Copyright 1992-2009 SierraSoft All rights reserved

Sierra Informatica S.r.l. Via Roveredo 1/a 33170 PORDENONE PN ITALY

Tel.: Fax.:

+39 0434.25.49.06 +39 0434.25.49.07

e-mail: info@sierrasoft.com WEB: http://www.sierrasoft.com

WARNING
Using computer procedures involves knowing the operative system. The Geomatics products were created for Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows Vista operative systems. The operative system is loaded on turning on the computer and works as interface between the program and the computer. The operative system is not provided together with Geomatics Suite, so it must be already present in the computer. Knowing the operative system base principles is necessary for a full comprehension of this guide and for a correct use of the program. This is not a guide to operative systems, for which you should refer to Windows 2000/XP/Vista guides or to the numerous publications on the matter. This guide does not intend to give instructions concerning the use of topographic instruments and of computer peripherals. This guide is by no means a course of topography. The documentation included in this guide has been collected and verified with maximum care. Anyway, SierraSoft cannot be held responsible for its use. This is true also for any person or society involved in the creation, production and distribution of this guide. This guide is protected by copyright. Reproduction of this guide, or part of it, is possible only on written authorization by SierraSoft. The use of SierraSoft programs is subjected to the limits set by international legislation on intellectual property. Copy of the product original disks is forbidden, except for backup copies made by the license subscriber and only for safety reasons. Above mentioned warnings are considered accepted on purchasing Topko, ProSt, Rasta and Sitio program.

Windows is a registered trademark, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista and Microsoft Office are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of AutoDesk. Inc. Other brands and product names cited in this guide are considered trademarks by their respective owners. The information here included is subject to change without any communication from SierraSoft.

Table of Contents
Topko........................................................................................................................................ 11 Topko T: Topography ............................................................................................................... 11 Topko M: 3D Models ................................................................................................................. 12 Topko modular structure ........................................................................................................... 13 Project properties ....................................................................................................................... 14 Planimetry project properties..................................................................................................... 14 General tab .......................................................................................................................... 15 Settings tab.......................................................................................................................... 16 Coordinate system tab ........................................................................................................... 17 Symbols tab ......................................................................................................................... 22 Drawing grid tab ................................................................................................................... 23 Miscellaneous tab .................................................................................................................. 24 Text style tab ....................................................................................................................... 25 Titles tab.............................................................................................................................. 26 Cross-sections project properties ............................................................................................... 27 Cross sections settings........................................................................................................... 28 Graphic window tab ............................................................................................................... 29 Titles tab.............................................................................................................................. 30 Survey properties .................................................................................................................... 31 Drawing Filters tab ................................................................................................................... 32 Start station tab ...................................................................................................................... 33 GPS Station............................................................................................................................. 34 First GPS station ................................................................................................................... 34 Local plane coordinates .......................................................................................................... 34 Other................................................................................................................................... 34 G.P.S. tab ............................................................................................................................... 35 Calculation parameters tab........................................................................................................ 36 Sight tolerances .................................................................................................................... 36 Point tolerances .................................................................................................................... 36 Onward intersection tolerances ............................................................................................... 37 Devices: Minumum internal angle............................................................................................ 37 Traverse calculation tab ............................................................................................................ 37 Traverse closure tolerances .................................................................................................... 38 Calculation of angular and linear closure tolerances using formulas ............................................. 38 Error distribution ................................................................................................................... 39 Differential leveling tab ............................................................................................................. 40 Environmental data tab ............................................................................................................ 41 Use of environmental data in survey calculation ........................................................................ 41 Styles tab ............................................................................................................................... 43 Measures/Baselines style ....................................................................................................... 43 Parcel style........................................................................................................................... 44 1

Styles table toolbar ............................................................................................................... 44 Hydrology ............................................................................................................................... 46 Topographic profiles tab............................................................................................................ 47 Titles tab ................................................................................................................................ 48 Fieldbook of measures table ......................................................................................................... 49 Table toolbar ........................................................................................................................... 51 Table standard editing commands ........................................................................................... 51 Print command ..................................................................................................................... 53 Filters by station and by code ................................................................................................. 53 Display commands ................................................................................................................ 55 Coordinates ............................................................................................................................... 55 Check point name .................................................................................................................... 55 Table of topographic coordinates................................................................................................ 56 Functions of the table of topographic coordinates ...................................................................... 56 Table of topographic coordinates (standard) ............................................................................. 57 Table of topographic coordinates and 2nd elevation ................................................................... 58 Table of topographic coordinates and Station ............................................................................ 58 Table of topographic coordinates and Chains and offsets ............................................................ 59 Table of topographic coordinates and Station and offset from axis ............................................... 59 Table of topographic coordinates and Point properties................................................................ 60 Utilities ................................................................................................................................ 60 Transform entity into topographic point ...................................................................................... 63 From points to topographic points ........................................................................................... 63 From texts to topographic points ............................................................................................. 64 From lines to topographic points ............................................................................................. 64 Input of a survey point ............................................................................................................. 64 Point data from command line ................................................................................................ 65 Point data from dialog box ........................................................................................................ 65 Set Request for point data ...................................................................................................... 68 Input of points at measured intervals or at equal distance ............................................................ 69 Input of points at measured intervals ...................................................................................... 69 Input of points at equal distance ............................................................................................. 70 Insert blocks at measured intervals ......................................................................................... 70 Insert blocks at equal distance ................................................................................................ 72 Drawing by codes .................................................................................................................... 73 Customize toolbar ................................................................................................................. 74 How to erase a survey point from graphic CAD ............................................................................ 75 How to modify a survey point .................................................................................................... 75 Edit point window .................................................................................................................... 75 Interpolation of a point elevation ............................................................................................... 76 Move points on polyline ............................................................................................................ 77 How to change display parameters of a set of points .................................................................... 77

Point properties .................................................................................................................... 78 Texts tab ............................................................................................................................. 79 Style of topographic point labels ................................................................................................ 79 Creating a new style .............................................................................................................. 80 Rename style........................................................................................................................ 81 Delete a style ....................................................................................................................... 81 Set default style .................................................................................................................... 82 Set style by code .................................................................................................................. 82 Set a style to a set of points ................................................................................................... 83 Shifting of labels associated to survey points ............................................................................... 84 Automatic shifting ................................................................................................................. 84 Manual shifting ..................................................................................................................... 85 Symbol rotations ..................................................................................................................... 85 Rotation of topographic point labels ........................................................................................... 86 Rotate labels from coordinate table ......................................................................................... 86 Rotate labels by grips ............................................................................................................ 86 Rotate labels from point properties .......................................................................................... 86 How to draw and use a symbol to represent a point ..................................................................... 87 Transformation of drawing entities into topographic entities and vice versa ..................................... 87 Zoom on topographic point ....................................................................................................... 89 Selection of points by code ........................................................................................................ 90 Display topographic point data with active command .................................................................... 90 Topographic point table on CAD window ..................................................................................... 90 Points comparison between subprojects ...................................................................................... 92 Delete points ........................................................................................................................... 94 Merge coordinates.................................................................................................................... 94 Acquisition of topographic coordinates from ASCII file .................................................................. 97 Print topographic coordinates .................................................................................................... 98 Survey codes ............................................................................................................................. 99 Survey codes table ................................................................................................................... 99 Description codes (Not available for Topko Express) ................................................................ 100 Point codes (Not available for Topko Express) ......................................................................... 100 Line codes (Not available for Topko Express) .......................................................................... 101 Point drawing codes (Not available for Topko Express) ............................................................. 102 Annotation codes (Not available for Topko Express) ................................................................. 104 Toolbar codes (Not available for Topko Express) ..................................................................... 104 Code table Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 104 Compound codes ................................................................................................................... 106 Automatic drawing from codes................................................................................................. 107 Destination ......................................................................................................................... 108 Generation ......................................................................................................................... 108 Options .............................................................................................................................. 109

How to create layers from codes .............................................................................................. 109 Acquisition of survey codes from ASCII file ................................................................................ 110 Printing survey codes ............................................................................................................. 110 Control codes ........................................................................................................................ 110 Control codes for sights ....................................................................................................... 110 Control codes for drawings ................................................................................................... 111 Control codes for profile and sections .................................................................................... 114 Creation of sections from codes ............................................................................................ 115 Topko T Standard - Topography ................................................................................................. 116 Topko T menus ................................................................................................................... 118 Topko T toolbars ................................................................................................................. 118 Field data recorder ................................................................................................................. 119 Direct import from field data recorder .................................................................................... 120 Import topographic instruments format file ............................................................................ 124 Direct export on field data recorder ....................................................................................... 126 Export topographic instruments format file ............................................................................. 129 Fieldbook of measures ............................................................................................................ 132 Fieldbook of measures table ................................................................................................. 132 How to insert fieldbook measures .......................................................................................... 136 How to modify fieldbook measures ........................................................................................ 139 How to erase fieldbook measures .......................................................................................... 139 Creation of Fieldbook of measures from coordinates ................................................................ 139 Printing the fieldbook of measures......................................................................................... 140 Acquisition of fieldbook from ASCII file .................................................................................. 141 Differential leveling ............................................................................................................. 141 Traverses .............................................................................................................................. 143 Definition of traverses.......................................................................................................... 143 Management of traverses from table ..................................................................................... 143 Traverse ............................................................................................................................ 144 Management of traverses from Graphic CAD ........................................................................... 145 Printing of Traverses............................................................................................................ 146 Chains and offsets.................................................................................................................. 147 Chains and offsets table ....................................................................................................... 147 Chains and Offsets .............................................................................................................. 148 Print measures by chain and offset ........................................................................................ 149 Misure e punti GPS ................................................................................................................... 150 G.P.S. and geographic data .................................................................................................. 150 Table of GPS coordinates (WGS84) ........................................................................................ 152 Baselines table.................................................................................................................... 157 Create GPS measures .......................................................................................................... 160 Input of GPS points in the graphic window ............................................................................. 161 Creation of GPS coordinates (WGS84) from plane coordinates .................................................. 162

Geocentric coordinates from baselines ................................................................................... 162 Baselines from geocentric coordinates ................................................................................... 163 Survey calculation with GPS coordinates ................................................................................ 164 Calculation of local datums ................................................................................................... 164 Measuring geodetic distance ................................................................................................. 167 Import of GPS coordinates ................................................................................................... 168 Latitude and longitude format ............................................................................................... 169 Print GPS data .................................................................................................................... 170 Datum points ........................................................................................................................ 171 Datum points table .............................................................................................................. 171 Management of datum points from graphic CAD ...................................................................... 173 Printing Datum points .......................................................................................................... 174 Survey calculation .................................................................................................................. 174 Topographic instruments ...................................................................................................... 182 Printing the error ellipses ..................................................................................................... 183 COGO Commands .................................................................................................................. 184 COGO ................................................................................................................................ 184 Intersection distance-distance .............................................................................................. 185 Intersection distance-angle .................................................................................................. 186 Intersection angle-angle ...................................................................................................... 186 Intersection 4 points............................................................................................................ 187 Chain and offset .................................................................................................................. 187 Point on alignment .............................................................................................................. 188 Normal intersection ............................................................................................................. 188 Parallel intersection ............................................................................................................. 189 Projection........................................................................................................................... 189 Resection 3 points (Snellius-Pothenot) ................................................................................... 189 Resection 2 points ............................................................................................................... 190 Angle and distance .............................................................................................................. 191 Creation of survey building points ......................................................................................... 191 Fit curve ............................................................................................................................ 192 Tangent two circles ............................................................................................................. 192 Create topographic points by slopes ...................................................................................... 193 Survey polylines .................................................................................................................... 194 Enter survey polylines.......................................................................................................... 194 Drawing from codes ............................................................................................................ 195 Profile extraction ................................................................................................................. 195 Calculation of section elevation ............................................................................................. 196 3D Model/Drawing from parametric objects ............................................................................... 197 Enter object on complete polyline .......................................................................................... 198 Insert an object on polyline by intervals ................................................................................. 200 Cadastral parcels ................................................................................................................... 201

Management of parcels from graphic CAD .............................................................................. 201 Parcel display styles ............................................................................................................ 205 Creating a table reporting parcel data .................................................................................... 208 Management of parcels from table......................................................................................... 209 Creating particulars for cadastral parcels ................................................................................ 210 Printing of parcels ............................................................................................................... 211 Subdivisions .......................................................................................................................... 211 Subdivision line parallel to two points or to a fixed angle .......................................................... 212 Subdivision line perpendicular to two points or to a fixed angle ................................................. 213 Subdivision line through two points ....................................................................................... 214 Subdivision line through one point ......................................................................................... 214 Manual elaboration .............................................................................................................. 215 Expropriation ...................................................................................................................... 215 Topographic calculation .......................................................................................................... 216 Problem of Hansen Simple .................................................................................................... 216 Solution of triangle problems ................................................................................................ 216 Transformation by control points.............................................................................................. 217 Control points ..................................................................................................................... 218 Calculations and results ....................................................................................................... 219 Subprojects to transform ..................................................................................................... 220 Transfomation between coordinate systems .............................................................................. 221 From Geodetic to Map (simple) and vice versa ........................................................................ 222 From Geodetic to Map (Transformation with change of coordinate system(WGS84)) and vice versa224 From Geodetic to Geodetic ................................................................................................... 227 From Map to Map ................................................................................................................ 231 Info geoid .......................................................................................................................... 239 Reversing the axes ................................................................................................................. 240 Topko N - Network Adjustment ................................................................................................... 241 Horizontal network adjustment ................................................................................................ 241 Data .................................................................................................................................. 243 Results .............................................................................................................................. 247 Reports .............................................................................................................................. 250 Vertical network adjustment .................................................................................................... 251 Data .................................................................................................................................. 251 Results .............................................................................................................................. 254 Reports .............................................................................................................................. 255 Topko M Standard - Mathematical modelling ................................................................................ 256 Mathematical models .............................................................................................................. 256 Points, constraints, triangles ................................................................................................. 256 Contour lines ...................................................................................................................... 256 Volume of the solid.............................................................................................................. 257 Intersection of models (not available in Topko Express) ........................................................... 257

Levelings............................................................................................................................ 257 Cross-sections .................................................................................................................... 257 Allotments (not available in Topko Express)............................................................................ 258 Mesh models (not available in Topko Express) ........................................................................ 258 Raster maps (not available in Topko Express) ......................................................................... 258 Additional entities ............................................................................................................... 258 Topko M menus .................................................................................................................. 258 Topko M toolbar .................................................................................................................. 258 Constraints ........................................................................................................................... 259 Break lines ......................................................................................................................... 259 Boundary lines .................................................................................................................... 260 Generation of constraints from polylines ................................................................................ 261 Check on Constraints ........................................................................................................... 261 How to modify constraints typology ....................................................................................... 262 How to erase and modify constraints ..................................................................................... 263 How to erase all constraints .................................................................................................. 263 Creation of coordinates from constraint line extremes .............................................................. 264 Triangles............................................................................................................................... 264 Input of triangles in manual mode ......................................................................................... 265 Input of triangles in semi-automatic mode ............................................................................. 265 Automatic triangulation ........................................................................................................ 266 Set triangles colour ............................................................................................................. 269 Swap two triangles surface ................................................................................................... 270 How to erase or modify triangles ........................................................................................... 271 Change triangle elevation ..................................................................................................... 271 Break triangles on defined polylines....................................................................................... 271 Square and triangle mesh model ........................................................................................... 271 Creation of coordinates from triangle vertexes ........................................................................ 272 Creation of a point grid from a triangle mathematical model ..................................................... 273 Calculation of plane and slope area ....................................................................................... 273 Printing of Triangles ............................................................................................................ 274 Raster maps .......................................................................................................................... 274 Contour lines ......................................................................................................................... 276 Creation of contour lines ...................................................................................................... 277 Modify labels ...................................................................................................................... 280 Set colors to contour lines .................................................................................................... 282 Tension editing on vertexes .................................................................................................. 282 Manual labelling .................................................................................................................. 283 Setting elevations to polylines or contour lines ........................................................................ 283 Digitalizing contour lines ...................................................................................................... 284 How to erase or modify contour lines ..................................................................................... 284 Topographic cross sections ...................................................................................................... 285

Cross-sections properties ..................................................................................................... 286 Topographic cross-sections ................................................................................................... 290 Elaboration codes ................................................................................................................ 302 Cross-elements ................................................................................................................... 306 Automatic editing of elements............................................................................................... 311 Calculation of elementary areas ............................................................................................ 318 Volumes............................................................................................................................. 319 Definition of section dimensioning ......................................................................................... 322 Printing section reports ........................................................................................................ 330 Topographic profiles ............................................................................................................... 331 Longitudinal profile properties ............................................................................................... 332 General tab ........................................................................................................................ 333 Insert topographic profile ..................................................................................................... 335 Dynamic profile ................................................................................................................... 335 Insert sections on a topographic profile .................................................................................. 337 Delete and modify topographic profiles .................................................................................. 339 Table of longitudinal profile .................................................................................................. 339 Table of longitudinal profile (Standard) .................................................................................. 340 Table of longitudinal profile, Datum level Axis ...................................................................... 341 Sort topographic profile ....................................................................................................... 341 Activate profile graphic window ............................................................................................. 342 Profile codes ....................................................................................................................... 342 Calculation of profile elevations ............................................................................................. 344 Supplementary profiles ........................................................................................................ 350 Definition of profile dimensioning .......................................................................................... 351 Dimensioning tab ................................................................................................................ 353 Dimensioning data .............................................................................................................. 353 Layout tab .......................................................................................................................... 357 Dimensioning tab ................................................................................................................ 358 Cut/Fill tab ......................................................................................................................... 360 Text tab ............................................................................................................................. 361 Fonts tab ........................................................................................................................... 362 Plotting or plot preview from Profile module ........................................................................... 362 Longitudinal profile reports ................................................................................................... 366 Allotments ............................................................................................................................ 367 Input of allotments .............................................................................................................. 367 How to erase and modify allotments ...................................................................................... 367 Break triangles on allotments ............................................................................................... 368 Volume calculation by allotment ............................................................................................ 368 Volume calculations................................................................................................................ 368 Solid volume ...................................................................................................................... 369 Volumes by intersection of models ........................................................................................ 372

Leveling calculation ............................................................................................................. 376 Extraction of DTM from volume calculations ............................................................................ 384 Volume calculation summary ................................................................................................ 386 Printing of triangles and volumes .......................................................................................... 388 DEM - Digital Elevation Model .................................................................................................. 388 What is a DEM? ................................................................................................................... 388 DEM management mode inside the tool ................................................................................. 391 DEMs as subprojects............................................................................................................ 392 Importing a DEM ................................................................................................................. 393 Exportation of a DEM ........................................................................................................... 394 Import and export formats ................................................................................................... 394 DEM properties ................................................................................................................... 395 Extraction of a digital model (DTM) from DEM ......................................................................... 403 Extracting the DEM from a digital model (DTM) ....................................................................... 404 Updating a DEM from a digital model (DTM) ........................................................................... 404 Calculation of profiles and sections on the DEM ....................................................................... 405 Extraction of a DEM from an ASCII file of non-regular points .................................................... 405 Topko M Premium Tridimensional planning ................................................................................ 408 Topko M Premium Toolbar .................................................................................................... 409 Set elevation to polylines ........................................................................................................ 409 Set a fixed elevation to all polylines ....................................................................................... 410 Set an elevation from leveling to polylines.............................................................................. 410 Set an elevation from DTM to polylines .................................................................................. 410 Triangles between two polylines............................................................................................... 411 3D Points and blocks .............................................................................................................. 411 Insert blocks on DTM ........................................................................................................... 411 Enter blocks into closed polylines .......................................................................................... 412 Repeat block on polyline ...................................................................................................... 414 Elevation/point calculation from DTM ..................................................................................... 415 Create manual sideslopes ....................................................................................................... 415 Sideslope creation to DTM ....................................................................................................... 415 Creation of sideslopes and benches .......................................................................................... 417 Sideslope creation by Vertical and/or Horizontal 3D offset ........................................................... 419 3D Model/Drawing from parametric objects ............................................................................... 420 Insert object on complete polyline ......................................................................................... 420 Insert an object on polyline by intervals ................................................................................. 423 Modelling utilities ................................................................................................................... 424 Extrude block on polyline ..................................................................................................... 424 Create strips on polylines ..................................................................................................... 428 Create New-Jersey .............................................................................................................. 430 Create Guard-Rail ............................................................................................................... 432 Create 3D buildings ............................................................................................................. 435

Automatic merging of models .................................................................................................. 437 Extraction of DTM from volume calculations .............................................................................. 438 Automatic creation of DTM perimeter........................................................................................ 440 Automatic triangulation .......................................................................................................... 441 Triangulation ...................................................................................................................... 441 Layers ............................................................................................................................... 443 Colours not available in Topko Express ................................................................................ 444 Horizontal sections ................................................................................................................. 444 How to erase automatically points inside/outside a polyline ......................................................... 445 How to erase automatically triangles inside/outside a polyline ..................................................... 445 Topko H - Hydrology and Hydrography ........................................................................................ 446 Hydro toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 446 Display slopes ....................................................................................................................... 446 Display flat areas ................................................................................................................... 448 Display peaks and pits ............................................................................................................ 450 Display valleys and ridges ....................................................................................................... 451 Display tributaries .................................................................................................................. 453 Contour lines on point ............................................................................................................ 454 Watershed volume ................................................................................................................. 454 Manual simulation ............................................................................................................... 455 Automatic simulation ........................................................................................................... 455 Determine the height from the volume .................................................................................. 456 Contour line ....................................................................................................................... 456 Triangle model of the water .................................................................................................. 456 Water path ............................................................................................................................ 456

Topko

Topko
Topko T: Topography
Topko T is a software for the management of topographic and cadastral surveys. Field data can be imported directly by topographic instruments (total stations and GPS) and then processed to obtain the coordinates of the points surveyed. Powerful functions are available for data editing, management of survey points and solution of every kind of topographic issue. Topko T allows the complete management of cadastral works and it is fully compatible with Pregeo.

Acquisition of data from field data recorders The tool allows acquisition of data from the most widespread total stations and GPS; Topko T possesses both procedures of direct interfacement and procedures for file conversion in the recorder original format of the instruments.

Survey calculation Topko T processes every kind of survey, also by different methods: calculation of traverses with empiric adjustment and least square adjustment; calculation of free stations by inverse intersection with 2 or more points; solution of isolated stations and automatic rototranslation on points of support; autorecognition of new orientation; calculation of points by trilateration and intersection angle-angle. From GPS measures or GPS coordinates (lat-long or geocentric) Topko T calculates plane coordinates by projection on a local system or on a defined coordinate system; the projection can use IGM grids. For the calculation of profile elevations it is possible to use IGM grids or other geoid models.

Creation of drawing from codes The survey drawing can be generated by the survey codes assigned to points; the same codes allow the generation of drawing lines and/or digital model break lines. To any code it is possible to set different parameters to represent the point: symbol, size, layer.

COGO By COGO commands it is possible to create quickly and with precision new survey points by intersection, offset, tangent points, alignment, projection, slope, etc., thus speeding up the functions of drawing and data insertion.

Transformation of coordinates between systems Topko T performs every kind of coordinate transformation between different systems: from geodetic coordinates to geodetic coordinates, from plane coordinates to geodetic coordinates and vice versa, from plane coordinates to plane coordinates.

Transformation of coordinates by control points Transformations of coordinates can be performed by indicating some control points. It is also possible to set the weight, which can also be calculated automatically by the tool

11

Topko

Topko M: 3D Models
Topko M with the solutions it offers to such problems as the management of digital models, volume calculation, leveling, management of profiles and cross sections. Premium version includes a powerful set of commands for the 3D design of pits, dumps, parking areas, terracing, embanking, ramps, tracks and all what is concerned with the design of models.Topko M includes management, visualization and analysis of DEM. Mathematical modelling and contour lines The generation of a triangle terrain digital model (DTM) can be obtained manually, semi-automatically, or automatically. Automatic triangulation recognizes inclusion and exclusion lines and break lines in the survey. Contour lines are generated automatically and can be customized by the user.

Volume calculation It is possible to carry out volume calculation by levelling ( with or without adjustment plane), by difference of models and obtain detailed calculation reports. All the methods of volume calculation can be applied either to the whole model or to portions of it; cut/fill lines are calculated and for any point the tool determines the elevation from levelling.

Cross sections Topko automatically extracts terrain sections from triangles, contour lines, break lines, survey points. Annotation for multiple-sections is automatic and customizable. Volume calculation is carried out both through average end area method and equalized area method.

Topographic profiles Topographic profiles can be inserted from planimetry graphic window as polylines on which cross sections can be positioned either automatically, with a fixed step, or manually. Profile graphic window allows to display the profile from a longitudinal point of view; calculation can be performed from triangle digital model or directly from survey points. However, a table allows to insert and modify profile data: station, terrain elevation, project elevation, description.

Digital Elevation Model (DEM) Topko is the solution to all situations concerning the management, the visualization, the analysis and, in general, the use of DEM.

Tridimensional planning (Pits and dumps) Topko M Premium extends Standard Topko M with a tool of commands for the 3D planning of pits, dumps, parking areas, terracing, embanking, ramps, tracks and all what is concerned with the planning of models. By Topko M Premium the traditional method of planning by sections is surpassed, since it is possible to work completely on a planimetric-3D point of view, creating sideslopes, grade lines, terracing, roads, etc. Topko M Premium allows to obtain quickly extremely precise project models as far as the creation of sideslopes and intersections with the existing terrain model. It is possible to create different project models and generate automatically a final model of the project merged with the existing situation. From the models created it is possible to extract cross sections and calculate very precise cut and fill volumes, thanks to the precision of the models designed.

12

Topko

Topko modular structure

Topko T Standard: Topography Topko T is a software for the management of topographic and cadastral surveys. Field data can be imported directly by topographic instruments (total stations and GPS) and then processed to obtain the coordinates of the points surveyed. Powerful functions are available for data editing, management of survey points and solution of every kind of topographic issue. Topko T allows the complete management of cadastral works and it is fully compatible with Pregeo.

Topko N: Networks adjustment Supplementary module of Topko T, completing it with the least squares adjustment of horizontal and vertical networks. The module offers a sophisticated interface of data insertion, a powerful calculation engine as well as an extremely detailed report of calculated data. Topko M Standard: Mathematical and tridimensional modelling Topko M Standard with the solutions it offers to such problems as the management of digital models, volume calculation, leveling, management of profiles and cross sections. Poweful and fast procedures allow to create and manage 3D models, calculate contour lines and extract profiles and sections; different methods of volume calculation from 3D models and cross sections are included. Topko M includes management, visualization and analysis of DEM.

Topko M Premium: Tridimensional planning (Pits and dumps) Topko M Premium extends Standard Topko M with a tool of commands for the 3D planning of pits, dumps, parking areas, terracing, embanking, ramps, tracks and all what is concerned with the planning of models. Topko M Premium allows to design interactively, with estreme precision and speed, 3D models from which to extract sections or calculate volumes.

Topko H: Hydrography and hydrology Topko H is a supplementary module of Topko M and it is the ideal solution for the hydrographic and hydrologic analysis of a territory; by this module it is possible to analyse the hydrologic problems concerning territory and simplify the decision making process related to new projects (roads, dams, lakes, artificial lakes, etc.)

13

Topko

Project properties
Through the project properties it is possible to check many aspects concerning the whole project visualization and management. There are three dialog boxes for the management of the project properties: one for the planimetry graphic window, one for the profile graphic window and one for the sections graphic window. All these windows are different as they allow the management of the properties concerning planimetry, profile and sections.

Planimetry project properties

It is possible to activate the project properties dialog box as follows: Menu File > Project properties Command line: DDPAR

The dialog box is subdivided into tabs which allow to modify some parameters concerning data display and project management.

14

Topko

General tab

Request for coordinates: In Ordinate symbol, Abscissa symbol and Elevation symbol edit box, it is possible to specify the character used to identify abscissas, ordinates and elevations. You can choose, moreover, the order according to which Cartesian coordinates are requested: before abscissas, then ordinates or vice versa. Scale: In Scale edit box, it is possible to indicate the drawing scale according to which you want to work. You can also use the command SCALEDRAW to change the drawing scale.

15

Topko

Settings tab

Decimals
In this group it is possible to set the number of decimals to be used in the display of coordinates, elevations, angles and distances. Settings refer to both the graphic display and the reports that can be obtained.

Stations
Station display mode of sections can be set through Display mode list box. The two available methods are: Standard: one station of 1234.567 meters is displayed as 1234.567. X+YYY.ZZZ: one station of 1234.567 meters is displayed as 1+1234.567.

Project language
Language in which the project has been performed. Its purpose is to make sure the typical sections do not use the tool language codes but the codes of the language with which the project has been generated.

16

Topko

Coordinate system tab

Through this tab it is possible to decide whether to use a coordinate system inside the project or the survey. It is necessary to define the coordinate system when you work with plane coordinates referred to a non-local system (for example UTM, Gauss-Boaga, etc.). To use a coordinate system means to have the following advantages:

calculation of linear deformation (scale factor to be applied to distances) for each point; calculation of local terrestrial radius; transformation of plane coordinates into geographic coordinates and vice versa; calculation of mixed surveys: GPS (with WGS84 coordinates, pseudo WGS84 or coordinates referred to the system ellipsoid) and tachymetry;

Through Use coordinate system, it is possible to choose whether to choose the coordinate system or not inside the project or the survey. The dialog box reports all the coordinate systems available in Topko database. Coodinate systems are arranged in groups: each group contains different systems such as, for example, all the systems of a particular country. From Group list box, select the group containing the coordinate system you want to use; from System list box, select one of the coordinate systems suggested. The tool displays the Ellipsoid, the Datum and the Projection defined by the coordinate system. The ellipsoid and the projection can't be modified, while it is possible to choose the datum to be associated to the coordinate system; in this way, it is possible to choose the best datum for the survey zone. Button Change opens a dialog box inside which it is possible to add, delete and modify coordinate systems.

17

Topko

The tool displays the features of the coordinate system set in the work; by New button it is possible to create a new system or a new group; the tool prompts to set a name for the group or system to be created, then it displays the following settings window:

Save. The command allows to save the settings of the reference system;

Creation of the local system

By Create local system button, it is possible to create a new coordinate system based on a plane projection tangent to the ellipsoid in the coordinate point defined by the user; it is only for topographic use and it can be applied only to small extension areas. Through the definition of the local system, the transformation of geographic coordinates into plane coordinates is simplified when the system parameters of that specific area are unknown.

18

Topko

Define the name of the new local system in Name of system to create edit box; specify Datum and Linear unit. In the lower part of the table it is possible to specify the geographic coordinates (referred to the ellipsoid), the coordinates of system center and the corresponding plane coordinates. Press Create to create a new system that will be added to the *Local - Local system group.

Use of IGM grids

As far as the calculation of GPS measures, it is possible to set Gauss-Boaga system as coordinate system and use IGM grides to calculate plane coordinates from geographic coordinates; as far as the transformation of elevations is concerned, it is possible to use a IGM grid or other geoid models.

In order to enable the calculation procedure to use IGM grids to transform GPS coordinates on GaussBoaga system, it is necessary to carry out the following settings: To transform GPS coordinates into ED-50 system set data as in the window below:

In System it is possible to set East or West fuse.

19

Topko

To transform GPS coordinates into ROMA40 system (Gauss-Boaga) set data as in the following window:

Press Info geoids... to set the path in which grid files are present and to verify the area they cover.

20

Topko

Set the path in which grid files are present in Grid path input field. By Info geoids... it is possible to verify, for any geoid model available, the area it is referred to; it is also possible to calculate the ondulation value corresponding to geographic coordinates.

Points tab

In this page it is possible to check some display parameters of survey points.

Labels style
Default style to use to represent topographic point labels.

Text shifting
It is possible to specify the polar coordinates of the block of labels associated to each point, provided the angle and the distance from the point itself are indicated.

Size
Allows to set the size of the symbol representing the point and the size of the labels associated to it.

Show data point

Allows to specify data to be displayed for each point in the graphic display.

Request for data point

On inserting a point in the graphic management, the tool will ask you to specify, besides position, also other data (name, code, elevation, etc.), as set in this group of options.

21

Topko

Symbols tab

It is possible to set a particular symbol for the three main categories of survey points: topographic, station and datum points. Pressing Browse button, it is possible to choose the symbol or the block desired. See Selection of symbols/blocks.

22

Topko

Drawing grid tab

Drawing grid allows to create a grid on the whole drawing, according to a step defined by the user. Through list box Drawing grid you can choose the kind of drawing grid you prefer, since it is possible to see its preview displayed on the right side of the dialog box. You can change the kind of drawing grid by mouse-clicking on the preview.

Limits
It is possible to set manually the limits of the grid to be drawn or, by choosing Automatic option, make the tool draw the drawing grid using drawing limits.

Size
Allows to set the size of the symbol representing the grid point and the size of the labels associated to it.

Step
It is possible to set the step (distance between two symbols) in the direction of abscissas as well as ordinates. Moreover, it is possible to set how many Steps should exceed the sheet limits.

23

Topko

Miscellaneous tab

In this tab it is possible to check some generic features concerning the display of planimetric entities.

Text size
Triangles: Size of triangle number text ; Contour lines: Size of contour lines elevation text ; Allotments: Size of allotment description text ; Axis elements: Size of the texts displaying the parameter of axis elements Sections: Size of section name text ;

Triangles symbols
Allows to decide which symbols to use for the triangles display: Lines: part of the lines that join the triangle barycenter to its vertexes are drawn. Number: displays the triangle number allowing to compare it with the reports. None: it draws only the sides.

Symbol size
Sights: Size of the sight direction arrow. Constraints: Size of segment perpendicular to boundary line. Sections: Size of the segment representing the section point of view. Error ellipse scale: scale factor for the display of the error ellipses calculated by the least square adjustment algorithm for the survey stations. Since the ellipses are normally very small, if the scale factor increases, also the ellipses display will be increased. Polyline slope: size of the symbol representing the slope of each segment that constitutes the polyline.

24

Topko

Text style tab

Through this tab you can set the font to be used in the visualization of the writings concerning: Survey points ; Contour lines labels; Drawing grid labels; Cross sections name.

Select the font you want to use from the list box. To load the fonts see Load fonts

25

Topko

Titles tab

It is possible to use these two rows to set a description related to the project, the designer, etc.

26

Topko

Cross-sections project properties

It is possible to activate the project properties dialog box as follows: Menu File > Project properties Command line: DDPAR

The dialog box is subdivided into tabs which allow to modify some parameters concerning data visualization and project management.

27

Topko

Cross sections settings

Decimals
In this group it is possible to set the number of decimals to be used in the display of coordinates, elevations, angles and distances. Settings refer to both the graphic display and the reports that can be obtained.

Stations
Station display mode of sections can be set through Display mode list box. The two available methods are:

Standard: one station of 1234.567 meters is displayed as 1234.567. X+YYY.ZZZ: one station of 1234.567 meters is displayed as 1+1234.567.

Project language
Language in which the project has been performed. Its purpose is to make sure the typical sections do not use the tool language codes but the codes of the language with which the project has been generated.

28

Topko

Graphic window tab

Through this tab it is possible to set visualization mode and colors of the grid of reference that appears in the sections graphic window.

Grid
Distance intervals: this value specifies how many subdivisions have to be done in the graphic window on the abscissa (distances). Higher is the number of subdivisions higher are the vertical lines that appear on the graphic window. Elevation intervals: this value specifies how many subdivisions have to be done in the graphic window on the ordinate (elevations). Higher is the number of subdivisions higher are the horizontal lines that appear in the graphic window. Color: by pressing the button Color it is possible to set the color of the grid of reference. Line type: it is possible to choose whether the grid of reference should be drawn with continuous or dot lines.

29

Topko

Titles tab

It is possible to use these two rows to set a description related to the project, the designer, etc.

30

Topko

Survey properties
A set of data and parameters concerning not the project but the active sub-project are grouped in this section. This means that inside a single project there can be more sub-projects, each one with general data apart from the others. See Subprojects management. The management of the survey properties can be activated through one of the following methods: Toolbar Topography Menu Survey > Survey properties Command line: DDSPROP

31

Topko

Drawing Filters tab

Through this page you can check the display of all active sub-project topographic entities: if check box is active, then the corresponding entity will be visible, if not, it will be invisible. Through Lock topographic points option it is possible to block subproject survey points in order to avoid possible wrong selections that could cause a shifting on points position or, in the worst of the cases, their total cancellation. The drawing filters act on the entity visibility apart from the layer which the entity belongs to; this way, it is possible to decide, for example, whether to make all survey points invisible even if they belong to different layers. Without this option it would have been necessary to freeze all layers containing points risking to freeze also the other entities. Even if an entity is set as visible, when the layer which the entity belongs to is freezed or disabled the entity is not visualized . By selecting the item All subprojects you can assign all the current subproject settings to all the other subprojects. In this way, for example, it is possible to make invisible the points of all subprojects using only one command without having to activate each subproject and for each of them make all points invisible. By selecting the item Current subproject all settings are assigned only to the current subproject.

32

Topko

Start station tab

In this tab it is possible to set start station data; this is not an indispensable phase for survey calculation, because even if one or more data are lacking, the tool decides automatically how to carry out the calculation: the station performing the first reading in field book of measures is considered as start station and it assumes zero coordinates. The horizontal angle of the first reading in the fieldbook of measures is assumed as azimuth of the first side. If, on the contrary, these data are present, the tool will use them for survey calculation. Start station name: specify the name of the first station of the fieldbook of measures. The name specified should be one of the names displayed in the fieldbook of measures table. Station description. Description of the start station point. This definition describes the first station in the creation of the fieldbook for PREGEO. E, N, Elevation. Start station coordinates. For plane-altimetric surveys, you have to set the start station elevation, otherwise survey elevations can't be calculated. First Azimuth. The first azimuth is necessary to calculate the correction angle of the start station so as to direct the survey to North. This list box assumes the following values: None: the correction angle of the first station assumes zero coordinates returning a survey already directed to North. Angular value: the tool asks the name of an observed point, already listed in the fieldbook of measures table, to calculate the horizontal angle and the real azimuth (referred to North) of the corresponding measure. Observed point: the tool asks the name of an observed point, listed in the fieldbook of measures table, to calculate the horizontal angle, and also listed in the datum table, to calculate the coordinates. Coordinates: the tool asks the name of an observed point listed in the fieldbook of measures table to calculate the horizontal angle and the East and North point coordinates.

33

Topko

GPS Station

In this page it is possible to set all the parameters necessary for survey calculation by using GPS baselines. Without some of these parameters calculation cannot be performed.

First GPS station

Baseline start point: it is the name of the survey origin (base). The geocentric coordinates of this point will be summed to the components of the baselines to determine the geocentric coordinates of any point surveyed. X,Y,Z Geocentric: geocentric coordinates of survey origin (base). Base Antenna Height: height of survey origin antenna (base). Station description: description of survey origin point (base).

Local plane coordinates

E,N,Elevation: plane coordinates corresponding to survey origin point (base). To work on local area set these fields to value 0.

Other
Matrix type: identifies the precision parameters that can go with baselines; such parameters can be:

the 6 parameters of variance-covariance matrix the 6 elements of co-factors matrix and RMS.

DOP type: DOP type reported, GDOP or PDOP. DOP Value: DOP value measured. 34

Topko

Note. Such data are not used by the tool during calculation: They are required to be correctly interpreted in generating the fieldbook for Pregeo.

G.P.S. tab

In this tab it is possible to specify the ellipsoid which the geographic coordinates, available inside the table of GPS coordinates , refer to.

Ellipsoid: coordinates refer to the ellipsoid of the coordinate system already set in Project properties . WGS84: coordinates refer to the ellipsoid of WGS84 coordinate system. Pseudo-WGS84: coordinates refer to a WGS84 coordinate system whose center is shifted and so it does not coincide with the earth center; in order to transform coordinates in WGS84 it is necessary to translate them on three axes X,Y, and Z. The tool asks to indicate the name of a point present inside the GPS coordinate table (in this case pseudo-WGS84 coordinates), and the corresponding values on WGS84 coordinate system so that the tool can calculate shifting values.

35

Topko

Calculation parameters tab

Sight tolerances
Horizontal angles (c): in case of multiple readings of a point, the tool tests the angular difference among the different sights; if it exceeds the value already set in this text box, the tool displays the error in the survey calculation window allowing to stop the calculation. If the field is empty the tool performs no check. Correction angles (c): if the correction angle of a station is calculated according to different readings at different points, the tool tests the angular difference among the different correction angles; if it exceeds the value already set in this text box, the tool displays the error in the survey calculation window allowing to stop the calculation. If the field is empty the tool performs no check. Horizontal distances : in case of multiple readings of a point, the tool tests the difference of the horizontal distances among the different sights; if it exceeds the value already set in this text box, the tool displays the error in the survey calculation window allowing to stop the calculation. If the field is empty the tool performs no check. Height differences: in case of multiple readings of a point, the tool tests the difference of the height differences among the different sights; if it exceeds the value already set in this text box, the tool displays the error in the survey calculation window allowing to stop the calculation. If the field is empty the tool performs no check.

Point tolerances
Coordinate difference: when a point is calculated with different methods (snellius, earthed opening, etc.), it checks that the distance between coordinates does not exceed the value set in this text box; if it exceeds the already set value, the tool displays the error in the survey calculation window allowing to stop the calculation. If the field is empty the tool performs no check. 36

Topko

Height difference: when a point is calculated according to different stations, it checks that the height difference does not exceed the value already set in this text box; if the height difference exceeds it, the tool displays the error in the survey calculation window allowing to stop the calculation. If the field is empty the tool performs no check.

Onward intersection tolerances

2D Minimum height difference: in case of onward intersections where vertical angles (Zenith) are present, the tool calculates both the stations point elevation and if the difference between the two elevations exceeds the value already set in this text box, the tool displays the error in the survey calculation window allowing to stop the calculation. If the field is empty the tool performs no check. 3D Minimum distance: in case of 3D onward intersections, the tool calculates the minimum distance between the two 3D straight lines joining the instrument and the observed point; if this distance exceeds the value already set in this text box, the tool displays the error in the survey calculation window allowing to stop the calculation. If the field is empty the tool performs no check. This test can be performed only if, in the Survey calculation dialog box, the 3D Intersection with two bearings option has been set.

Devices: Minumum internal angle

Minumum internal angle: If any calculation devices have been set in Topographic calculation box (Trilateration, Snellius-Pothenot, resection 2 points, intersection angle-angle) the minimum internal angle is the angular value below which the device set will not be performed.

Traverse calculation tab

37

Topko

Traverse closure tolerances

Use closure formulas: it allows to choose whether to set directly the traverse closure tolerance values (Angular, Linear) for the closed-loop and closed traverses; alternatively, pressing button Formulas, it is possible to obtain the values from the calculation of specific formulas by defining factors. Angular: angular error maximum value tolerated in the traverse closure calculation. If the angular error calculated is higher than the value set in this text edit box, the tool points out the error in the survey calculation window allowing to stop the calculation. If the field is empty the tool performs no check. If you use the closure formulas, this value is directly calculated on the basis of the already set factors. Linear: linear error maximum value tolerated in the traverse closure calculation. If the linear error calculated is higher than the value set in this text edit box the tool points out the error in the survey calculation window allowing to stop the calculation. If the field is empty the tool performs no check. If you use the closure formulas, this value is directly calculated on the basis of the already set factors. Elevation: elevation error maximum value tolerated in the traverse closure calculation. If the elevation error calculated is higher than the value set in this text edit box the tool points out the error in the survey calculation window allowing to stop the calculation. If the field is empty the tool performs no check.

Calculation of angular and linear closure tolerances using formulas

Press button Formulas to open the following dialog box:

This window shows the two formulas used to calculate the angular error and the linear error; each formula uses the following known values: N: Traverse number of vertexes; L: Traverse length; D: Distance between vertexes.

38

Topko

Calculation of the angular error

To calculate the angular error it is necessary to use 3 factors C1, C2 and C3 that can be set in the corresponding text edit box. By setting the values of the 3 factors it is possible to customize the calculation of the angular error to fit it to the most common formulas used. According to the Italian Cadastral policy the angular error must be calculated using the following formula: Angular error = 0.01*SQRT(N) to fit the closure formulas to the previous formula it is sufficient to set the following values to the 3 factors: C1 = 0.01 C2 = 0 C3 = 1

Calculation of the linear error

To calculate the linear error it is necessary to use 5 factors C4, C5, C6, C7 and C8 that can be set in the corresponding text edit box. By setting the values of the 5 factors it is possible to customize the calculation of the linear error to fit it to the most common formulas used. According to the Italian Cadastral policy the linear error must be calculated using the following formula: open traverses: Linear error = 1 / 6000 * SQRT( i*D^2) + 0.5 closed traverses: Linear error = 1 / 6000 * SQRT( i*D^2) to fit the closure formulas to the previous formula it is sufficient to set the following values to the 5 factors: open traverses: C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 = = = = = 0.5 6000 0 0 1

closed traverses: C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 = = = = = 0 6000 0 0 1

Error distribution
Linear error: it is possible to choose one of the following methods: Number of vertexes: the linear error is distributed into equal parts on each side of the traverse; it is used for measures obtained from the diastimeter as the distance error is not proportional to the distance itself. Distance: the linear error is distributed in proportion to the length of the traverse sides; SQRT(Distance): the linear error is distributed in proportion to the traverse sides length square root; Angular error: the angular error is distributed into equal parts on each vertex of the traverse; Elevation error: it is possible to choose one of the following methods: Number of vertexes: the elevation error is distributed into equal parts on each vertex of the traverse; Distance: the elevation error is distributed in proportion to the traverse sides length; SQRT(Distance): the elevation error is distributed in proportion to the traverse sides length square root; Elevation difference: the elevation error is distributed in proportion to the difference in height of the 39

Topko

traverse sides; SQRT(Elevation difference): the elevation error is distributed in proportion to the square root of the difference in height of the traverse sides.

Differential leveling tab

Leveling: in this list box you can set the kind of leveling that you are performing: High precision, Precision, Technical. Max distance level - stadia: it is possible to set the suggested maximum distance between level and stadia. If during the calculation this value is lower, the tool displays the error in the differential leveling adjustment window. If the field is empty the tool performs no check. Factor: factor to be used for the calculation of the maximum error tolerated. Use the following formula to perform the calculation: Tol.max=Factor*Sqrt(Length)

40

Topko

Environmental data tab

In this tab you can set all the physical and environmental parameters that can influence survey calculation: Temperature: ambient temperature in C ; Pressure: ambient pressure in mmb ; Refraction Coefficient: it allows to calculate the atmospheric refraction adjustment; Average X: survey average value in X; it is possible to calculate average coordinates by using Calculate button, or by indicating a point by button;

Average Y: survey average value in Y; Average elevation: survey average elevation; Terrestrial radius: in meters ; it allows to calculate the terrestrial sphericity adjustment; if the program is configured also with G - GPS data module and if, in Project properties, a coordinate system has been defined, then it will be possible to calculate the local terrestrial radius by using button Calculate. Linear Deformation: Linear deformation module; if the program is configured also with G - GPS data module and if, in Project properties, a coordinate system has been defined, then it will be possible to calculate the linear deformation on X and Y average values of the survey by using button Calculate.

Use of environmental data in survey calculation

In the calculation of coordinates, starting from the measures taken by the instrument, the tool takes into account the following parameters:

41

terrestrial sphericity atmospheric refraction atmospheric pressure

Topko

temperature reduction of distances at sea level

reduction of distances at projection plane If the atmospheric correction and the refraction correction have already been calculated by the instrument, it is necessary to specify them in the topographic instruments parameters: from menu Survey select the item Topographic instruments; select the option Use instruments specifications and then select also the options Atmospheric correction and Refraction correction. This way, the tool will not perform again the corrections since the instrument has already applied them.
It is necessary to set the following environmental data: Average elevation: used with the terrestrial radius value for the reduction of distances at sea level. Temperature and Pressure: used for the calculation of the atmospheric correction. The following formula is used: atmospheric correction = 281.8 - ( 0.29065 * Pressure ) / ( 1 + 0.00366 * Temperature ) in ppm the temperature must be in C and the pressure in mb; the atmospheric correction is applied on slope distance and influences the calculation of the reduced distance. If you know only the horizontal distance the calculation is not applied. Terrestrial radius: if defined influences the calculation of sphericity, refraction and reduction at sea level. If not defined it doesn't allow to calculate any of them. Refraction coefficient : standard value k=0.13, with the terrestrial radius value it allows to calculate the reduced distance starting from the slope distance. Linear deformation module : value used to reduce the horizontal distance at the sea level at the cartographic plane (gauss-boaga, cassini soldner, gauss-kruger, etc.). Supposing you have the slope distance, the application sequence of corrections is the following: - atmospheric correction due to pressure and to temperature : Real slope Distance = ( Taken distance not correct ) * (1+ ppm*10-6) where ppm is the atmospheric correction in mmm/km This correction is applied only if the instrument is not expected to do it and if the temperature and pressure values are set. - reduction of the real slope distance to the horizontal distance: Horizontal distance in m= Y - A * X * Y Difference in height in m = X + B * Y 2 Where : X = ( Real slope distance ) * Abs( Sin (Taken vertical angle ) ) Y = ( Real slope distance ) * Cos(Taken vertical angle ) A = ( 1 - k / 2 ) / R = 1.47*10-6 B = ( 1 - k ) / ( 2 * R ) = 6.83*10-8 k= 0.13 Refraction coefficient R=6378000 Terrestrial radius in m If terrestrial radius and refraction coefficient are not defined the formula is the following: Horizontal distance in m= ( Real slope distance ) * Abs( Sin (Taken vertical angle ) ) Difference in height in m = ( Real slope distance ) * Cos(Taken vertical angle ) - reduction at sea level : Distance at sea level in m = Horizontal distance * ( 1 - Elevation at sea level / Terrestrial radius ) If terrestrial radius and elevation are not defined it is not applied. - reduction at cartographic rapresentation plane. Reduced distance at cartographic rapresentation plane = Reduced distance at sea level * Linear deformation module 42

Topko

Styles tab

It is possible to define some styles for the representation of measure lines ( total station measure and baseline) and of parcels. Styles are contained in the project file and can be shared by different projects. The window allows to customize the following settings:

Measures/Baselines style
The style allows to choose whether to represent the measure line with direction arrow and also the arrow size. By pressing on Styles... button the following window will appear:

The table allows to customize the following properties of the style selected: Measure direction. By choosing this option, with the measure line also an arrow indicating the direction of the sight will be drawn; 43

Topko

Symbol size. Introduce a value equal to the size of the arrow symbol.

Parcel style
Parcel style allows to make active all the settings concerning labels, data to display, number of decimals and possible prefixes in the parcel labels. By pressing on Styles button the following window will appear:

The table allows to customize the following properties of the style selected: Labels. Text style. Chooses a text style from the list; Text size. Sets text height in mm; Text color. Chooses colour to set to the text; Data. Chooses among the options the data to be displayed; Decimals. Area. Sets the number of decimals of the area value; Labels prefix. Allows to set a prefix to add to the labels for any datum displayed.

Styles table toolbar

Style: Selects a style from the list; New style. Allows to create a new style;

44

Topko

Copy style. Copies an existing style; the following window will appear, where it will be possible to define the name of the style to be created:

Delete style. Deletes an inserted style; Import style. Allows to import a style from an external path; Export style. Allows to save the style in an external path, so that it can be activated in following works; Help. Activates the topic of the cooesponding guide.

45

Topko

Hydrology

Display triangle slopes vectors: by activating this option, the triangle maximum slope vector is drawn in the middle of each triangle. Apply to all subprojects: by activating this option all the settings contained in Hydrology page will be reported also on all the other survey subprojects available in the file. Slope vector Colour: color with which to display the line and the arrow of maximum slope. Arrow type: kind of arrow with which to represent maximum slope direction. Arrow size (mm): arrow size in mm. Fixed length (mm): length of maximum slope line; with this option maximum slope line has the same length in every triangle. Proportional length: with this option, the length of maximum slope line is proportional to the slope itself; the bigger the slope is, the longer the length of the line will be. In this case it is possible to set the scale factor to use to adapt the length to the kind of drawing. Slope text Display slope text: when this option is active, the tool will display, for each triangle, the value of maximum slope of the triangle itself. Number of decimals: number of decimals to use to display the slope. Display angle text: when this option is active the tool will display, for each triangle, the value of the direction angle of the triangle itself. Number of decimals: number of decimals to use to represent direction angle. Text style: style of the text to use to represent slope text and direction angle text. Colour: color with which to display slope and direction angle text. 46

Topko

Text height (mm): height of the text with which to display slope and direction angle text. Text width (mm): height of the text with which to display slope and direction angle text. Press OK button to confirm the settings.

Topographic profiles tab

The tool allows to set the following information: Cross-section width: Defines the width of the cross section that will appear in the planimetry; Initial section: Specifies the value of the profile start station.

47

Topko

Titles tab

To set a description related to the active subproject, it is sufficient to insert it in the last two rows of this page. The first two rows cannot be edited because they are associated to the description of the project. These descriptions will be associated to the drawings and the reports. By Copy from subproject... command it is possible to copy the titles set in a different subproject.

48

Topko

Fieldbook of measures table

All data concerning the topographic survey are put together in a single dialog box, grouping all the data tables arranged in a tree structure; by a single click you can gain access to GPS point tables, baselines, measures, chains and offsets, traverse stations, datum points and coordinates. It is possible to filter data according to the station selected, while specific options allow to highlight data by different colours, according to survey code or station name. From this window it is possible to gain access to subproject properties and to survey calculation window. Survey management by table is a very convenient and fast tool to control the work data. The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar: Topography Menu Survey > Survey data manager Command line: TBSURV

The following window will appear:

The page is subdivided into three parts:

the upper side allows to choose the survey subproject whose data have to be displayed; the properties of the subproject selected can be displayed by button ( see Survey

properties) and survey calculation window(see Survey Calculation); moreover, it is also possible to open a new window for survey management from table, to display more tables at the same time by button.

The page on the left lists in a tree structure all the data tables available in the survey, allowing to activate them simply by a mouse click on the corresponding writing; the number between brackets indicates the amount of data contained in that table:

49

Topko

By selecting symbol, the stations will be displayed next to the first three items, and the number between brackets will indicate the total number of measures or points they contain:

Survey tab has two display modes:

It can be kept fixed next to the table; with a mouse click on icon, the table is reduced to a button positioned at the table side:

50

Topko

By passing the mouse over the icon, the table is displayed in full again.

By selecting an item in survey data, the corresponding full table will appear in the table on the right. In this way it is possible to pass from a data table to the other in a very fast and easy way.

Any table possesses a set of local commands allowing to manage and customize the table. (see table toolbar)

Table toolbar
In the tables of Survey management from table a set of utilities appear, that can be activated by table toolbar:

Table standard editing commands

The first six icons activate each table standard editing commands: Cut: cuts selected cells; Copy: copies selected cells; Paste: pastes the cells previously copied or cut;

51

Topko

Change rows: modifies automatically a group of cells belonging to a table column. The change can consist in setting the same value to all the cells, in cancelling the content of all the cells or also in increasing the cells value. Find and replace: allows to find and if necessary to replace, all the recurrences of a certain value in the table or one recurrence at a time.

Filter: It is possible to apply a filter to one or more columns, so as to make visible only the rows whose content meets the condition set. In each table different filters can be activated at the same time, one for each column.

52

Topko

Print command
Print command activates the table of printings, which can be activated also by File>Print menu:

From this window it is possible to customize the reports to be performed. Starting the print from table is different from starting it from File menu for the following reasons: 1. If some rows have been selected, only such rows will be printed; if no rows have been selected, the full print will be generated. 2. The print follows the display order currently set in the table.

Filters by station and by code

The command Rows color by station contained in some tables, allows to highlight rows by applying the same colour, according to the station; on the laft side of the window next to the station name, the reference colour will appear:

53

Topko

The command Rows color by code contained in some tables, applies the same background colour to the rows containing data with the same code:

54

Topko

Display commands
By or command it is possible to zoom on the graphic, so that the resulting view will be centered on the measure or on the point selected.

Coordinates
By topographic coordinates we mean the set of topographic points representing a survey. These coordinates are very important, because they are the connection between Topography and Road design: in fact, through the coordinates it is possible to obtain a road longitudinal profile and cross sections. Besides, they are a base concept both for cadastral management and for the management of mathematical models. They are therefore of the utmost importance for the management of any topographic work. The tool does not admit points with the same name; for this reason different checks are performed, both on inserting / importing the data and on modifying them.

Check point name

The tool does not admit points with the same name. The check starts during the insertion/modification and importation of the survey points. On inserting and modifying the data, the tool prevents a name already assigned to a point from being assigned to another point. During the importation the tool verifies, for each point imported, whether another point exists with the same name; in case another point is found, the tool displays both the coordinates and allows to carry out one of the following operations: calculate the average between the coordinates, keep the existing point, replace the existing point with the new point, rename the new point.

Replace: Replaces the coordinates of the existing point with the coordinates of the new point. Replace all: Replaces the coordinates of all the existing points with the coordinates of the new points. Keep existing: Keeps the coordinates of the existing point Keep all:Keeps the coordinates of all the existing points Rename from: Renames the new point with the name indicated in the input field. If the option Add suffix is active, a suffix will be added to the point name. 55

Topko

Rename all: Renames all the points starting from the name indicated in the input field. If the option Add suffix is active, a suffix will be added to the point name. Average: Assigns to the existing point the average calculated between coordinates Average all: Assigns to all the existing points the average calculated between coordinates.

Table of topographic coordinates

The table of topographic coordinates contains data referred to the survey points available in the current subproject. It is possible to have access to this table through: Toolbar Topography Menu Survey > Table of surveyed points Command line: TBCOORD

Select the item Coordinates in the box on the left; the following table will appear:

Note. The tool prevents a name already used by a point from being assigned to another point of the same subproject.

Functions of the table of topographic coordinates

Below are listed some of the functions of the table of topographic functions.

Any change made on table data has a direct effect on the graphic CAD and vice versa; The table can stay open together with the CAD window, offering a double display of data, both from the graphic and from the table point of view; On the left it is possible to gain access to a sub menu, to display all the points surveyed by the same station.

56

Topko

The table allows to manage other data, besides standard ones; in fact, six tables are available,which have been arranged precisely for the management of such secondary data as the second point elevation, the name of the station that observes the point, etc.:

Table of topographic coordinates (standard) Table of topographic coordinates and 2nd elevation Topographic coordinates and observing station Topographic coordinates and chains and offsets Station/Offset from axis Point properties The different kinds of tables are activated by selecting the different pages at the bottom of the table.

Table of topographic coordinates (standard)

The standard table of coordinates allows to define all data necessary for the definition of a survey.

The table needs the following data for each point: Name. Name of survey point; Code. Point code (see Survey codes table); E Point abscissa; 57

Topko

N Point ordinate; Elevation. Point elevation (it can also be omitted for only-planimetric surveys); Description. Description; Description 2. Added description.

Table of topographic coordinates and 2nd elevation

The standard table of coordinates allows not only to define all the data needed for the definition of a survey, but also to manage the point second elevation, which is usually calculated by the program during the phase of earthwork calculation by levelings or intersection of models.

For each point, the table needs the following data: Name. Name of survey point ; Code. Point code (see Survey codes table) ; E Point abscissa ; N Point ordinate ; Elevation. Point elevation (it can also be omitted for only-planimetic surveys) ; 2nd elevation. Point second elevation ; Elev.Diff. Difference between the two elevations (not changeable); Description. Description ;

Table of topographic coordinates and Station

This table is used for the management of those supplementary data needed to create a fieldbook of measures starting from the coordinates; it demands, as supplementary field, compared to the standard table, the name of the tachimetric station where the point has been surveyed. It is indispensable to input the name of the station in order to perform the elaboration Creation of fieldbook of measures from coordinates, which allows to create measures from the data included in this table and in the Table of traverses only.

For each point, the table needs the following data : Station. Name of tachimetric station where the point has been surveyed; if the point is a the first tachimetric station, then station name and point name must coincide; Name. Name of survey point; Code. Point code (see Survey codes table) ; E Point abscissa; N Point ordinate; 58

Topko

Elevation Point elevation (it can also be omitted for only-planimetric surveys) ; Description. Description;

Table of topographic coordinates and Chains and offsets

This table is used for the management of those supplementary data needed to create chain and offset readings from the coordinates; it demands, as supplementary data, compared to the standard table, the name of start and orientation points of the chain where the point has to be determined. The input of the name of the two chain points is necessary to perform the elaboration Creation of fieldbook of measures from coordinates, which allows to create fieldbook and chain and offset readings starting from the data contained in this table and in the Table of traverses only.

The table needs the following data for each point : Start Chain. Name of chain start point ; End Chain. Name of chain orientation point ; Name. Name of survey point ; Code. Point code (see Survey codes table) ; E Point abscissa ; N Point ordinate ; Elevation Point elevation (it can also be omitted for only-planimetric survey) ; Description. Description ;

Table of topographic coordinates and Station and offset from axis

This table allows to set a relationship between survey points and a reference axis using the stations and the distance of the point from the axis.

La table needs the following data to be specified for each point: Name. Name of survey point; Code. Point code(see Code Table) ; Station. Station of point projection along the axis. Offset. Distance of the point from the axis. Angle. Direction of the axis on the projection point. Elevation. Point elevation. 2^ elevation. Second point elevation. 59

Topko

Elevation difference. Elevation difference. Axis. Axis the point is connected to.

Table of topographic coordinates and Point properties

This table allows to set some properties influencing the visualization and the elaborations of the points.

The table needs the following data for each point : Name. Survey point name; Visible. Allows to make the point visible or invisible. Dtm. If the option is active, the tool uses the point for the creation of the triangle mathematical model. Text visible. Allows to set the visibility of the texts associated to the point. Text size type. Allows to set the size type of the texts associated to the point:

Default: uses the size set in project properties. User: personalized size defined by the user.

Text size. if in the previous field you choose the option User, it will be possible to set the value desired. Symbol size type. It allows to set the size type of the symbol associated to the point:

Default: size defined in Project properties. Symbol (mm): size in mm.; Real (m): real size in meters.

Symbol size. If in the previous field you choose the option Symbol or Real, it will be possible to set the value desired. Symbol angle. Rotation angle of point symbol. Symbol. Symbol associated to survey point. For the graphic representation of the point, it is possible to choose among the symbols suggested or to choose a block among those present in the drawing. See Selection of symbols/blocks, How to draw and use a symbol to represent a point.

Utilities
From the table toolbar it is possible to activate utility commands. (see Table Toolbar). Other utility commands available in the table of coordinates are the following: Copy points to datum table. Quick command for copying the points selected on the table of datum points; Insert table on CAD. Creates a customizable CAD table: it is possible to insert all the points or only a selection, choose the columns to be displayed and their order (see Table of topographic points on CAD window) Moreover, by the table local menu it is possible to perform the following operations:

60

Topko

Set code
Assigns to the selected sight a code set by the user. See Survey codes table.

OK to complete the command. See Survey Code Table.

Description from code

If descriptions in Survey codes table have been modified, it is possible to update the table through this function.

Set station
Assign the name of the station indicated to all the selected rows. It is useful for the creation of the fieldbook of measures starting from coordinates. Creation of fieldbook of measures from coordinates.

Sort by name
Sorting of coordinates by point name.

Rename points
Renames points automatically, choosing a name on the first point of the selection and an increment as to that point:

61

Topko

OK to end the command.

Export to ASCII file

Exports table data by ASCII file following the order displayed.

E,N >> Station, Offset

By this command you can recalculate the station and the offset of the points selected from a reference axis, using the planimetric coordinates of the points. The prompts are exactly the same as for the command Calculate the station and the distance from the axis for a group of points

Station, Offset >> E,N

By this command you can recalculate the coordinates E, N of the points selected from a reference axis, using the stations and the distances specified for the points. The prompts are exactly the same as for the command Insert a topographic point, the station and the distance from the axis.

62

Topko

Transform entity into topographic point

The tool can recognize different kinds of entities and transform them into topographic points; in particular, start entities can be: points, texts or lines. The command is activated as follows: Menu Edit > Entities transformation Command line: ENTTRANSF

The following dialog box will appear:

In Start entity box, you choose the entity to transform, while in Final entity you choose the entity it has to be transformed into. The start entity can also be selected by the graphic with command.

Remove start entity: by this option the start entity, after being transformed, is deleted. Keep start layer: by this option the tool will not assign new layers to the transformed entities but it will keep the original layers. The tool prompts the selection of the entities to be transformed; once the selection has been carried out, the elements selected are transformed into the new entity. The entities to transform can also be selected by choosing an entity in the graphic window.

From points to topographic points

Starting from CAD Point type elements, the command transforms them into topographic points. As far as the texts, the tool can search the text that is closer to the points transformed and recognize such text as point name or elevation. Choose Point as start entity and Topographic point as final entity. The tool displays the following prompt: Text recognition, Ignore, point Name, point Elevation. Choose whether to recognize also the text associated to the point or ignore it; Select entities to transform. Select the CAD points to be transformed into topographic points. 63

Topko

Enter to carry out the command.

From texts to topographic points

To use with drawings in which the survey point is not identified with a point entity but with a text entity: the entity X, Y position stands for the point position, while the content of the text stands for the elevation. Also in this situation it is possible to transform the texts into topographic points.

The tool displays the following prompt: Select entities to transform. Indicate the texts to be transformed into topographic points. Enter to confirm the command; Elevation: from Text, from Position: Indicate whether the topographic point elevation must be set according to the position or according to the text; Enter to carry out the command.

From lines to topographic points

A specific procedure allows to recognize the topographic points by the drawings in which each topographic point is identified by two intersecting segments; a topographic point will be inserted in every intersection between two lines. As far as the texts, the tool can search the text that is closer to the points transformed and recognize such text as point name or elevation. Such utilities are extremely important to convert survey drawings, obtaining not only the point position but also such important information as name and elevation. Choose Line as start entity and Topographic point as final entity. The tool displays the following prompt: Recognize text, ignore, Point Name, Point Elevation. Choose whether to pass to the recognition of the text associated to the point or ignore it; Enter to confirm the command; Select entities to transform. Select the lines intersecting each other, in which to obtain a point positioned in the intersection. Enter to carry out the command. In this way, the tool will add a topographic point in the intersection point between the two lines.

Input of a survey point

You can activate the insert command using one of the following modes: Toolbar Topography Menu Survey > Coordinates > Surveyed point Command line: TPOINT

On CAD command line the following prompt will appear: Point: The tool asks to indicate the position of the point (see Input coordinates) Point data can be asked for either on CAD command line or by a dialog box. The mode to use can be set in the window of Project properties.

64

Topko

Point data from command line

On CAD command line the following prompt will appear: Point name: indicate the name to be assigned to the point Point elevation: specify the elevation to be assigned to the point; Second point elevation: specify the second point elevation; Point code: set a code to the point; Point description: introduce a description of the point; Station: specify a station; Auxiliary station: specify a possible auxiliary station; Note. The prompts following point position comply with what has been set in Points page of Project Properties window. Note. The tool prevents a name already used by a point from being assigned to another point of the same subproject.

Point data from dialog box

Per modificare le propriet dei punti inseriti si pu procedere in uno dei modi seguenti: Toolbar Survey Menu Survey > Topographic point > Points properties Command line: DDCHPRDTP

The tool displays the following prompt: Select objects: Window, PoiNt, Previous, All, Fence, Remove, Point code, Quick select, cancel: Select the points whose properties have to be modified. To modify a single point it is sufficient to click twice on it.

65

Topko

In Point data page it is possible to set the various data to assign to the point. In the other pages it is possible to set other properties of the point. Note. The window prevents a name already used by a point from being assigned to another point of the same subproject.

Point properties

In Point properties page it is possible to set the parameters concerning the display of the points selected: 66

Topko

Visible point: Specifies whether the points selected must be visible or invisible. DTM point: Specifies whether the points can be used to build a triangle digital model. Code. Codes associated to the points selected.

Size type: Allows to set the kind of size of the symbol associated to the point:

Default: size defined in project properties; Symbol (mm): size in mm.; Real (m): real size in metres.

Size. If in the previous field option Symbol or Real has been chosen, it is possible to set the value desired. Rotation. Rotation angle of point symbol. Default symbol. Uses as symbol of the points selected the symbol specified in project properties. By deactivating this option it is possible to choose a specific symbol for the points selected: by pressing Browse button it is possible to choose among the symbols proposed or choose a block among the ones available in the drawing. See Select symbols/blocks, How to draw and use one's own symbol to represent a point.

Texts

Style: allows to set the label style of the topographic points to use to represent the points selected. To set the style of topographic point labels see Topographic point labels style. Visible text. Sets visibility of texts associated to the points selected. Default size: Text size can be the one set in project properties, or it is possible to customize it by Size field. Rotation: Texts can be rotated by specifying an angular value in Rotation field. Show default point texts: allows to set the default sight available for topographic point labels. Default settings can be performed in Points page of Project properties. By deactivating this option it is possible 67

Topko

to set in Display point texts group the labels to be made visible/invisible for the points selected. In this way it is possible to customize, also for every single point, the labels to be made visible. In Properties page it is possible to modify the standard properties of such entities as Layer, Colour, Line type (see Modify object properties). By pressing Apply button it is possible to see the result of the changes made directly on the graphic window, without having to close the dialog box.

In Properties page it is possible to modify such entity default properties as Layer, colour and Linetype (see Change object properties).

By pressing Apply button, it is possible to see the result of the changes made on the graphic window, without having to close the dialog box.

Set Request for point data

Open Project properties window in one of the following ways: Menu File > Project properties Command line: DDPAR

Select Points page and, in Request for point data group select From window to insert point data from a dialog box and From command line to insert data on the graphic CAD command line.

68

Topko

Input of points at measured intervals or at equal distance

It can be necessary to create, on an object, survey points at measured intervals. In particular, it is possible to:

Specify the length of the segments (MEASURE)

Specify the number of segments the object has to be divided (DIVIDE) It is possible to measure and divide lines, arcs, circles and polylines.

Input of points at measured intervals

This input command can be activated by one of the following modes: Menu Survey > COGO > Measure Command line: MEASURE

On CAD command line the following questions appear: Block / Point / Survey point / <S>: S Segment length: specify the distance between points to be inserted. Select object: select the object along which to insert the points

69

Topko

Input of points at equal distance

This input command can be activated by one of the following methods: Menu Survey > COGO Divide Command line: DIVIDE

On CAD command line the following questions appear: Block / Point / Survey point / <S>: S Number of segments: specify the number of segments which the object has to be divided into. Select object: select the object along which to insert the points

Insert blocks at measured intervals

Insertion command is activated as follows: Menu Survey > COGO > Measure Command line: MEASURE

In the CAD command line the following prompts will appear: Block / Point / Survey point / <T>: B Choose to insert a block;

70

Topko

The following window will appear:

The window contains three boxes in which to specify the following information: Insertion settings. Insertion step: specify how far from each other the blocks must be inserted; Layer: select the destination layer of the blocks that will be inserted; Subproject: indicate the drawing subproject the blocks will belong to; Elevation settings. Elevaton by project: sets to the blocks the elevation of the object selected; Elevation fixed: sets to the blocks a fixed elevation, equal to the value specified ; Elevation by 3D model: determines the block elevation according to a mathematical model; Block settings. Block: it is possible to choose the block to insert by selecting it from the list of the blocks loaded; Scale: indicate the real scale of the block to be inserted; Rotation: specify the rotation with which to insert the block; By activating the option Block direction by object it is possible to vary the block rotation according to the object position.

71

Topko

Insert blocks at equal distance

Insertion command is activated as follows: Menu Survey > COGO > Divide Command line: DIVIDE

In the CAD command line the following prompts will appear: Block / Point / Survey point / <T>: B Choose to insert a block;

The following window will appear:

The window contains three boxes in which to specify the following information: Insertion settings. Number of segments: specify the number of segments into which to divide the object defining the blocks insertion step; Layer: select the destination layer of the blocks that will be inserted; Subproject: indicate the drawing subproject the blocks will belong to; Elevation settings. Elevaton by project: sets to the blocks the elevation of the object selected; 72

Topko

Elevation fixed: sets to the blocks a fixed elevation, equal to the value specified ; Elevation by 3D model: determines the block elevation according to a mathematical model; Block settings. Block: it is possible to choose the block to insert by selecting it from the list of the blocks loaded; Scale: indicate the real scale of the block to be inserted; Rotation: specify the rotation with which to insert the block; By activating the option Block direction by object it is possible to vary the block rotation according to the object position.

Drawing by codes
Drawing by codes allows to insert topographic points in the graphic window by taking advantage of the following possibilities: Direct drawing of lines between points: by activating some specific options it is possible to obtain the drawing of the lines between points on inserting the points themselves. Set directly symbol size and rotation: during the insertion it is possible to set the symbol size and its insertion angle. Customize toolbar: it is possible to insert in Drawing from codes toolbar some other buttons, each one allowing to insert topographic points with a specific code. In this way it is possible to insert different typologies of topographic points simply by selecting the corresponding button without having to enter the code manually. This set of functions is best applied in case the tool is used to insert points directly on field. In order to use these functions it is necessary to make the toolbar Drawing by codes visible.

Pen up or down: if this button is pressed, then the drawing of lines between codes is active. The drawing is made between points with the same code. To interrupt the drawing press the button again. The three buttons described below set the mode of drawing between points. Only one of the three buttons can stay active. Draw lines: points are joined by lines. Draw tangent arcs: points are joined by arcs tangent to each other. Draw non-tangent arcs: points are joined by arcs non-tangent to each other. Set symbol size: if this button is pressed, then the tool will ask to set the size of the point symbol as soon as its position has been specified. Set symbol rotation: if this button is pressed, then the tool will ask to set the rotation of the point symbol as soon as its position has been specified.

The two check list available in the toolbar report respectively: Survey codes: lists the survey codes available. The points that will be inserted will assume the current survey code. GIS themes: lists the GIS themes available. The GIS object inserted will be inserted in the current theme.

73

Topko

Customize toolbar
Toolbars can be customized by adding some buttons which correspond to survey codes. Only one of the buttons added remains pressed; the topographic point which will be inserted will assume automatically the survey code corresponding to the button pressed. Toolbar buttons can be customized by using the following commands: Menu Survey > Codes > Codes toolbar Command line: CODESTOOLBAR

The following window will appear:

This window reports: Code: list of survey codes. Themes: list of GIS themes. Icons: list of icons available in main tool Bitmap folder.

To add a button it is necessary to select an item for each of the three lists and then press Add button. To delete a button it is sufficient to select it from the toolbar situated in the upper part of the window and press Cancel button. In this way any button will be linked to a code and, possibly, to a GIS theme.

74

Topko

In the case exemplified in the widow above, the following window will appear:

However, in Survey codes table there is a page reporting the settings referred to toolbar buttons.

What explained above works together with the insertion of new topographic points or GIS objects. On inserting the topographic points it is possible to activate the toolbar options to obtain the working mode desired.

How to erase a survey point from graphic CAD

In order to erase a survey point directly from graphic CAD window, it is sufficient to use Erase command, which is used to erase any kind of entity.

How to modify a survey point

If you want to change the position of a survey point, it is possible to use all the edit functions provided by the graphic CAD (move, copy, rotate, etc.). A faster means to move survey points is to use Grips. Survey point grips are at least two: 1. the first is situated in the centre of the symbol representing the point and is necessary to perform the shift and the rotation of this point; 2. In case the point labels style is the default style, a grip is displayed on the first text associated to the point; otherwise, a grip is displayed on any label associated to the point. Grips are used to shift texts or make them invisible. Clicking on the first grip, the usual grip options appear on command line, thus allowing to change the position of the point. To rotate the point symbol choose the option Rotate symbol and then give the new symbol direction.

Edit point window

Edit point window is a particular window that allows a quick modification of data associated to survey points. Infact, it is sufficient to select a point and its data will appear in the window to be modified. Use one of the following methods to activate the Edit point window : 75

Topko

Menu Survey > Coordinates > Edit point window Command line: DDEDITPNT

It is sufficient to select by mouse a survey point on the screen so that all the data concerning this point appear in this dialog box where it is of course possible to modify them. It is possible to modify cartesian coordinates, elevation and second elevation. Other data are available in Data tab:

In this tab it is possible to modify name, code or description of the point selected. In order to make this changes operative, it is necessary to click on Apply button.

Interpolation of a point elevation

By this command you can interpolate a point elevation by using two points, a line, three points, a triangle or a whole triangle digital model. The command can be activated by one of the modes listed below: Toolbar Topography Menu Survey > Coordinates > Interpolation of elevation Command line: INTELEV

On CAD command line, the following questions appear: Elevation Interpolation by 2 points/Line/3 points/3D Polyline/Triangle/DTM <2> : specify whether to interpolate the elevation using two points, a line, three points, one triangle model, a 3D polyline or the whole triangle digital model. According to the option chosen, the tool will prompt for the insertion of two points, one line, three points, a 3D polyline or a triangle. Indicate the points to interpolate: select the points for which to calculate the elevation. 76

Topko

First of all, you have to indicate which is the point whose elevation has to be calculated. Then, the tool will ask you to indicate, according to the option chosen, 2 or 3 points, a polilyne or a triangle; these data will be used in order to calculate the elevation. Note. When the tool asks you to indicate interpolating points, it is necessary to operate as follows: Indicate by the mouse the point needed; answer to the question digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will search the indicated point inside the file and, if it finds this point, it will go on to the next question.

Move points on polyline

The command allows to move automatically onto a polyline points situated near the polyline itself. Moreover, it is possible to decide whether to assume the point elevations that are equal to the polyline ones.

The automatic shift of points is activated as follows: Toolbar: Survey Menu Survey > Topographic points > Move points on polyline Comand line: MOVPOINTS

The tool displays the following prompts: Indicate the interpolating polyline: Select polyline; Offset:<0.1> Indicate maximum distance between the polyline and the points to move; Elevation interpolation by polyline Yes/No: Choose whether to set to the points the polyline elevation.

The points contained in the area defined by the maximum distance from the polyline are therefore shifted onto that polyline.

How to change display parameters of a set of points

It is possible to modify labels and symbol size, as well as the symbology for a set of survey points. It is necessary to work using one of the following methods: Toolbar: Topography Toolbar: Objects Menu Survey > Coordinates > Point properties Menu Edit > Modify object Command line: DDCHPRDTP Command line: DDMODIFY

77

Topko

The command asks you to select all the points whose properties have to be changed. Then, the following window will appear:

Note. If a single topographic point is selected, a supplementary page will be displayed, allowing to modify point data (position, code, description, etc.).

Point properties
In Point properties tab, it is possible to set the parameters concerning the display of the points selected:

Visible point. Specifies whether the points selected must be visible or invisible. DTM point. Specifies whether the points can be used for building a triangle digital model. Code. Codes associated to the points selected.

Size mode. It allows to set the type of dimension of the symbol associated to the point:

Default: size already defined in Project properties; Symbol (mm): size in mm.; Real (m): real size in meters.

Size. if, in the previous field, you choose Symbol or Real option it is possible to set the value desired. Rotation. Rotation angle of the point symbol. Default symbol. the symbol used for the selected points is that specified in Project properties. Deactivating this option, it is possible to choose a specific symbol to associate to the points selected: pressing Browse button, it is possible to choose among the symbols suggested by the tool or you can choose one of the blocks present in the drawing. See How to select symbols/blocks, How to draw and use a symbol to represent a point.

78

Topko

Texts tab

Style: allows to set the label style of the topographic points to use to represent the points selected. To set topographic point label style see Topographic point label style. Visible text: Sets the visibility of texts assiciated to the points selected. Default size: Text size can be set in Project properties or you can personalize it through Size field. Rotation: Allows to customize the rotation angle of the label linked to the point. Show default point texts: allows to set the default sight available for topographic point labels. Default settings can be performed in Points page of Project properties. By deactivating this option it is possible to set in Display point texts group the labels to be made visible / invisible for the points selected. In this way it is possible to customize, also for every single point, the labels to be made visible.

In Properties page it is possible to modify the standard properties of entities such as Layer, Color and Linetype (see Modification of object properties).

By pressing Apply button, it is possible to see the result of the changes made directly on graphic window, without closing the dialog box.

Style of topographic point labels

Displaying topographic point labels is always determined by a style. When a new topographic point is inserted the tool assigns automatically a default style. Style allows to set the following properties:

type of labels to display text style to use for each label it is also possible to define color, font size and position compared with the point.

It is possible to create different styles and assign them to topographic points. A style can be assigned automatically by linking the style to a survey code. 79

Topko

Creating a new style

The management of topographic point label styles can be activated as follows: Menu Format > Topographic points label style Command line: DDPTEXTSTYLE

A window similar to the following will appear:

At first, the only style available is the Standard one, which cannot be modified. To create a new style press New button. The tool asks to indicate the name to set to the style. Now it is possible to pass to the definition of the style properties. On the left side of the window there is the list of all the possible labels to set to topographic points; select the labels to be made visible for the style created. To modify the properties of a single label it is necessary to make it active in the check list on the left; the current label is recognizable by the yellow colour and by the internal background. After selecting it, it is possible to work on input fields on the right of the check list. Height: character height. Width: character width. Delta X: horizontal shift, in mm, from point centre. Delta Y: vertical shift, in mm, from point centre. Color: color to set to the label. 80

Topko

A small preview allows to see how the point representation changes according to the parameters variation.

Finally, it is possible to set the text style to use to display the labels.

Rename style
In order to change the name of a style it is sufficient to select it from the list and press Rename button.

Delete a style
To delete a topographic point label style it is necessary to use Purge button. The command can be activated as follows: Menu Format > Purge > Topographic points label style Command line: PURGE P

81

Topko

Set default style

To set the default style to use to represent survey points it is necessary to open the window of Project properties. Menu File > Project properties Command line: DDPAR

Select Points page and choose the style desired from the list Labels style.

Set style by code

A style can be assigned to topographic points by survey codes. In survey codes table it is possible to set, for any code, the style with which to represent the points which will have that code. Codes table can be opened as follows: Menu Survey > Codes > Survey codes Command line: TBCOD

82

Topko

Style column allows to set a style to any single survey code.

Set a style to a set of points

To assign a specific style to one or more topographic points it is necessary to select them and open property window: Toolbar Survey Toolbar Objects Menu Survey > Coordinates > Point properties Menu Edit > Modify object Command line: DDCHPRDTP Command line: DDMODIFY

The tool asks to select the points; from the window now appearing, select Text page.

83

Topko

Select the style desired from Style check list.

Shifting of labels associated to survey points

Labels associated to survey points can be shifted manually or by using a specific command that carries out an analysis of all texts and avoids their superimposition.

Automatic shifting
Automatic shifting command analyzes each label and checks if it is superimposed on the other labels; if a superimposition is found, the tool changes the label position and again performs a check. When the label is in a position where no superimposition is found, then the tool will go on analyzing the next label; if the tool can't find an acceptable position for the label, then it will be possible to decide whether to make the label invisible or visible, even if superimposed on another label. There are eight positions avalable for labels and they correspond to the following position angles with reference to the point: 0, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350. The automatic shifting command of labels can be activated through one of the following methods: Menu Survey >Coordinates > Text automatic shifting Command line: CHKTXT

On command line the following question appears: Set invisible the texts that are not moveable Yes/No: in case the label can't be shifted it is impossible to make it invisible.

84

Topko

Manual shifting
In order to move manually the labels associated to survey points, it is necessary to use grips; if point labels style is a default style, a grip is displayed on the first label associated to the point; otherwise, a grip is displayed on each label associated to the point. Clicking on this grip the following options appear: Text position Standard/Cursor/Invisible/<C>: Standard option takes the labels back to the standard position (according to what is set in Points tab of Project properties dialog box), while Invisible option makes the label associated invisible (if the label was already invisible, the option Visible is available, which allows to display the label). If you choose the option Cursor, the tool will ask you to indicate the position of the labels directly with the cursor.

Symbol rotations
The rotation of the symbols associated to survey points can be performed in different ways: from the table of topographic coordinates, through grips, from point properties or using this command that quickens the whole operation by zooming on the point automatically, allowing the rotation and shifting the zoom on the next point up to the last point selected. Points on which to perform the rotation are selected through codes selection: the operation will be then performed only on those points whose code is among those selected. The command can be activated by one of the methods listed below: Menu Survey > Coordinates > Point symbol rotations Command line: SYMBROT

The following window appears showing a list of the codes present in the project:

From the table select the codes on which to perform the command: the tool will zoom on the first point whose code is among those selected. The following question appears: Symbol rotation angle: it is possible to rotate the symbol using the cursor or inserting the angle numeric value. Now, the tool performs the zoom to the next point and then asks the same question. 85

Topko

Rotation of topographic point labels

It is possible to specify a rotation angle of texts associated to survey points and introduce a value that differs from the default one. It is possible to operate in different ways: from the table of coordinates, by grips or by point properties.

Rotate labels from coordinate table

Activate the coordinate Table as follows: Toolbar: Topography Menu Survey > Survey data manager Command line: TBSURV

Select Point properties; the following window will appear:

Specify text rotation angle in Text angle.

Rotate labels by grips

Select a topographic point whose labels have to be rotated, then click on the text grip; the tool displays the following request: Text position, Standard, Cursor, Invisible, Rotate: Choose Rotate Text rotation< >: Specify rotation angular value. Press Enter to confirm the command.

Rotate labels from point properties

The command is activated as follows: Menu Survey > Topographic coordinates >Points properties Command line: DDCHPRDTP

Select points to change.

86

Topko

By activating Texts page, the following dialog box will appear:

In Rotation box specify the label rotation angle.

How to draw and use a symbol to represent a point

The tool gives the possibility to draw a personalized symbol allowing to use it to represent survey points. Follow the steps and rules listed below:

The symbol can be drawn using all the entities provided by the tool (lines, polylines, arcs, circles, etc.) and must be drawn with a maximum size of 1 m. After having drawn the symbol, it must be saved as a block (see Management of blocks). Use one of the following methods to indicate the tool to use the new block: 1. use Project properties dialog box, which allows you to choose the symbol to represent topographic points, station points and datum points. 2. use Survey codes table which allows to associate a specific symbol to each code. 3. use Points properties dialog box to change symbols in a group of points.

As far as the drawing of blocks like points, the tool transforms the given dimensions into mm. and then multiplies the obtained value for the symbols size set in Project properties dialog box. It is then possible to change the points size even if these are represented like blocks.

Transformation of drawing entities into topographic entities and vice versa

It often occurs that you have drawings, for example loaded from a DXF file, containing different kinds of topographic information: survey points, discontinuity lines, triangles mathematical models, etc; Drawing entities are not topographic entities. Therefore the tool does not consider the drawing point as a topographic point and the drawing line as a constrained line. For example, the drawing point and the topographic point are not the same since the drawing point is a simple graphic entity identified by 3 87

Topko

coordinates (x,y,and z), while the topographic point is a more complex entity to which a name, a code, a description, a symbol, etc. are associated. The tool offers the possibility to transform drawing entities into the corresponding topographic entities and vice versa. The following table shows you for each drawing entity the corresponding topographic entity and vice versa: Drawing entity Drawing point Text Blocks Lines Topographic Topographic Topographic Topographic entity point point (*) points Module Planimetry Planimetry Planimetry Planimetry

Topographic points(**) Constraints Straights Constraints Horizontal straights Triangles Horizontal curves Contour lines Topographic crosssections Horizontal alignment Allotments Planimetry polylines Cross-section elements Grade line Circular curve Parabolic curve Profile polylines Polylines Grade lines and circular curves Grade lines and parabolic curves Profile

Lines 3DFace Arcs

Planimetry Planimetry Planimetry

Polylines

Planimetry

Polylines Lines Arcs

Cross-sections Profile Profile

The third column of the grid indicates the module where it is possible to perform the transformation. (*) It also occurs that you have drawings containing a survey point which is not corresponding to a point entity but to a text entity: X,Y position of the entity corresponds to the point position and the text contents corresponds to the elevation. Even in this case, it is possible to transform texts into topographic points. (**) If the point is determined by the intersection of two lines it is possible to identify it by selecting both lines and transforming them into topographic points. In this way, the tool will add a topographic point in the intersection point. The command can be activated through one of the following methods: Menu Edit > Entities transformation Command line : ENTTRANSF

88

Topko

The following dialog box will appear :

In Start Entity box you choose the entity to be transformed, while in Final Entity you choose the entity it must be transformed into. The Start Entity can also be selected directly from the graphic by command.

Remove start entity: by this option, the start entity, once transformed, is removed. Keep start layer: by this option the tool will not assign new layers to the transformed entities but it will keep the original layers. The tool prompts the selection of the entities to be transformed; once the selection has been carried out, the elements selected are transformed into the new entity. The entities to transform can also be selected by choosing an entity in the graphic window.

Zoom on topographic point

By this command it is possible to zoom directly on a topographic point if its name is known. The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar View Menu View > Zoom > Point Command line: Zoom N

The tool displays the following request: Zoom on point: Point name, Settings: Choose whether to choose the point or pass to zoom window settings; Size of zoom area. Set the size of zoom window; Point on witch to zoom. Specify the name of the point to zoom on.

89

Topko

Selection of points by code

Besides the usual methods of selection of entities (see selection of objects ), it is also possible to select automatically a set of survey points by specifying their code. 1. Digit C (Code) to request message Select objects. 2. On CAD command line, specify the code of the points to be selected. 3. Press ENTER to complete the selection.

Display topographic point data with active command

When the cursor gets near a topographic point, when a point is requested in the graphic window, a small window will be displayed, reporting the data of the surveyed point.

Topographic point table on CAD window

By following a guided procedure, it is possible to create in a very fast way a cad type table containing data derived from datum point table and coordinate table. It is possible to activate the command by Survey data manager... using local menu of of datum point or coordinate table. button available in the

Note. Select the rows to report in the cad table; if they are not specified , the tool will report the whole table.

90

Topko

The following window will appear:

In the window it is necessary to specify the following information: Table header. Specify the table title; Select the columns to display: choose from the list the columns to be reported in the cad table; by using Up and Down buttons it is possible to modify the column order; choose Select all to include all the columns and Cancel selection to annul the selection; Settings. Define text style, characters height and width in mm; OK to confirm the settings.

The tool displays the following request: Enter table insertion point: Enter the point in which to insert the table.

The cad table will appear, displaying the content and settings selected:

91

Topko

Points comparison between subprojects

By this command it is possible to compare automatically the coordinates of topographic points belonging to two subprojects; the tool reports the coordinates and the differences calculated only of points that, having the same name, appear in both projects.

Open Compare window as follows: Menu Survey > Topographic points > Points comparison Command line: COMPAREPNT

The following window will appear:

In the page the following information must be reported: Subprojects. First. Choose from the list of survey subprojects the first subproject to compare; Second. Choose from the list of survey subprojects the second subproject to compare.

The table reports the following data: Point name. Name of common points found in bothsub projects; E1 N1 Q1. East, North coordinate and point elevation in first survey subproject; E2 N2 Q2. East, North coordinate and point elevation in first survey subproject; Delta E. Difference in the point east coordinate between first and second subproject; Delta N. Difference in the point north coordinate between first and second subproject; Delta Q. Difference in the point elevation between first and second subproject; Distance 2D. Plane distance between the respective points in the two subprojects. Distan 3D. Slope distance between respective points in the two subprojects.

92

Topko

Note. In case the tolerance set is overpassed, if the option Display tolerance overpassing is active, distances will be highlighted in red. Options. Display only deltas: to display only the coordinate difference; the window will have the following aspect:

Display tolerance overpassing: it is possible to set a tolerance value; if this value is overpassed, the writing will be highlighted in red. It is possible to create a report of the table by Print button.

93

Topko

Delete points
By this command it is possible to delete topographic points too close to each other; it is possible to set the tolerance according to which to consider a point as too close to another point. Points can be deleted or moved to a different subproject.

Open the window as follows: Menu Survey > Topographic points > Delete points Command line: DELPOINTS

The following window will appear:

The tool asks to specify the following settings: Automatic delete points: define the maximum distance between points involved in the operation; the points within this area will be considered close points; Operation. Delete points. Delete close points; Move point to subproject. Move close points to a different subproject that can be chosen among the list of the ones available in the works, or created by New button; Press OK to carry out the command.

Merge coordinates
By this utility it is possible to merge in a subproject the topographic points available on other subprojects. The tool verifies that there are no other points with the same name, allowing to rename them, perform the average or exclude them from the importation. The command can be activated as follows: Menu Survey > Coordinates > Merge points Command line: MERGEPNT

94

Topko

The following dialog box will appear:

Destination subproject: indicates the subproject inside which to save the coordinates derived from other subprojects. Survey subproject can be created by using New button. Origin subprojects: a list is displayed, of all the subprojects available. Select the subprojects to merge. Tolerance (automatic average): it is the tolerance by which the tool performs automatically the coordinate average of points having the same name. If the tool finds two points with the same name, whose distance is shorter than the tolerance, it will perform automatically the coordinate average and save the point in destination subproject. If the distance is longer than the tolerance, it will stop the process and wait for instructions about how to continue. Import drawing by codes: by activating this option, not only the tool will merge the coordinates of the different survey subprojects, but it will also import the drawing obtained from survey codes. Press Execute button to start the process.

The process is not a simple copy of points from origin survey subprojects to destination survey subproject. Before copying a point in destination subproject the tool checks whether other points with the same name exist in other subprojects; in case the distance between these points is longer than the tolerance set, the tool will stop the process and display in a window the condition found.

95

Topko

If the points with the same name are more than two, the following window will be displayed:

The window reports the name of the point which caused a stop in the process and a table displaying the points with the same name found in the different subprojects to merge; point coordinates are reported for each subproject, and it is possible to choose the kind of operation to perform.

Average: point coordinates will be averaged out with the others. Exclude: the point will not be considered in the merging. Rename: the point will be assigned a different name. By activating this option, New name column will report the name which will be assigned to the point; the name can be modified. In the lower side of the window the point average coordinates are reported, updated according to the operations set. Press Continue to continue the process.

If, on the contrary, the points with the same name are two, the following window will be displayed:

96

Topko

By such buttons it is possible to: Average: perform an average of the coordinates. Rename first: set a new name to the first of the two points. Rename second: set a new name to the second of the two points. Discard first: discard the first point from copy; only the second will be copied. Discard second: discard the second point from copy; only the first will be copied.

At the end of the process the window will report a summary of what has been performed.

Acquisition of topographic coordinates from ASCII file

The acquisition of topographic coordinates from ASCII file is useful whenever you have a set of coordinates on text file and you want to import them inside the tool without having to insert all data manually. The acquisition of survey points requires that all data inside ASCII file are organized according to the following instructions:

each line of the file must indicate survey point data.

each survey point data must be separated by a particular symbol or must be set up in fixed columns. In order to activate the import procedure it is necessary to select the item Import/Export from File menu and then ASCII In, you can also give ASCIIIN command. Menu File > Import/Export > ASCII IN Command line: ASCIIIN

A dialog box appears, where you must indicate the name of the ASCII file to be loaded and the folder where the file is saved; select the option Topographic coordinates. 97

Topko

Pressing Next button you go on with the definition of import parameters and a second dialog box appears, asking to indicate the data contained in the file and the order according to which they have been saved: select the kind of data in the left list box and then, by pressing > button, they will be shifted into the right box. In this box, data order must correspond to data order in text file rows. The third dialog box allows to decide whether the data are separated by such a character as a comma, etc. (Delimited) or divided into columns (fixed width). If the data are separated by a character, the tool asks you to indicate the character that separates them; if, on the contrary, data are divided into columns, you will have to indicate the widths of the columns so that the tool can find out the data. For each column, specify the width occupied by the text. At the last dialog box the tool is ready to read the data and asks you whether these data must be added to the already present ones or the already existing data have to be canceled.

Print topographic coordinates

To set the printing of topographic coordinates, operate as follows: Menu File > Print Command line: PRINT

It is possible to gain access to this window from Topographic coordinates table by The following window will appear:

button.

98

Topko

In the dialog box select the node Topographic coordinates and choose the kind of printing to be created.

Survey codes
Survey codes are very important for data input tables, because they allow to automatize survey drawing. With codes it is possible to:

associate a detailed description to points automatically; manage compound codes to obtain the description associated to the point, by putting together single-code descriptions. associate to points a specific symbol/block automatically that can be assigned to a particular layer. The symbol size can be defined by the code itself. For example, creating code SP and description SUMP PIT it is possible to associate the symbol of the sump pit to it, also with its real size, and to obtain the drawing automatically without having to draw the symbol manually. specify if a point has to be used for creating the triangle mathematical model. obtain the automatic drawing of lines that join together points with the same code. It is possible to specify the layer of the lines, the color and the linetype. obtain automatic positioning and dimensioning of blocks using from two to three points.

In case of a survey with codes assigned to points and without the corresponding codes table, it is possible to compile the codes table starting from the survey points codes.

Survey codes table

This table is activated through Codes and then Survey codes from Survey menu or by digiting TBCOD on command line: Menu Survey > Codes > Survey codes Command line: TBCOD

The table is subdivided into six display modes; each one refers to a particular aspects of the codes. To activate the modes, choose one of the tabs by clicking on the bottom of the table.

Description codes: creates Code-associated description. The description will be loaded in the table rows according to the code assigned.

99

Topko

Point codes: to each code a symbol is assigned allowing to display the point that uses the code itself. It is possible to set the layer, the symbol size and, finally, you can decide if to use the point for creating the triangle model. Line codes: it allows to assign to each code data concerning the method of creation of drawing lines among codes. See Automatic drawing from codes. Point drawing codes: assigns to each code a drawing block and the settings to let it be positioned near the point surveyed as well as rotated and dimensioned according to the position of other points. See Automatic drawing from codes. Annotation codes: allows to set, for each code, the labels of the topographic codes that must be visible. Toolbar codes: assigns to each code a bitmap to report in the toolbar Drawing from codes. See Drawing from codes.

Description codes (Not available for Topko Express)

Data required in this table are the following : Code. 15 character-alphanumeric code; Description. Code-associated description. This description will be loaded on the table rows according to the code assigned. Note. Besides the simple association code-description, the tool makes it possible to define a code with a numeric property: it is possible, for example, to define a code as F## with Building as description. It is then possible to assign to a point or to a measure code F15, obtaining Building 15 as description.

Point codes (Not available for Topko Express)

100

Topko

Code. 15 character-alphanumeric code; Point symbol: symbol associated to survey points whose code is indicated in Code field. It is possible to choose among the symbols suggested or choose a block, among those inside the drawing, to represent the point graphically. See Select symbols/blocks, How to draw and use one's own symbol to represent the point. Point layer: survey points whose code is indicated in Code field are assigned to this layer. All points using a particular code will be assigned to the corresponding layer; in this way, the points will assume its color, linetype, visibility, etc. Point colour: colour to assign to point symbol. Size type: size of the point symbol to be drawn:

Default: size defined in project properties; Symbol (mm): size in mm.;

Real (m): real size in meters. Size: if in the previous field you choose option Symbol or Real, then it is possible to set the value desired.
Dtm: if the option is active the tool uses the points for the creation of the triangle mathematical model.

Line codes (Not available for Topko Express)

Code. 15 character-alphanumeric code; Line layer: layer where to save lines created by the command Automatic drawing from codes. Line color: color assigned to lines created by command Automatic drawing from codes. Linetype: type of line assigned to lines created by command Automatic drawing from codes. Join previous: it allows to connect automatically a sequence of points with the same code even if they don't have control codes for automatic drawing from codes. Breakline: Specifies if the lines created by the command Automatic drawing from codes must be constraints for the creation of the triangle model: constraints can be boundary lines or breaklines.

101

Topko

Point drawing codes (Not available for Topko Express)

The table reports the following information: Code: survey code. Drawing block: drawing block assigned to the code. Press among the list of drawing blocks available in the project. Insertion mode: 2 points (direction): this mode allows to use the first point as the drawing block insertion point, while the second point is used to set insertion angle. 2 points (direction and scale): this mode allows to use the first point as the drawing block insertion point, while the second point is used both to set insertion angle and to calculate the scale factor to assign to the block. Scale factor is obtained from the ratio between the distance of one point from the other and the factor Reference X. 3 points (dir. scale X,Y): this mode allows to use the first point as the drawing block insertion point, while the second point is used both to set insertion angle and to calculate the scale factor to assign to the block on X direction; the third point is used to assign the block Y Scale factor. The two scale factors are obtained from the ratio between the distance of one point from the other and the factor Reference X and Reference Y. Hide aux. points: by this option it is possible to make invisible the points that have been used to determine orientation angle and scale factor. button to choose the block desired

Example
By setting Survey codes table as follows:

102

Topko

and the table of Topographic coordinates in this way:

by activating Drawing from codes command it is possible to obtain the following result:

As you can see, of the two points with C1 as code, the first has been used to insert the point and the second only to assign rotation angle. As far as the two points with C2 as code, the first is the insertion point and the second has been used both to determine rotation angle and scale factor. Finally, of the three points with C3 as code, the first is the insertion point, the second has been used for rotation and X scale factor, and the third has been used for Y scale factor.

103

Topko

Annotation codes (Not available for Topko Express)

The table reports the following information: Code: survey code. Style: label style of the topographic points to assign to points. A list then follows, of all the labels available. For each label it is possible to set visibility for the points which will assume that code.

Toolbar codes (Not available for Topko Express)

In this page it is possible to associate, to each code, a bitmap which will be reported in the toolbar. Drawing from codes. See Drawing from codes.

Code table Toolbar

Cut: cuts selected cells; Copy: copies selected cells; Paste: pastes previously copied or cut cells; 104

Topko

Change rows...: modifies automatically a group of cells belonging to a table column. The change can consist in setting the same value for all the cells, in deleting the content of all the cells and also in increasing the cells value. Find and replace: allows to find, and if necessary replace all at the same time, the recurrences of a certain value in the table or one recurrence at a time.

Filter: It is possible to apply a filter to one or more columns, so as to make visible only the rows whose content meets the condition set. In each table different filters can be activated at the same time, one for each column.

Print: allows to activate the prints page, also by menu File > Print:

105

Topko

By this window it is possible to customize the reports to be performed. Sort: allows to sort codes in alphabetical order. Update points: updates coordinate table and fieldbook table if they are currently open; updates also the display of points reporting the changes performed in the table of codes. Update survey polylines: updates survey polyline properties with the changes performed in the table of codes.

Compound codes
Compound codes allow to assign a description to any point surveyed without creating new specific codes which would slow codification and survey phases. The purpose is to define, in the table of survey codes, a set of standard codes to be used in every situation thus allowing to describe all the situations, when their descriptions are put together. In order to insert a compound code, for example in the table of topographic coordinates, you have to indicate single codes separated by a symbol, usually a point (.), which can however be modified in Drawing tab of Control codes. Example : Suppose you have, as base codes, code number 29, (description: EDGE), and code 44, (description: DITCH). If you survey the edge of a ditch, the code you have to set is 29.44, (description: EDGE DITCH). Between 29 and 44 will be situated the character chosen as separator.

106

Topko

In compound codes the size of the symbol can be taken from the second code if the first is 0; so there can be points with the same starting code but different size. Example: Suppose you have a P code to identify sump pits; the sump pits have different sizes, so, if the size of the symbol depends on the first code, there should be different P codes, each with a different size. But, if we set P with a size 0 and create codes defining only the size, for example 40 and 50, then the point with code P.50 will assume the symbol and the characteristics of the P code but it will have the sizes defined by the second code 50.

Automatic drawing from codes

Through this function it is possible to create automatically lines, polylines or breakline for DTM starting from survey points codes. Point codes must follow a specific coding so that the program can decide how to join points. Each point can have a code (see Survey codes table) describing it (example RE: road edge); this code can also be followed by another coding necessary to obtain the survey drawing automatically. This coding must begin with a SEPARATOR symbol (for example .) and must be followed by another symbol indicating Start line point, Intermediate point, End line point (the personalization of these symbols is performed by Control codes Drawing tab). The command can be activated as follows: Menu Survey > Codes > Drawing from codes Command line: COD2DRAW

The following window will appear:

Elaboration on current subproject: the process is performed on current survey subproject. 107

Topko

Partial elaboration: only a group of coordinates is used and they can be defined by the user. From row: row of coordinate table containing the first coordinate to use; To row:row of coordinate table containing the last coordinate to use; the process can be performed on current survey but it is also possible to specify the subprojects to be processed. Multiple elaboration: allows to perform the elaboration on a group of subprojects. Select the subprojects to process. Press Next button.

Destination
It is possible to set the subproject in which to create the lines and the final drawing. The drawing can be created on a drawing subproject or on a survey subproject. In this case, the tool will not create drawing polylines but survey polylines. By activating the option Erase previous elaborations it is possible to erase the result obtained from a previous generation; this option is valid only in case the drawing is created in a survey subproject.

Generation
Set the kind of entity to generate: Lines: the procedure will build lines on the drawing subproject chosen as destination. Polylines: the procedure will build polylines on the drawing subproject chosen as destination. Survey polylines: the procedure will build survey polylines on the survey subproject chosen as destination. Constraints for DTM: the procedure will build break lines on the survey subproject chosen as destination. 108

Topko

Options
Join points with the same code: if this option is active, the tool joins the points that, besides having the same characters for identifying their position, have also the same code. Otherwise, not the point codes but only the characters that define the point in the line (start. intermediate, end) will be considered. Create entities on points layer: If this option is active the tool creates the lines on the layer the survey points belong to. Otherwise the lines are placed on the layer defined by the code as far as the lines (see Table of survey codes) Don't create constraints: As far as codes, it is possible to specify whether they must build break lines; activating this option, break lines (constraints) will never be generated. The option is active only for generating lines and polylines; in fact, in this way you can avoid the creation of overlapped entities (lines/constraints). Set points properties from codes: activating this option, the points elaborated will assume the characteristics (symbol, size, etc.) defined by the code set. Start, intermediate, end codes: With this kind of elaboration the tool considers the presence of intermediate points between the first and the last. Start, end codes: With this option the tool does not consider the presence of intermediate points, so the points must have only a line start code and a line end code. Press Create to start the elaboration.

How to create layers from codes

This command is particularly useful in case you dispose of a survey where points have been given a code, but you don't dispose of a corresponding survey codes table: in this case the command locates the points on different layers according to their code and compiles automatically the codes table. The presence of points on different layers according to their codes represents a great advantage since you can change the color to all points having the same code simply by changing the color to the corresponding layer or by making invisible particular points freezing the relative layer. Then, the command processes each point and checks whether the point code is already present inside the codes table or not; if yes, the command assignes to the point the layer defined by the code itself; if not, the command creates the layer name according to the codes and checks whether the layer is already present or has to be inserted; in both cases, the point is assigned to the layer. Besides, if the code is not present inside the survey codes table, the command adds the new code automatically. The command can be activated through one of the following methods: Menu Survey > Codes > Create layers from code Command line: COD2LAYER

On command line the following questions appear: Layer name prefix: the layer name assumes this prefix; the layer name is given by the prefix and so by the code which it refers to; Layer name from Code / Description <C>: the name of the layer to create can be the point code or the description of the point. Insert code in Codes table Yes/No: it allows to edit automatically the survey codes table.

109

Topko

Acquisition of survey codes from ASCII file

The acquisition of survey codes from ASCII file is particularly necessary whenever you have a list of codes available on text file and you want to import it inside the tool without having to insert it manually. This procedure requires that the codes inside ASCII file are organized according to the following instructions:

each line of the file must indicate the code and its description.

code and description must be separated by a particular symbol or must be set up in fixed columns. To activate the acquisition procedure it is necessary to select the item Import/Export from File menu and then ASCII In... . You can also give ASCIIIN command. For further infomation on the use of this command see How to import from ASCII file.

Printing survey codes

To activate this procedure, select Print from File menu, or give command PRINT. In the appearing dialog box select Other tab. It is then sufficient to select the option Survey codes. For each code, a row containing the code, description, used symbols and layer is printed.

Control codes
Control codes are necessary to specify to tool commands how to interpret data to be processed in order to obtain a correct result. Control codes are divided into three typologies: Control codes for sights. Group of codes that specify to survey calculation procedure how to interpret sights. Control codes for drawings. Group of codes necessary to obtain automatically the drawing. Control codes for sections/profiles. Group of codes necessary to create automatically profiles and sections.

Control codes for sights

Control codes for sights are necessary to control the interpretation of the information present inside the fieldbook of measures during survey calculation. Through these codes, it is possible to specify if a particular sight is a joined sight, if, starting from a sight, the orientation has been changed, etc. Control codes for sights dialog box can be activated by one of the following methods: Menu Survey > Codes > Control codes Command line: DDCCOD

110

Topko

Select Sights tab:

Joined sight. Indicates to survey calculation procedure that the points, represented by the code appearing in Joined sight edit box, have been surveyed through a joined sight. Change orientation. Indicates to survey calculation procedure that the sight, represented by the appearing code, must be used to recalculate station correction angle. A sight between the station and the point must already be present in the fieldbook of measures (this sight is necessary to calculate the correction angle variation). Trilateration left. Informs survey calculation procedure that the observed point of the sight represented by this code is positioned on the left compared to the alignment formed by the station itself together with the other station which forms the trilateration base side. Trilateration right. Informs survey calculation procedure that the observed point of the sight represented by this code is positioned on the right compared to the alignment formed by the station itself together with the other station which forms the trilateration base side. Change vertical angle. Informs survey calculation procedure that the observed point of the sight represented by this code contains a zenith value that replaces the previous sight taken on the same point. Therefore, the tool calculates the position of the observed point according to two sights: previous sight, to calculate the planimetric position, and current sight, to calculate the elevation. Longitudinal offset: used to add a horizontal distance to the sight. For example, a sight with SPLG.0.5 code indicates that the horizontal distance between the station and the point must be integrated of 0.5m. Vertical offset: used to add a height difference to the sight. For example, a sight with SPV.0.5 code indicates that the height difference between the station and the point must be integrated of 0.5m. Lateral offset: used to indicate that the point has been shifted laterally from the station-prism direction. For example, a sight with SPLT.0.5 code indicates that the point is at a distance of 0.5m from the point measured on the station-prism orthogonal direction. height difference between the station and the point must be integrated of 0.5m.

Control codes for drawings

In this paragraph are grouped the instructions allowing the tool to generate a drawing automatically starting from survey points codes. The codes must follow specific rules so that the tool can interpret them. Therefore, these rules have to be used during the survey phase. Control codes for drawings dialog box can be activated by one of the following methods: Menu Survey > Codes > Control codes Command line: DDCCOD

111

Topko

Select Drawing tab:

In this table, it is possible to personalize the drawing codes to be used. Any point can have a code (see Table of Codes) describing it (example RE: road edge); this code can also be followed by another coding necessary to obtain automatically the survey drawing. This coding must start with the symbol specified in the Separator edit box and go on with one of the symbols identifying Start line, Intermediate line, End line, etc. Available codes are:

Start line: specifies that the point selected is the first of a sequence of points to be joint together. These points have the same main code. Intermediate line: specifies that the point selected is inside a sequence of points to be joint together. These points have the same main code. End line: specifies that the point selected is the last of a sequence of points to be joint together. These points have the same main code. Example : Suppose you want to obtain a line representing the edge of a road. In this case, edge points must be surveyed progressively from start to end point. RE (road and edge) codes must be integrated with .ST for the first point of the line, .MED for intermediate points and .END for final point.

In this typical case, a line is created joining together the sequence of points 16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23.

Join previous point: a line is created joining together the point with this code and the point preceeding it in the table of coordinates.

In the above case, a line is created joining together the point 25 and the previous one (24).

Join next point: a line is created joining together the point with this code and the point following it in the table of coordinates.

112

Topko

In this example, a line is created joining together the point 26 and the following one (27).

Rectangle: it allows to create the drawing of a rectangle: the first side is obtained by joining together the point selected and the previous one. The length of the second side is specified after the control code.

In a case like this, a rectangle is created with one side starting from point 35 and ending to point 36 and another side measuring 10 in length and perpendicular to the previous one.

Close rectangle: creates the drawing of a rectangle using the two points preceeding the one with the control code.

In this case, joining together points 31, 32 and 33 a rectangle is created; the fourth point of the rectangle is obtained through the intersection of the two adjacent sides. II code must have Join previous point option activated.

Close: Given a sequence of points, it completes the drawing joining together the last point of the sequence and the first one.

In this case, a line is created joining together the points 8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15 and again 8. AA code must have Join previous point option activated.

Join to point: a line is created joining together the point with this code and the point represented by the name indicated next. Example: RE.JPN.8; creates a line from the current point to the point with 8 as name. Join to near point with code: a line is created joining together the point with this code and the nearest point having the same main code. Example: RE.JPC; a line is created joining together the current point and the nearest point with RE code. Join to near point: a line is created joining the point with this code and the nearest point. Break union: breaks the sequence without performing the joining of the points.

In this case, a line is created joining together points 16,17,18 and starting again from points 20,21,22,23.

Start no tangent curve: starts drawing a curve not tangent to the previous line. End no tangent curve: stops drawing a curve not tangent to the previous line.

113

Topko

Start tangent curve: starts drawing a curve tangent to the previous line. End tangent curve: stops drawing a curve tangent to the previous line.

Offset: besides the line that unites the points a parallel line is created according to an offset set.

In this case it creates a 8-9-10-11 line but also a line at a distance of 3m from the first point, 4m from the second, 1m from the third and 2m from the fourth. Note. Inside the same code there could be different drawing codes: for example RE.JPP.JNP code will create a line from the current point to the previous point and a second line again from the current point to the next point. Note. Separator character is used also in the management of compound codes.

Control codes for profile and sections

Through a particular coding of survey points, the tool can arrange data in order to calculate automatically profiles and sections. Control codes for sections/profiles dialog box can be activated by one of the following methods: Menu Survey > Codes > Control codes Command line: DDCCOD

114

Topko

Select Sections/Profile tab:

This edit boxes group contains the rules used by the tool to interpret points codes in order to obtain profiles and sections. Main profile. This code identifies points on section axis. Secondary profile. Code of the points that are not situated on section axis and must therefore be shifted. Sec.-LH extreme point. Code of the point positioned on the left end of the section. Sec.-generic point. Code of a point inside the section. Sec.-RH extreme point. Code of the point positioned on the right end of the section. Using codes during field survey allows to cut greatly work times. It is sufficient to follow the rules listed below.

To survey one section at a time. To survey particular points in each section: right and left ends and the point on the axis.

Creation of sections from codes

In Control codes, it is possible to set some codes of section points which have a specific meaning for an elaboration, contained in the tool, that can be used to interpret these codes so to draw automatically the sections surveyed. By COD2SEC command or by selecting Topographic cross-sections item and then Sections from codes from D.T.M. menu, it is possible to obtain automatically the drawing of the sections. The tool interpretes survey point codes according to the rules set in Control codes and will obtain the position of the vertexes of polylines representing the sections. This operation quickens the elaborations, since it is not necessary to draw anything inside the graphic CAD. It is sufficient to give the proper codes to the points during the sections survey phase. Moreover, to obtain the transversal view of the sections elaborated it is necessary to pass to Sections module and perform Calculation of section elevations, choosing Survey points as calculation option.

115

Topko

Topko T Standard - Topography

Topko T is a software for the management of topographic and cadastral surveys. Field data can be imported directly by topographic instruments (total stations and GPS) and then processed to obtain the coordinates of the points surveyed. Powerful functions are available for data editing, management of survey points and solution of every kind of topographic issue. Topko T allows the complete management of cadastral works and it is fully compatible with Pregeo.

Data insert The tool flexibility allows different opportunities of survey data insert. Data can be inserted from keyboard, through digitizer, text-file (ASCII), from DWG/DXF file and graphically.

Instrument system and data recorders The tool allows the acquisition of data (coordinates, conventional measures and GPS) from the most widespread total stations and GPS. Topko is equipped both with interface procedure with data recorder, and with procedures for conversion of file into original recorder formats. For instruments supporting it, Topko provides functions for uploading (in field data recorder) fieldbook measures and coordinates of the points calculated inside the program.

Survey drawing The whole drawing is completely under the user control and the user can modify sizes and symbol to be used even for a single point. Texts and symbols can be moved manually or by table setting. An automatic procedure allows to eliminate the overlapping of texts of close points. Specific commands allow to complete the drawing with elements the topographic instruments do not survey completely: along some reference polylines it is possible to insert such parametric objects as ditches, sideslopes, walls, sidewalks, etc.

Utilities and technical calculations Different topographic utilities have been arranged, among which:

Intersection angle-angle (2D and 3D); Resection 3 points; Triangle resolution; Resection 2 points; Generation of virtual stations and points referred to them; Tachimetric sight sorting; Generation of sights from coordinates (tachimetric and chains and offsets)

Survey calculation Topko processes all kinds of surveys, also by different methods:

Mean of multiple sights and management of reversed sights; Auto-recognition of new orientation; Calculation of closed and/or constrained traverses with empiric adjustment; Calculation of stations with least square adjustment and error ellipses; 116

Topko

Calculation of free stations by inverse intersection with 2 or more points; Solution of isolated stations and rototranslation on points in common with other stations; Point calculation by trilateration and intersection angle-angle; Correction on field measures (earth sphericity, refraction); Automatic rototranslation on datum points.

The results of the survey calculation are displayed in a tree structure which is easy to consult and allows to verify any result by going back to the measures that determined it. All the results can be printed either on predefined reports or on reports the user can customize.

Management and calculation of GPS data By Topko T it is possible to define a reference plane coordinate system such as Gauss-Boaga, or, a local system based on a plane projection tangent to the ellipsoid in the coordinate point defined by the user. The projection defined can use IGM grid files also for what concerns the calculation of the elevation; this can be determined also by using other geoid models. Latitude/longitude/geocentric coordinates of WGS84 points and baselines can be inserted and modified in a specific table, acquired from instrument data formats or imported from ASCII files. Moreover, baselines can be created from the graphic window by indicating reference station and points to measure. During survey calculation, the tool first transforms WGS84 coordinates and baselines in the plane system chosen as reference, then it calculates the tacheometric survey;tacheometric measures can therefore use the GPS points calculated as points of known coordinates. By Topko it is also possible to go along the opposite path and calculate, for the topographic coordinates, WGS84 geodetic coordinates from the corresponding reference plane system.

Datum Of great importance is the possibility of calculating a local datum according to some points of which both the GPS coordinates and the corresponding plane coordinates on the reference system adopted are known; the local datum has the advantage of being, inside the area defined by the reference points, much more precise than the global datum, whose parameters have been calculated for a much wider area.

Geometric leveling Levelling data can be inserted in a specific table and elaborated in order to calculate point elevation.

Coordinate transformation between systems Topko T performs every kind of transformation of coordinates between different systems: from geodetic to geodetic coordinates, from map to geodetic coordinates and vice versa, from map to map coordinates. Least square adjustments (with ellipsoid change) are included, from Cassini-Soldner system to GaussBoaga and vice versa. Adjustments can be applied either to the coordinates only or to the whole drawing.

Coordinate transformation by control points It is possible to perform transformations of coordinates by indicating the control points, and it is also possible to set the weight, which can be calculated automatically by the tool according to the distance from the barycentre and the reliability of the point. The possible transformations are the following: barycentric (with or without scale variation), affine, homographic, Helmert 3D, polynomial, 3D conformal.

117

Topko

COGO COGO commands allow to create quickly and with great precision new survey points by intersection, chain and offset, tangent, alignment, projection, etc., making faster such operations as drawing and data input.

Survey codes By using field codes it is possible to generate automatically the drawing lines or the break lines of the digital model and obtain automatically the drawing of the survey. It is possible to assign to any code different parameters by which to represent the point, such as symbol, size, layer.

Subdivision of parcels By calculating automatically the subdivision line, the tool allows to define the value of the area to separate from the parcel. The subdivision line can be: passing through one point, through two points, parallel or perpendicular by two points (to one side or to any direction). If requested, Topko can insert points for building the subdivision line and creates automatically the two parcels resulting from the division. A specific command allows to manage easily expropriation procedure: according to the dividing lines and to the parcels to be expropriated, the tool determines the resulting parcels.

Topko T menus
Topko T introduces two personalized menus :

Survey : containing menu items to manage the input of measures, topographic coordinates grid and items for coordinates processing. Cadastral : containing customized items to carry out Cadastral works.

Moreover, Topko T introduces two additional items in File menu :

Project properties : containing all the parameters settings for the survey and topographic entities management. It is very important to compile this item. Field data recorder : Field data recorder communication procedure: for direct connection (bidirectional transfer when needed) and for data import and export in field data recorder format.

Topko T toolbars
Topko T module introduces the following additional toolbars. Topographic toolbar : consisting of some of the commands concerning the management of survey points.

Toolbar Cadastral : Contains some commands concerning cadastral management: insert measures, traverse stations, parcels, define subdivisions.

COGO toolbar : consisting of some COGO commands used for defining the position of new points. 118

Topko

Field data recorder

The processes of data acquisition from field data recorder or from topographic instruments and the corresponding processes allowing to export points into field data recorder or into a specific data format have been put together in a single process and dialog box. The command can be activated as follows: Menu File > Field data recorder Command line: REG

The following window will appear:

Four main working modes are available: Direct import from field data recorder: the tool imports survey data (measures, coordinates) into Topko by a direct communication with field data recorder. Import topographic instruments format file: the tool imports survey data (measures, coordinates) by reading a file. Direct export on field data recorder: the tool will export Topko coordinates by a direct communication with field data recorder. Export topographic instruments format file: the tool export Topko coordinates by creating a specific format file. 119

Topko

Direct import from field data recorder

Select the option Direct import from field data recorder and press Next. The following window will appear:

In this window it is possible to set the configuration to allow communication with field data recorder and data importation. Configuration: number of configuration to use; Topko is equipped with up to three different configurations, each saving data concerning instrument model, data format and communication parameters. It is then possible to keep the configurations of different instruments used by Topko without having to set manually all data. Select from this list the configuration desired; possible modifications made on instrument model, data format and communication parameters will be assigned to the current configuration. Brand: Choose the brand of instruments or data format desired. Model: according to the Brand chosen a list appears, of the instrument models available, from which it is possible to perform data download. Data format: choose the data format according to which data have been saved by the field data recorder. Communication parameters: Some parameters are displayed, to set the communication with field data recorder. To modify the parameters press Change button.

120

Topko

The following window will appear:

Normally the tool displays the default configuration parameters available for the instruments selected. However, it is possible to change any parameter, in particular the serial port through which communication takes place. To confirm the changes press OK. File to create: name of the file on which transferred data are saved. Besides transferring data from field data recorder to Topko, the tool creates an ASCII file of transferred data, in the format provided by the field data recorder. Press Browse to select file.

For some models of field data recorder some further fields are available, which allow to choose directly from Topko the file of the recorder to load. Press Next button.

121

Topko

By pressing Download button the tool starts the process of downloading from field data recorder. Some recorders perform this procedure automatically, while for others it is necessary to activate the transmission manually, from field data recorder; in this case it is necessary first to press Download button, then activate transmission from field data recorder. During the transfer data will be seen passing in the window. Once the downloading has been performed press Next button.

122

Topko

A summary is displayed, reporting the number of data read and the tool asks whether to pass to survey calculation. Press Finish to stop procedure. If you have chosen to pass to survey calculation, a specific window will appear. In any case, data have been imported into Topko and it is no longer necessary to perform any other operation.

123

Topko

Import topographic instruments format file

Select the option Import topographic instruments format file and press Next button. The following window will appear:

Configuration: number of configuration to use; Topko is equipped with up to three different configurations, each saving data concerning instrument model, data format and communication parameters. It is then possible to keep the configurations of different instruments used by Topko without having to set manually all data. Select from this list the configuration desired; possible modifications made on instrument model, data format and communication parameters will be assigned to the current configuration. Brand: Choose the brand of instruments or data format desired. Data format: choose the data format according to which data have been saved by the field data recorder. File to load: file containing the data to be imported. Press Browse button to select the file to be loaded. After selecting the file, the content will be displayed in the window below. Note. It is possible to select more files to load at the same time. Activate the option Create a new survey subproject for each file to save the data of the single files on different subprojects; leaving the option not active, all files data will be saved in the current survey subproject. Press Load button to start importation. Once the importation has been performed, the following window will appear:

124

Topko

A summary is displayed, reporting the number of data read and the tool asks whether to pass to survey calculation. Press Finish to stop procedure. If you have chosen to pass to survey calculation, a specific window will appear.

125

Topko

Direct export on field data recorder

Select the option Import topographic instruments format file and press Next button. The following window will appear:

In this window it is possible to set the configuration to allow communication with field data recorder and data exportation. Configuration: number of configuration to use; Topko is equipped with up to three different configurations, each saving data concerning instrument model, data format and communication parameters. It is then possible to keep the configurations of different instruments used by Topko without having to set manually all data. Select from this list the configuration desired; possible modifications made on instrument model, data format and communication parameters will be assigned to the current configuration. Brand: Choose the brand of instruments or data format desired. Model: according to the Brand chosen a list appears, of the instrument models available, from which it is possible to perform data download. Data format: choose the format with which to save data for field data recorder. Communication parameters: Some parameters are displayed, to set the communication with field data recorder. To modify the parameters press Change button. The following window will appear:

126

Topko

Normally the tool displays the default configuration parameters available for the instruments selected. However, it is possible to change any parameter, in particular the serial port through which communication takes place. To confirm the changes press OK. File to create: name of the file on which the data to be transferred will be saved. Besides transferring data to field data recorder, the tool creates an ASCII file of transferred data, in the format provided by the field data recorder. In this way, a copy of the data exported from Topko to the field data recorder is always available. Press Browse to select file. For some models of field data recorder some further fields are available, which allow to choose directly from Topko the file of the recorder to be created. Press Next button.

127

Topko

By pressing Upload button the tool starts the process of uploading on field data recorder. Some recorders perform this procedure automatically, while for others it is necessary to activate the reception manually, from field data recorder; in this case it is necessary first to start the reception by field data recorder, then activate transmission from Topko by pressing Load button.

During the transfer data will be seen passing in the window. Once the uploading has been performed press Next button.

A simple summary will inform about the number of data exported. Press Finish to stop the process.

128

Topko

Export topographic instruments format file

Select the option Export topographic instruments format file and press Next button. The following window will appear:

Configuration: number of configuration to use; Topko is equipped with up to three different configurations, each saving data concerning instrument model, data format and communication parameters. It is then possible to keep the configurations of different instruments used by Topko without having to set manually all data. Select from this list the configuration desired; possible modifications made on instrument model, data format and communication parameters will be assigned to the current configuration. Brand: Choose the brand of instruments or data format desired. Data format: choose the data format according to which to save data for field data recorder. File to create: name of the file on which the data to be transferred will be saved. Press Browse to select the file. Press Export button to start exportation. Once the exportation has been performed the following window will appear:

129

Topko

This window reports the content of the file just created. Press Next button.

130

Topko

A simple summary will inform about the number of data exported. Press Finish to stop the process.

131

Topko

Fieldbook of measures
Fieldbook of measures table
This table includes both angular measures and distance measures. You can have access to this table as follows : Toolbar: Survey Menu Survey > Survey data manager Command line: TBSURV

From the box on the left choose Total station measures; the following window will appear:

Functions of fieldbook table

Below are reported some of the functions of the fieldbook table:

Any change made in the table measures affects the graphic CAD window and vice versa; The table can stay open along with the CAD window, providing for a double display of data: graphic and from table; On the left it is possible to display the list of the stations, and the number between brackets indicates the number of measures taken from each station. By selecting a station, all the measures referred to that station will be displayed. In this way, even if the fieldbook contains a great number of measures and stations, consulting them becomes easier.

132

Topko

Listed below are some of the fieldbook of measures table functionalities: Actually, the table is made up of three tables, each one of them arranged for the different kinds of survey most commonly performed : Zenith and Slope distance Height difference and Horizontal distance Cadastral - Horizontal distance

The activation of the various kinds of table is performed by clicking on the tabs located at the bottom of the window. The table selected determines the current mode; this is a very important concept since other operations in the handbook choose to work in a way or another according to this mode (for example: when you input a polar measure from CAD, the tool checks the mode selected and, according to it, it decides whether to inquire about instrumental height, zenith, etc.).

Fieldbook of measures table, Zenith and Slope distance

The table needs the following data for each reading: Use: Defines whether to use or not a measure in survey calculation; Station: Name of tachymetric station; Instr.H.: Theodolite height; Name: Name of point observed by the station; Code: Point code (see Table of codes) ; 133

Topko

Horiz.Angle: Horizontal angle in centesimal degrees; Zenith: Zenithal angle in centesimal degrees; Slope Dist.: Slope distance; Prism H.: Target height; Description: Description; it can be associated to a code. Description 2: Added description.

Fieldbook of measures table, Height Difference and Horizontal Distance

The table needs the following data for each reading: Use: Defines whether to use or not a measure in survey calculation; Station: Name of tachymetric station; Instr. H.: Theodolite height; Name: Name of the point observed by the station; Code: Point code (see Table of codes) ; Horiz.Angle: Horizontal angle in centesimal degrees; Height diff.: Difference in elevation between instrument height and prism height; Horiz. Dist.: Horizontal or reduced distance; Prism H.: Prism height; Description: Description; it can be associated to a code. Description 2: Added description. Note. The values calculated by the tool and not inserted automatically can be displayed in a different way and cannot be modified. For example, in case of measures with vertical angle and slope distance, also the height difference and horizontal distance values calculated by the tool are displayed, and they can be recognized in the table by the colour grey of the character.

Fieldbook of measures table, Local Menu

In the local menu of the fieldbook of measures table the following items are available:

134

Topko

Rotate horizontal angles

Adds an angular value set by the user to each selected measure.

OK to carry out the command.

Set code
Assigns a code set by the user to each measure selected.

OK to carry out the command.

Description from code

If descriptions in the table of codes have been modified, it is possible to update the table through this function.

Change station name

Allows to modify the name of a station indicated with a different name. All the instances belonging to the old name in the fieldbook of measures, and, if necessary, also the table of coordinates, are updated with a new name.

OK to carry out the command.

Esporta su file Ascii

Esporta i dati in formato Ascii mantenendo l'ordine in cui vengono visualizzati. Se vi sono delle righe selezionate, vengono esportate solo esse.

135

Topko

Measure from coordinates...

Allows to calculate a Zenith and slope distance fieldbook, a height difference and horizonal distance fieldbook, a cadastre-horizontal distance fieldbook, starting from point coordinates; Instrument height and Prism height data must be inserted; by the option Use traverse stations recognizes the traverse stations introduced in the corresponding table.

Process to start calculation.

Sort sights
Performs a lexicographic sorting according to station name and name of observed point.

Cadastral sight sort

Performs a sight sort according to the cadastral regulation; the sort considered is the following: sights between station and station; sights between station and datum point; sights towards points measured more than once, sights towards surveyed points.

Zenith+SlopeDist -> HeightDiff+HorizDist

Transforms a handbook with zenith measures and slope distances into a handbook with height difference and horizontal distance.

Zenith+HorizDist -> HeightDiff+HorizDist

Transforms a fieldbook containing zenithal sights and horizontal distance into a fieldbook containing height difference and horizontal distance.

Zenith+SlopeDist -> HeightDiff+HorizDist

Transforms a fieldbook containing zenithal sights and slope distance into a fieldbook containing height difference and horizontal distance.

How to insert fieldbook measures

A measure can be input graphically, in two ways; it depends on the observed point, in the sense that it can already be inside the graphic window, or you might know only its polar coordinates (angle and distance).

136

Topko

Input of a survey point with sight

This command allows to input a survey point by the same modes as TPOINT command and, besides, gives the possibility to indicate the name of the station observing the point allowing the creation of the correspondent sight. To activate the insert command, use one of the methods below: Toolbar Survey Menu Survey > Add measure > Surveyed point with sight Command line: TPOINTM

The following questions will appear on CAD command line: Point : indicate point position Point name : specify the name to be assigned to the point ... Station: indicate the station performing the point sight Station height: station height Prism height: prism height Note. The tool prevents a name already used by a point from being assigned to another point of the same subproject. The tool asks you to indicate the position of the point ( see Input of coordinates) and then to insert other data such as elevation, code, etc. Note. The requests following the one for point position are made according to what has been indicated in Points page in the window of Project Properties. Note. The requests following the one for the station measuring the point are made according to the kind of handbook mode currently set in handbook field table. Note. When the tool asks to indicate the station or the surveyed point it is necessary to operate as follows: Indicate by mouse the point selected; answer the question by entering the name of the point selected: the tool will search in the file the point indicated and if it finds it, it will pass to the following question.

Input of measure with already existing point

To activate the insert command, use one of the methods below: Toolbar Survey Menu Survey > Add measure > Sight by Point Command line: TPOINTM

On CAD command line the following questions appear: Insert sight from Point/poLar/<P>: P Select station : specify the station observing the points Select point to be surveyed : select the points whose measures you want to create Instr.height: Station height 137

Topko

Prism height: Prism height. A line will be drawn, connecting the station to the observed points. Inside the fieldbook table new rows containing the data of the measures created will be inserted. Note. The queries following the one for the station measuring the point are made according to the field book mode currently set in the field book table.

Input of measures with the point polar coordinates

Lattivazione del comando di inserimento avviene in uno dei modi seguenti: Toolbar Topography Menu Survey > Add measure > Sight by Polar Command line: TPOINTM

On CAD command line the following questions appear: Insert sights from Point/poLar/<P>: L Select station : specify the station observing the points Orienting station Yes/No/<N>: Answer Yes if you want to calculate the station correction angle through the angular reading of a point with known coordinates. Enter the point: indicate datum point. Azimuth: insert the horizontal angle between the station and the point; the correction angle is then the difference between the azimuth on the point direction and the measured angle. If you answer No, the tool uses the correction angle already defined for that station (only if there are other measures) or it determines a random value. Azimuth : specify the observed point azimuth Horizontal distance : specify the horizontal distance Point name : specify the name of the observed point. Note. Some of the above mentioned questions can be different according to the fieldbook mode set in the fieldbook of measures table (example: if fieldbook table mode is Zenith and Slope distance, then questions about instrument and prism height, Zenith etc. will be made). A point will be input in a position indicated by polar coordinates, and a line, connecting the station to the point just input, will be drawn. Inside fieldbook of measures table will be added a new row containing the data of the measure created. During calculation phase the program uses all the information provided by the user as far as the instruments used, Topographic instruments dialog box, and calculation parameters (Start station, temperature, pressure, etc.) defined in Survey propeties dialog box. Note. When the tool asks you to indicate the station or the observed point, it is necessary to operate in one of the following ways: specify, by the mouse, the point wanted; answer the question by digiting the name of the point wanted: the program will search inside the file the point indicated and, if it finds this point, it will proceed to the next question.

138

Topko

How to modify fieldbook measures

In order to modify a measure directly from the graphic CAD window, first you have to erase the measure itself and then input it again.

How to erase fieldbook measures

In order to erase a fieldbook measure directly from the graphic CAD window, it is sufficient to use Erase command, which is used to erase any kind of entity.

Creation of Fieldbook of measures from coordinates

This procedure allows to create fieldbook of measures as well as chain-and-offset measures starting from the data included in the table of topographic coordinates; the following requirements have to be fulfilled: 1. for each survey point in the table of coordinates, you have to specify the name of the station that has observed this point or, in case of chain and offset, the fields referred to the beginning and end of the chain that has measured the point (see Table of topographic coordinates, Station and Table of topographic coordinates, Chains); 2. fieldbook of measures and chain/offset tables must not contain data; 3. if, in order to make up a fieldbook, the elaboration has to consider the traverses, these must be input in the proper table (see Table of Traverse stations). The result of the elaboration depends on the data included in the table of coordinates: for each element of the table, the name of the tachymetric station where the point has been surveyed must be indicated; as far as the point that is first station, its station name must be equal to the point name. Moreover, in order to connect tachimetric stations with the fieldbook readings it is necessary to define the traverses formed by the stations. As far as the points that have been surveyed as chain and offset, in the table of coordinates it is necessary to indicate the names of the two points that make up the chain. Activate Survey data manager as follows: Toolbar: Survey Menu Survey > Survey data manager Command line: TBSURV

The following dialog box appears:

It is necessary to indicate the type of field book to be created; the possible options are the following:

139

Zenith and slope distance;

Topko

Height difference and horizontal distance; Elevation and horizontal distance; Cadastre and horizontal distance.

For tridimensional surveys it is possible to set the height of the station and of the prism to use to create the field book. If the option Use traverse stations is active, then the program will load the traverses defined and will add some readings among the traverse stations. Through button Process it is possible to start the procedure that will add the measures to the fieldbook tables as well as chain/offsets tables.

Printing the fieldbook of measures

To set the printing of the fieldbook follow the instructions below: Menu File > Print Command line: PRINT It is possible to gain access to this window by the Table of measures by window will appear: button. The following

In the dialog box select Measures (Total Station) and choose the kind of report to be created.

140

Topko

Acquisition of fieldbook from ASCII file

It is very useful to import a fieldbook of measures from an ASCII file when you have a fieldbook on text file and you want to import it inside the tool without having to input all data manually. To import a fieldbook, the ASCII file sights must be arranged according to the following rules:

each row of the file contains data relative to one sight. each sight data must be separated by a particular character or must be set up into fixed columns.

In order to activate the import procedure it is necessary to select the item Import/Export from File menu and then ASCII In, you can also give ASCIIIN command. Menu File > Import/Export > ASCII In Command line: ASCIIIN See How to import from ASCII file.

Differential leveling
Differential leveling is necessary when a certain precision in the calculation of the elevations is required. Differential levelings are used according to the following situations: if precise or highly precise, to study particular handworks, deformations, or to build primordial altimetric big nets of a state or a region; if, of ordinary precision, to layout canals and other hydraulic works of modest slopes, to verify the layout and the laying of big floors.

The tool manages differential leveling data with a specific table that includes all information necessaries to carry out the leveling calculation and adjustment. The differential leveling management can be activated through one of the following ways: Menu Survey > Differential leveling Command line: TBLEVELING

The following window appears:

141

Topko

The following data are required for each line of the table: Point name. Specify the observed point name. Point code. Descriptive code associated to the point (see Table of codes). Backsight. Difference in height measured by backsight. Intersight. Difference in height measured by other survey points. Foresight. Difference in heigth measured by foresight. Datum Height. Datum height of the observed point. This value has to be assigned to the surveyed points which elevation is known. Reduced elevation. Elevation calculated by the tool according to the differences in height inserted. Adjusted elevation. Elevation calculated after having performed the adjustment on measures. Distance. Distance measured between level and stadia. Description. Text associated to an observed point.

Leveling adjustment
To carry out the leveling adjustment it is necessary to activate the table local menu select the item Adjustment. The following dialog box appears: . From local menu

In Leveling type select the type of leveling performed. The type you choose influences the values already set in the next text edit box. Max distance level-stadia. It allows to set the possible maximum distance between level and stadia. If, during the adjustment, there is a measure with a higher distance a message appears. Max Tolerance. Maximum tolerance value allowed in elevation calculation. If, by performing the adjustment of a branch of leveling, there is an elevation difference higher than this value a message will appear and the adjustment will not be carried out. Update point elevations. If active, updates automatically all points elevations present in coordinates table; the elevation of all points present, with the same name, in coordinates table and in leveling table, is updated to the new adjusted elevation. Update traverse elevations. If active, updates automatically all present traverse stations elevations; all stations elevation present, with the same name, in traverses table and in leveling table, is updated to the new adjusted elevation. By pressing OK button the adjustment calculation begins. A window like the following appears showing all the check messages concerning the calculation.

142

Topko

Traverses
Definition of traverses
When the survey is made up of open traverses, the management of the traverses formed by survey stations is a facoltative phase, since the program is able to calculate the survey in any case. Instead, when the traverses are closed-loop or closed, this phase is indispensable for survey calculation. The definition of traverses has the following advantages:

allows to set the order of station calculations and provides the information needed to perform the adjustment of the survey calculated; allows to obtain the drawing of the traverses in graphic management; allows to specify if a traverse is closed-loop (start and end station are the same) or closed. Note. Topko Express can manage one traverse.

Management of traverses from table

The table of traverses is activated as follows : Toolbar: Survey Menu Survey > Survey data manager... Command line: TBRIL

143

Topko

By selecting the item Traverses in the box on the left, the following table will appear:

The table is subdivided into two parts. The first column contains the description of the traverses, while the others contain the stations, and it is also possible to indicate the elevation of each station.

Insert traverse
To insert a traverse, first it is necessary to insert the traverse name in Description column and then move to the following row, in Point column, by mouse or TAB. Insert all the stations that make up the traverse.

Delete traverse
To delete a traverse it is sufficient to delete the row that corresponds to the description of the traverse.

Define elevation for traverse stations

In case Elevation column does not specify the elevation in the stations that make up the traverse, the value used as station elevation will be the one resulting from survey calculation; otherwise, the elevation defined will be used instead of the calculated one. This solution can be used for example when the elevations reported in this table result from a leveling. Note. If it is necessary to define closed-loop traverses, the last traverse station must coincide with the first. Note. Topko Express can manage one traverse.

Traverse
The command for the insertion of a traverse is activated as follows: Toolbar: Survey Menu Survey > Add measure > Traverse Command line: TRAVERSE On CAD command line the following questions appear : Traverse station description : From point : End point :

144

Topko

Once traverse description has been input, the tool asks you to indicate the stations which make it up; to stop the input press twice the right key of the mouse or twice RETURN. Note. When the tool asks you to indicate the station, it is necessary to operate in one of the following ways : Indicate by mouse the point needed ; Answer the question by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will search inside the file the point indicated and, if it finds this point, it will pass to the next question.

Management of traverses from Graphic CAD

How to erase a traverse
In order to erase a traverse directly on graphic CAD window, it is sufficient to use the erasing command used to erase any kind of entity.

How to modify a traverse

In order to modify a traverse directly on graphic CAD window, first it is necessary to erase the traverse itself, and then input it again. Note. Topko Express can manage one traverse.

145

Topko

Printing of Traverses
To activate the printing of the traverses operate as follows: Menu File > Print Command line: PRINT It is possible to gain access to this window by Traverse station table by window will appear: button. The following

In the dialog box select Traverses and the kind of report to be created.

146

Topko

Chains and offsets

Chains and offsets table
Chain and offset table includes all the readings performed by chain and offset. You can have access to this table through: Toolbar Survey: Menu Survey > Survey data manager... command line: TBRIL

Start. First point in the chain ; End. Name of chain orientation point ; Point. Point observed ; Code. Point code (see Table of codes); Correct.Ang. The chain horizontal correction-angle (in centesimal degrees) ; Distance. Distance from the start point of the projection on the chain of the observed point; Offset. Distance between observed point and chain ; Description. Description of observed point.

Functions of Chains and offsets table

Some table functions are listed below: a. b. Any change made in the table measures has an immediate effect on the graphic CAD window and vice versa; The table can stay open along with the CAD window, thus offering a double display of data, from a graphic and table point of view.

147

Topko

Chains and offsets table, Local Menu

Moreover, by the table local menu it is possible to perform the following operations:

Set code
Assigns to the measures selected a code set by the user.

Press OK to carry out the command.

Description from code

If descriptions in the table of codes have been modified, it is possible to update the table using this function.

Sort sights
Performs a lexicographic sorting according to the initial and final point and the observed point.

Chains and Offsets

A chain and offset measure can be graphically input in two ways, depending on the point. In fact, the point could be already present in the graphic window; otherwise, you might know only its distance and offsets.

Insert measure with already existing point

The command for the insertion of a traverse station is activated in one of the three following ways: Toolbar: Topography Menu Rilievo > Add measure > Chain and offset by point Command line: CROSSMEAS

On CAD command line the following questions appear : Insertion of chain and offset by Point/Chain and offset/<P>:P Enter first alignment point: Specify the first point forming the alignment Enter second alignment point: Specify the second point forming the alignment Enter survey point : Specify the observed point If this is the first alignment measure between the two points indicated, it will be necessary to indicate also the kind of measure: by instrumentation or view; Type of measure|Instrumentation/View: specify the kind of measure. 148

Topko

A line will be drawn, linking the two chain and offset points, and a line linking the chain with the point observed; in the chain and offset table a row will be inserted reporting the data of the new measure.

Input measures with point distance and offsets

The command for the insertion of a traverse station is activated in one of the following three ways: Toolbar: Topography Menu Rilievo > Add measure > Chain and offset by point Command line: CROSSMEAS

On CAD command line the following questions appear: Insertion of chain and offset by Point/Chain and offset/<P>: C Enter first alignment point: Specify the first point forming the alignment Enter second alignment point: Specify the second point forming the alignment Correction angle: Defines the deviation angle from the previous alignment; Chain: Specify the distance along the alignment. Offset : Specify offset from alignment. Point name : Specify the name of the observed point. If this is the first alignment measure between the two points indicated, it will be necessary to indicate also the kind of measure: by instrumentation or view; Type of measure| Instrumentation/View: specify the kind of measure. A point will be inserted in the position indicated by distance and offset; moreover, a line will be drawn, linking the two points which form the alignment, and a line linking the alignment to the observed point; finally, in chain and offset table a new row will be inserted, reporting the data referred to the measure created.

Note. When the program asks you to indicate the alignment points or the observed point, it is necessary to operate as follows: Indicate by the mouse the point needed; answer the question by digiting the name of the point needed: the program will search the indicated point inside the file and, if it finds this point, it will proceed to the next question.

Print measures by chain and offset

To set the printing of chains and offsets follow the instructions below: Menu File > Print Command line: PRINT

It is possible to gain access to this window from Table of chains and offset by

button.

149

Topko

The following window will appear:

In the dialog box select Chains and offsets and choose the kind of report to be created.

Misure e punti GPS

G.P.S. and geographic data
Topko T includes commands for the management and the calculation of GPS data. GPS measures can be represented and then supplied to the tool in two different ways: Geodetic coordinates (latitude,longitude) or geocentric coordinates Baselines

Geodetic Coordinates (latitude,longitude) or geocentric coordinates

GPS coordinates are survey points represented by geographic coordinates, latitude and longitude, referred to a particular ellipsoid. Before using GPS coordinates it is necessary to set the coordinate system from the Project properties - Coodinate system tab and then define the ellipsoid of reference from Survey properties - G.P.S. tab. Especially inside Survey properties dialog box, it is possible to set the ellipsoid the GPS coordinates will refer to and that will be managed inside the survey. There are three types of reference ellipsoids:

System ellipsoid: coordinates refer to the ellipsoid of the coordinate system set in Project properties - Coordinate system tab. WGS84: coordinates refer to the ellipsoid of the WGS84 coordinate system. Pseudo-WGS84: coordinates refer to a WGS84 coordinate system whose center does not coincide with the center of the earth but it is shifted; in this case, to transform Pseudo-WGS84 150

Topko

coordinates into WGS84 coordinates it is necessary to translate Pseudo-WGS84 coordinates on X,Y and Z axes. The tool will ask you to indicate the name of one of the points present in the GPS coordinates table (in this case pseudo-WGS84 coordinates), and their values in the WGS84 coordinate system; in this way the tool will be able to calculate the shifting values. From the geodetic coordinates the tool calculates the corresponding plane coordinates using the parameters of the coordinate system set; it is possible to calculate the local datums between the system ellipsoid and WGS 84 ellipsoid. The display and insertion format of latitude and longitude values can be set in Units control dialog box. Note: Inside each survey, GPS coordinates must have the same reference ellipsoid.

Baselines
A baseline, on the contrary, is a vector applied on space, that is to say a vector of which the application point coordinates are supplied as well as the three components (Dx, Dy, Dz) in the orthogonal geocentric Cartesian reference system WGS84. A baseline is the result of the elaboration, by specific softwares, of measures taken by GPS differential methodology. Baselines can be used by the tool to calculate the corresponding plane coordinates using a plane projection tangent to the ellipsoid on the baseline start point. Before performing calculation from baselines it is necessary to set, in Survey properties - GPS Station, the geocentric coordinates referred to baseline origin. The tool allows to create baselines in the graphic window, asking to indicate the station and the points measured. It is also possible to create new points with baseline.

Import, Export
GPS coordinates and baselines can be imported and exported from ASCII file by using a specific Wizard.

Survey calculation
The survey calculation procedure available inside the tool can transform GPS coordinates into the corresponding plane coordinates according to the coordinate system you have chosen. The GPS coordinates calculated become then Datum points and can be used as a reference for the traditional survey (for example, they can be used for the calculation of station coordinates or fro the traverse adjustment).

Transformation of coordinates
By using the software Matra inside the tool, it is possible to transform topographic coordinates from the starting reference system to any other plane coordinate system. The tool allows to calculate geodetic coordinates from plane coordinates and vice versa, for any coordinate system.

Utilities (Not available for Topko Express)

The tool allows to calculate a local datum referred to the survey area according to some datum points present in it; in the area inside datum points, the local datum is more precise than the standard datum which, on the contrary, it is in larger areas. The tool allows to calculate GPS coordinates starting from plane coordinates present in the table of topographic coordinates. If the reference ellipsoid is that of the coordinate system (of course not the WGS84), the calculation will return geodetic coordinates referred to this ellipsoid. The CAD command for the point identification (ID) will return both the plane coordinates and the geodetic coordinates of the point together with the scale factor (linear deformation). With a defined coordinate system, the real distance between two points (geodetic distance) is not equal to the plane distance measured by using command DIST; the real distance is, in general, higher than the plane distance since it takes into consideration the earth sphericity that is approximated to the ellipsoid. The tool allows to calculate the geodetic distance, and also other information, simply indicating the two points to be measured. 151

Topko

Table of GPS coordinates (WGS84)

The table of GPS coordinates contains data of all the GPS points present in the current subproject. You can have access to this table through the following modes: Toolbar: Survey Menu Survey > Survey data manager... Command line: TBRIL

By selecting the item GPS Coordinates in the box on the left, the following window will appear:

The table can display GPS coordinates either in Latitude/Longitude mode or as Geocentric coordinates. In the lower section of the table three pages are available, which allow to display the information desired. The third page Factors allows to display the precision parameters referred to any single coordinate. Any change made to latitude / longitude coordinates determines the automatic recalculation of the corresponding geocentric coordinates; vice versa, any change made on the geocentric coordinates determines the automatic recalculation of the corresponding geodetic coordinates.

Latitude / Longitude
This page displays the following data for each coordinate: Name. Name of the point. Code. Code of the point (see Survey codes table). Latitude. Point latitude value. Longitude. Point longitude value. Height. Height of the point with reference to the ellipsoid of reference. Elevation. Geodetic elevation. Description. Description. Note. The display and insertion format of latitude and longitude values can be set in Units dialog box.

152

Topko

Geodetic coordinates

For each coordinate this page displays the following data: Station. Name of base point. Name. Name of the point. Code. Code of the point (see Survey codes table). X. Geocentic coordinate X. Y. Geocentic coordinate Y. Z. Geocentic coordinate Z. GDOP. DOP value; values can be GDOP or PDOP, depending on what has been set in Survey properties - GPS Station; Description. Description.

Factors

The following factors must be interpreted according to the kind of matrix set in Survey properties GPS Station. 153

Topko

This page displays the following data for each coordinate: Station. Name of base point. Name. Name of the point. Code. Code of the point (see Survey codes table). Fatt.XX. First factor of variance-covariance matrix or of factors matrix. Fatt.XY. Second factor of variance-covariance matrix or of factors matrix. Fatt.XZ. Third factor of variance-covariance matrix or of factors matrix. Fatt.YY. Fourth factor of variance-covariance matrix or of factors matrix. Fatt.YZ. Fifth factor of variance-covariance matrix or of factors matrix. Fatt.ZZ. Sixth factor of variance-covariance matrix or of factors matrix. RMS. RMS (only in case of co-factors matrix). Description. Description;

154

Topko

Utilities
By table local menu the following operations can be carried out:

Set code
Select the rows in which to introduce a code; new code request window will appear:

OK to carry out the command.

Description from code

Fill in Description column with the information derived by the corresponding codes.

Set station
Select the rows in which to assign a new station. Station name request window will appear.

OK to carry out the command.

Sort by name
Arranges the sequence of data according to the name.

155

Topko

Export to ASCII file

Exports data in Ascii format, keeping unvaried the order in which they are displayed. If some rows are selected, only those lines will be exported.

Geocentric coordinates from baselines

Allows to obtain geocentric coordinates from the baselines contained in the archive; it is necessary to specify the name and geocentric coordinates of the origin point desired to calculate geocentric coordinates by its plane coordinates; the following window will appear:

By selecting the option Copy variance matrix factors it is possible to assign the geocentric coordinates calculated the corresponding baseline factors. Press OK to start calculation.

WGS84 from coordinates

Allows to obtain WGS84 coordinates from plane coordinates; it is necessary to define a reference geoid, so the following requests will appear: as ellipsoid elevation S/N it is possible to choose whether to set to the points the elevation of the ellipsoid or keep the plane one; Transforms topographic points into WGS84 All/Selection select the points of which to calculate WGS84 coordinates, choosing all or specifying a selection;

Elevation >> Ellipsoid height

Calculates ellipsoid height from elevation.

Latitude/Longitude >> Geocentric

To calculate geocentric coordinates from latitude/longitude.

Geocentric >> Latitude/Longitude

To calculate latitude/longitude from geocentric coordinates.

156

Topko

Baselines table
Baselines table contains data referred to all the GPS baselines available in the current subproject. It is possible to have access to this table by: Toolbar: Survey Menu Survey > Survey data manager... Command line: TBBSURV

The table reports on the lower side two pages allowing to choose the two display modes of baseline data; the first page displays the main data, that is to say the vectorial components of each baseline, while the second displays the precision parameters associated to each baseline.

Standard
This page displays, for each baseline, the following data: Station. Name of base point. Base antenna height. Height of base antenna. Name. Point name; Code. Point code (see Codes table); DX. X component of the vector represented by the baseline. DY. Y component of the vector represented by the baseline. DZ. Z component of the vector represented by the baseline. Point Antenna H. Antenna height on the point measured. GDOP. DOP Value; the value can be GDOP or PDOP according to what has been set in Survey properties - GPS Station; Description. Description;

157

Topko

Factors

The following factors must be interpreted according to the kind of matrix set in Survey properties - GPS Station.

This page displays, for each baseline, the following data: Station. Name of base point. Base antenna height. Height of base antenna. Name. Point name; Fact.XX. First factor of variance-covariance matrix or factors matrix. Fatt.XY. Second factor of variance-covariance matrix or factors matrix. Fatt.XZ. Third factor of variance-covariance matrix or factors matrix. Fatt.YY. Fourth factor of variance-covariance matrix or factors matrix. Fatt.YZ. Fifth factor of variance-covariance matrix or factors matrix. Fatt.ZZ. Sixth factor of variance-covariance matrix or factors matrix. RMS. RMS (only in case of cofactors matrix) Description. Description;

Local menu
From table toolbar it is possible to activate utility commands. (see Table Toolbar). By table local menu it is possible to carry out the following operations:

158

Topko

Set code
Assigns to the measures selected a code set by the user.

OK to carry out the command.

Description from code

Fills in Description column with the information derived from the corresponding codes.

Change station name

Indicate the name of the station to change as well as the name to be assigned in the following request:

By Update coordinates the names are changed also in the table of coordinates.

Export to ASCII file...

Exports data in Ascii format, keeping unvaried the order in which they are displayed. If some rows are selected, only those rows will be exported.

Baselines from geocentric coordinates...

Allows to obtain baselines from geocentric coordinates; it is necessary to specify the reference station from which to calculate the baselines and its plane coordinates; the following window will appear:

159

Topko

By selecting the option Copy variance matrix factors the values found in the factors page will be copied; Press OK to start calculation.

Sort sights
Performs a lexicographic sort, by name of station and name of survey point.

Cadastral sort sights

Performs a sight sort according to cadastral rule; the sort considered is the following: station-station sights; station - datum point sight, measures on survey points, measures on detail points.

Create GPS measures

It is possible to manage the creation of new GPS measures by inserting a new point with measures or by creating a baseline of an already existing point.

Surveyed points with baseline

In this case a topographic point is inserted normally and a baseline is created directly from station to point. The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar Survey Menu Survey > Add measure > Surveyed point with baseline Command line: TPOINTBASELINE

On command line the following prompts will appear: Point : indicate point position Point name: indicate the name to be set to the point ... Station: indicate the station performing the point measurement Base antenna height: indicate base antenna height; Point antenna height: indicate point antenna height; DOP value: indicate DOP value. 160

Topko

The tool asks to indicate point position (see Input coordinates) and then insert other data such as elevation, code, etc.

Baseline from existing points

In this case the tool asks to indicate a station and the points measured. The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar Survey Menu Survey > Add measure > Baseline from point Command line: BASELINE

On the command line the following prompts will appear: Select station: specify the station observing the points Select point to be surveyed: select the points to create measures for Base antenna height: indicate base antenna height; Point antenna height: indicate point antenna height; DOP value: indicate DOP value.

Baselines will be created from the station indicated to the points selected. Note. Requests following the one for point position are made taking into account what is indicated in Points page of Project Properties window. Note. When the tool asks to indicate the station or the point surveyed it is necessary to operate as follows: Indicate by the mouse the point desired; answer the question by entering the name of the point desired: the tool will search inside the file the point indicated and if this point is found it will pass to the following request.

Input of GPS points in the graphic window

It is possible to insert data inside the table of GPS coordinates by specifying points, in plane coordinates, inside the planimetry graphic window; the tool will transform the plane coordinate indicated in the corresponding GPS coordinate. The command of insertion can be activated through one of the following ways: Toolbar: Survey Menu Survey > Add measure > G.P.S. point Command line: GPSPOINT

On CAD command line the following questions will appear: Select point : indicate the point position Point name : indicate the name to be assigned to the point Point elevation : specify point elevation; Point code : set a code to the point; Point description : introduce point description. 161

Topko

The tool asks you to indicate the point position (see Entering 2D coordinates) and then to insert the other data such as the elevation, the code, etc. Baselines can be created from the graphic window in two ways, depending on whether the points have already been inserted or they have not been created yet.

Creation of GPS coordinates (WGS84) from plane coordinates

The tool can return GPS coordinates starting from the plane coordinates present in the table of topographic coordinates. It is necessary to set the coordinate system the plane coordinates refer to and the reference ellipsoid for the GPS coordinates; the coordinates system can be set from Project properties - Coordinate system tab, while the reference ellipsoid can be defined from Survey properties - G.P.S. tab. The command can be activated by one of the following ways: Toolbar: Survey Menu Survey > Survey data manager... Command line: TBRIL

In the box on the left the table of gps coordinates and from the table local menu choose the command Creates WGS84 from coordinates. On command line the following prompts will appear: Set point elevation to ellipsoid elevation|Yes/No: Choose whether to assign the elevation from the ellipsoid set or keep the plane system one. Transform topographic points into WGS84|All/Select Answer A to process all the topographic points in the current subproject; answer S to select to select the points to be processed. At the end of the elaboration, in the table of GPS coordinates, you can find the calculated points.

Geocentric coordinates from baselines

Allows to obtain geocentric coordinates from the baselines contained in the archive; it is necessary to specify the name and geocentric coordinates of the origin point desired to calculate geocentric coordinates by its plane coordinates; The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar: Survey Menu Survey > Survey data manager... Command line: TBSURV

162

Topko

The following dialog box will appear:

The option Copy variance matrix factors allows to set to the geocentric coordinates calculated the corresponding baseline factors. Press OK to start calculation.

Baselines from geocentric coordinates

By this command it is possible to calculate baselines automatically, by using the geocentric coordinates available in the file. The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar: Topography Menu Survey > Survey data manager... Command line: TBSURV

In this window it is necessary to set the name and the geocentric coordinates of the start point desired for baseline calculation. The baselines vectorial components will be determined as difference between the geocentric coordinates of the point chosen as origin and the geocentric coordinates of each point. By entering the name desired, the tool will display automatically the geocentric coordinates of the point indicated.

163

Topko

The following dialog box will appear:

The option Copy variance matrix factors allows to set to the baselines calculated the corresponding factors of geocentric coordinates. Press OK to start calculation.

Survey calculation with GPS coordinates

GPS coordinates present inside the project can be calculated by the tool and, in this way, they become plane topographic coordinates of the reference system set in Project properties - Coordinate system tab. After the calculation, GPS coordinates can also become datum points to be used as reference for the traditional survey: for example, the new datum points can be used for the calculation of station coordinates or for traverse adjustment. In the last case, in the field book of tachymetric sights, it is necessary to refere to points having the name indicated in GPS coordinates table. With this method, it is then extremely easy to combine traditional tachymetric surveys to GPS readings using these ones as a base for the survey. The calculation of coordinates is always performed from the same dialog box used for the traditional survey calculation; with a particular option it is possible to activate or deactivate the use of the GPS sights present in the survey. See Survey calculation.

Calculation of local datums

This command allows to create a new local datum to a zone where the coordinates of the two coordinate systems of reference are known. The local datum results to be more precise of the standard datums provided by the tool; in fact the local datum is calibrated to work better inside zones defined by standard datum points. The command can be activate through one of the following ways: Menu Survey > Coordinate transformation > Datum calculation Command line: GPSDATUM

164

Topko

The following dialog box will appear:

The dialog box is divided into two parts: in the upper part all datum points are input in WGS84 coordinates; by digiting the point name in Name column the tool will look for it inside the table of GPS coordinates and automatically completes the columns of Latitude, Longitude and Elevation data. Note. The display and insert formats of latitude and longitude values can be set in Units dialog box. In the lower part of the table, in Datum point coordinates tab, datum points are input according to the reference system currently defined; by digiting the point name in Name column the tool will look for it inside the datum points table and automatically completes the columns of Y, X and Elevation data. Note. In order to carry out the local datum calculation, you need at least one point for Molodensky transformation method and three points for Bursa/Wolfe. Before calculating the local datum parameters, it is possible to choose the type of transformation to be used between two methods suggested: Molodensky and Bursa/Wolfe. With Calculate button you can define the local datum parameters; in Calculated coordinates and deviations tab it is possible to check the deviations obtained by using the parameters calculated in order to obtain the start coordinates.

165

Topko

In Transformation parameters tab you can find the parameters calculated for the local datum.

166

Topko

Through Create datum button you carry out the creation of the datum whose parameters have just been calculated. The tool not only creates the datum but automatically creates also a new system using the datum calculated. Finally, the tool asks you to indicate the name to be assigned to the datum and the name to be assigned to the system that will use the datum. The system is then included in the group containing the system of reference coordinates.

Measuring geodetic distance

The geodetic distance is different from the plane distance since the former takes into account the Earth sphericity which determines a greater length to go from a point to another. The Earth sphericity is approximated by the coordinate system ellipsoid on which you are working. The command can be activated through one of the following methods: Menu Tools > Geodetic distance Command line: DISTG

On the command line the following questions will appear: First point: indicate the first of the two points between which the distance has to be measured. Second point: indicate the second of the two points between which the distance has to be measured. The following window will appear:

The tool not only displays the currently defined coordinate system data but also calculates the following information: Ellipsoidical distance: distance calculated on the coodinate system ellipsoid (curvilinear distance); Point-to-point distance: distance between points expressed into geocentric coordinates (X, Y, Z referrend to the center of the Earth). Elevation difference: difference in elevation between the two points: 167

Topko

Forward azimuth: azimuthal angle between the first point and the second point. Backward azimuth: azimuthal angle between the second point and the first point. Differences among geocentric X, Y, Z: X, Y and Z difference between the two points expressed into geocentric coordinates. Differences among N, E, Elevation...: difference in N, E and elevation between the first and the second point by using the first point as the origin of a plane projection.

Import of GPS coordinates

The acquisition of GPS coordinates from ASCII files is useful in all the cases where it is necessary for example, to import data already processed by other tools. In order to import a group of geographic coordinates it is necessary that data in the ASCII file are arranged according to the following rules:

in each row of the file you have to insert the data of one point (Name, Latitude, Longitude, etc.). Each point data must be separated by a special characted or they must be set up in columns on fixed-width columns. latitude and longitude values must be expressed according to what specified in the latitude and longitude display format.

In order to activate the import procedure it is necessary to select the item Import/Export from File menu and then ASCII IN; otherwise you can give command ASCIIIN. See also Import from ASCII file. In the appearing dialog box, it is necessary to indicate the name of the ASCII file to be loaded and the folder where it is saved; select the option Geodetic coordinates. Pressing button Next you go on with the definition of import parameters and a second dialog box appears asking which are the data present inside the file and in which order they are saved: select the type of data in the list box on the left and by pressing button > they are shifted in the list box on the right. The order of the data in the list box on the right must correspond to the data order in the text file rows. The third dialog box allows to define whether you want the data to be separated by a character such as a comma, etc. (Delimited) or to be set up in columns (fixed-width columns). If data are separated by a characted, the tool asks you to indicate which is the character that separates them; if, on the contrary, data are set up in columns the tool will ask you to indicate the widths of the different columns in order to allow the tool identify them. For each column, specify the width used in text characters. In the last dialog box, the tool is ready to read the data and asks whether data have to be lined up to those already present (if necessary), or whether previous data have to be erased.

168

Topko

Latitude and longitude format

In this dialog box it is possible to set the display and insertion formats of the latitude and longitude values in the different dialog boxes of the tool. The command can be activated through one of the following methods: Menu Format > Units Command line: DDUNITS

The following dialog box will appear:

From Latitude/Longitude tab it is possible to choose one of the formats provided: GG: definition only by sexagesimal degrees; GG MM / GG-MM: definition by sexagesimal degrees and minutes; GG MM SS / GG-MM-SS: definition by degrees, minutes and seconds; Other options are available such as Show symbols, the option that makes the symbols of the grades, minutes and seconds visible or invisible; moreover, you can decide whether to show the position North/South and East/West by using +/- sign or a letter, both as prefix and suffix. Every change made on parameters corresponds to an updating of the example in the lower part of the window.

169

Topko

Print GPS data

Print GPS point coordinates
To set the printing of GPS point coordinates operate as follows: Menu File > Print Command line: PRINT This window can be activated also from GPS coordinates table by The following window will appear: button.

Select GPS - Points in the dialog box and choose the kind of report to be created.

170

Topko

Print baselines
To set the printing of baselines operate as follows: Menu File > Print Command line: PRINT

This window can be activated also from Baselines table by The following window will appear:

button.

Select GPS - Baselines in the dialog box and choose the kind of report to be created.

Datum points
Datum points management is not an indispensable procedure to perform during a topographic work; it can be considered, rather, a database for such specific elaborations as the following:

transformation of coordinates; survey calculation in case of closed traverses;

Datum points table

Datum points table is similar to that for coordinates but has one more column, Attend. column, which represents the reliability of the datum point. Coordinates table. Datum points table can be activated as follows: 171

Topko

Toolbar: Topography Menu Survey > Survey data manager... Command line: TBSURV

By selecting the item Datums in the box on the left, the following table will appear:

It is possible to define three typologies of datum points: Planimetric datum points: datum points of which the planimetric coordinates are known but the elevation is not. Altimetric datum points: datum points of which only elevation can be defined. Plano-altimetric datum points: datum points of which the three dimensions, planimetry and altimetry are known. The tool recognizes automatically the kind of datum point according to the data inserted. Planimetric datum points: to define this kind of datum point set the planimetric coordinates and leave elevation cell empty. Altimetric datum points: for this typology it is necessary to annul completely the content of the coordinate cells and fill in only the elevation cell. Plano-altimetric datum points: in this case fill in both the two coordinate cells and elevation cell. It is possible to specify, for any single datum point, whether it must be used as reference point in survey calculation by using Use option. In this way, datum points, although present in the archive, can be excluded from calculation.

Utility
Utility commands can be activated from table toolbar (see Table toolbar). In particular, by local menu it is possible to perform the following operation:

Sort by name
The command allows to sort by name the points display.

172

Topko

Management of datum points from graphic CAD

Input of a datum point from graphic CAD
The activation of a datum point input command is performed by one of the following methods: Toolbar Survey: Menu Survey > Datum points > Insert datum point Command line: DATUM

The execution of a command is carried out in the same way as the input of a survey point, except for the fact that the datum will be added in the table of datum points rather than in that of topographic coordinates.

How to erase a datum point from graphic CAD

In order to erase a datum point from the graphic CAD window, it is sufficient to use the erase command that is used to erase any kind of entity.

How to modify a datum point from graphic CAD

As far as the modification of a datum point on graphic CAD, see the section about modification of survey points.

173

Topko

Printing Datum points

To set the printing of the datum points operate as follows: Menu File > PRINT Command line: PRINT The window can be activated by Datums table button.

The following window will appear:

In the dialog box select Datums and choose the kind of report to be created.

Survey calculation
With coordinate calculation procedure, survey coordinates are obtained from fieldbook of measures, from measures taken by chain and offset or from GPS coordinates. The tool is equipped with a calculation procedure which enables it to calculate autonomously the survey. To activate this procedure follow one of the two methods illustrated below: Menu Survey > Survey Calculation Command line: CALCSURVEY

174

Topko

On the left of the window there is a list of the main phases of survey calculation procedure. Settings: in this phase the parameters are set, concerning the mode by which the tool will perform the survey calculation. Calculation: it is the calculation phase, where the tool determines the coordinates of the points and the user decides whether to use certain data and calculation procedures. Results: it is the phase where it is possible to verify how the data have been calculated, the errors have been found, the calculation procedures have been applied. If the calculation has already been performed, you can also leave out the first two phases and pass to the display of the results of the previous elaboration. Reports: it is the last phase where the tool generates reports according to the data calculated. If the calculation has already been performed, you can also leave out the first two phases and pass to the display of the results of the previous elaboration.

Settings
Calculation settings are subdivided into three tabs: Calculation mode, Topographic calculations and Reports.

175

Topko

Calculation modes

Calculation mode
Calculate G.P.S. points: Activate this option to perform the elaboration of G.P.S. coordinates; the elaboration transforms the geodetic coordinates of the G.P.S. table into plane coordinates. The G.P.S. coordinates calculated become points of known coordinates, like datum points, so they can be used as references for the traditional survey, for example, for calculating station coordinates or for traverse station adjustments. In case the main option Calculate GPS points has been selected, in this section it is possible to define some parameters which check the mode calculation is performed with. Use baselines and local system In this case the tool performs the calculation by using the baselines available in the work. So that calculation is performed successfully, it is necessary to specify in Survey properties - GPS Station Page, the baseline start point and its geocentric coordinates. Thanks to this option, calculation is performed by a projection on a local plane system tangent to survey origin. Use coordinates system On the contrary, by this mode it will be possible to use the coordinate system chosen and the corresponding settings. It is possible to use either Geocentric coordinates or Geodetic coordinates (latitude / longitude). For this kind of calculation it is necessary to set coordinate system from Project properties and define the reference ellipsoid from Survey properties. In both cases, the elaboration transforms GPS measures into plane coordinates. The GPS coordinates calculated become points of known coordinates, such as Datum points, so they can be used as reference for the traditional survey, for example, for station coordinates calculation or traverse station adjustment. Station calculation. By activating this option, fieldbook measures are used to calculate station coordinates. 176

Topko

Use traverse stations. By this option you can decide whether the calculation procedure must use the traverses defined in the table with the same name and then apply the adjustments in case of closed and constrained traverses (traverse table). Topko Express can calculate only a single polygonal. Least square adjustment. It is possible to perform the least square adjustment on the stations, including calculation and display of error ellipsis (See report of error ellipsis). Not available for Topko Express. Calculation of survey points. If this option is not active, only the stations, not the survey points are calculated. Calculation of points by chain and offset. You can exclude from the calculation the measures obtained by chain and offset. Use datum points table. If this option is active, datum points table data are used (datum points table). Station elevations from datum points. If this option is active, the tool tries to determine the station elevations from the measures taken on datum points. ).As far as cadastral works is concerned, if during the calculation of the survey the tool finds measures taken on datum points which do not appear in the table of datum points, it will import them automatically from the TAF file provided for by the territorial agency and extract automatically also the description of the corresponding measures. Automatic rototranslation When this option is active, in case survey calculation is performed without knowing start station coordinates, the tool, once the elaboration has been performed, tries to perform a rototranslation on datum points. So that this condition can occur, at least two points measured in the handbook of measures must be contained in datum points table as well. In case there is only one point in common, a simple translation will be performed, without rotation.

Calculation of survey points

Delete previous calculated points: if this option is active, the tool cancels all the points in the file and inserts the new points calculated. Update previous calculated points: by this option, after performing the calculation, the tool verifies whether each point calculated is already in the file; if it is not in the file, the tool inserts it, otherwise, it updates the point with the new coordinates. So, any possible customization performed on survey points (symbols, sizes, etc) are kept also if the coordinates change. Cancel uncalculated points: if the option is active, it is possible to decide whether the points contained in the file but no longer calculated must be kept or deleted.

Topographic calculations
By this table it is possible to activate the topographic devices to use in survey calculation. When, inside the field book, the tool has the opportunity to calculate the coordinates by using a certain device, it can decide whether to use it or not according to the following settings: Trilateration: if two coordinate stations and the distances to a point are known, the tool determines the coordinates. Snellius/Pothenot (Resection 3 points): if three points and the angular sights to these points from a station are known, the tool determines the coordinates. Resection 2 points: if two points and the two angular sights and a distance to these points from a station are known, the tool determines the coordinates. Intersection angle-angle: if two coordinate stations and the angular views to a point are known, the tool determines the coordinates. 3D Intersection angle-angle. in case of points calculated by intersection angle-angle, the tool determines the lines crossing the telescope axis and determines the 3D point where the two lines are closer to each other. To use mostly for photogrammetric surveys. Single station transformation: if a station or a group of stations are not linked to each other, by this option the procedure can rototranslate automatically the station or the group and the points 177

Topko

measured. In this way it is possible to calculate separated tachimetric surveys that lean on GPS points. Auto-recognition of new orientation: by activating this option the tool can determine automatically measures that establish a new orientation, i.e. the measures performed at a reference point following a new stationing on the same station. Moreover, it is possible to specify manually reorientation measures by assigning to them a specific control code. See paragraph Control codes. Measures with true azimuth: by activating this option the tool considers the horizontal angles of the handbook of measures as azimuth referred to the North; in this way, for the stations, the measure at the previous station is not necessary.

Subprojects (not available for Topko Express)

In this page it is possible to set the subprojects on which to perform survey calculation. The tool will perform the elaboration for all the subprojects selected.

178

Topko

Calculation

During the calculation phase the tool uses all the information, supplied by the user, as far as the topographic instruments used, Topographic Instruments window, and the calculation parameters (start station, temperature, pressure, etc.) defined in Survey properties. It is possible to set the maximum errors admitted for each measure, so that, if these error tolerances are exceeded, the tool advises the user. By survey calculation procedure it is possible to solve, besides traverse stations and normal calculations, inverse intersections, intersections angle-angle, resection 2 points, trilaterations. According to the measures performed and the points known, the tool finds out and solves automatically all the situations that may occur. The main operations performed by calculation procedure are reported in a list in the upper part of the window. Each message printed is accompanied by an icon by which it is possible to recognize immediately the typology of the message. Three kinds of messages are reported: Message: generic message indicating the phase of the calculation the tool has come to. Information: message about calculation results or information about data found in the work. Warning / Error: message indicating an error found during the calculation. The error can concern points calculated with data exceeding the tolerances set etc. If the number of sights is superabundant and the points are hyper- determined, the tool displays a window that gives the opportunity to exclude some measures. This device allows to intervene on the calculation phases increasing the precision of the results. Station name: displays the name of the station or the name of the hyper-determined point. Use: This column allows to specify whether the sights must be used during the calculation or not. 179

Topko

Type: reports the kind of measure the tool has recognized. E,N,Elevation: Coordinates calculated. Angular correction: angular correction applied to the station. Distance diff.: the difference is reported, between the value calculated and the average value. The lower part of the window displays the averages calculated according to the measures accepted and the standard deviation. By pressing Enter button you go on with the calculation, while, by pressing Enter all, windows like this are no longer displayed and the tool performs automatically the average of the results of the measures.

Results
Once the calculation phase is finished, the results can be displayed.

The results of the calculation are inserted in a tree structure by which you can verify the origin of a result by going back to the measures that determined it. The right side of the table shows the data referred to each node of the tree; if a node has some sub-nodes, it means that these sub-nodes have contributed to determining the main node. The result of the calculation can be seen immediately, in the graphic CAD window, where the survey points will be drawn in the position calculated. These data can be found also in the table of topographic coordinates.

180

Topko

Reports
From the calculation results the tool generates another tree that reports all the reports that can be obtained:

Each item corresponds to a report which is displayed in the right side of the window. The report is generated automatically by the tool, starting from the report model set and substituting the marks with the corresponding values. Full page. Displays full page; Two pages. Displays two pages at the same time; Save. Saves the report in an external path; Report model: chooses from the list the report model to be used; Print. Allows to start report printing. Report options. Allows to set the options by which to print the record; New report model. Allows to create a new record model; It is possible to obtain also the calculation report along with all the information concerning survey and survey calculation:

181

Topko

The record is a powerful archiving tool of the whole calculation process, making it possible to search data and check results even a long time later.

Topographic instruments
Through the following dialog box it is possible to set the features, as far as precision and measure units, of the tools used on surveying. All these information are then used by the program during the survey calculation to determine survey points. To have access to this box you have to select Topographic instruments from Survey menu, or to give DDINSTRUM command. Menu Survey > Topographic instruments Command line: DDINSTRUM

182

Topko

The following dialog box is divided into three tabs :

Distances : allows to set the technical features of the diastimeter used. The option Use instruments specifications must be active so that the tool can use these information; Tachymeter : allows to set the technical features of the tachymeter used. It is necessary that the option Use instruments specifications is active so that the the tool can use these information; Angles : allows to set the technical features of the tools used for angular measures. It is necessary that the option Use instruments specifications is active so that the tool can use these information.

Printing the error ellipses

After having performed the survey calculation using the least square adjustment option, it is possible to print the data concerning the error ellipses calculated. To set the printing of error ellipsis operate as follows: Menu File > Print Command line: PRINT

The window can be activated by Topographic coordinates table

button.

183

Topko

The following window will appear:

In the dialog box choose Topographic coordinates and then Error ellipses, and finally the kind of report to be created.

COGO Commands
COGO
COGO (Coordinate Geometry) includes all those commads that, in some ways, allow to determine the position of new points through intersection of lines, circles, alignments, tangents, angles. Here is the list of the COGO commands offered by the tool: Intersection distance-distance: creates a new point from the intersection of two datum points whose distance is known. Intersection distance-angle: creates a new point from the intersection of two datum points; for the first point direction is defined and for the second point distance is defined. Intersection angle-angle: creates a new point from the intersection of two datum points whose direction is known. Intersection 4 points: creates a new point from the intersection of two straight lines passing by two couples of points. Chain and offset: creates a new point in offset according to two points in chain. Point on Alignment: creates a new point along an alignment formed by two points. Normal intersection: creates a new point on the projection of one point on the alignment formed by two points.

184

Topko

Parallel intersection: given two points setting the direction and a third point, the command creates a new point parallel to the first two points and at a certain distance from the third. Projection: creates a new point along an element at a specified distance from the beginning. Resection 3 points (Snellius-Pothenot): it calculates station coordinates, given three angular readings perfomed by the station itself. Resection 2 points: it calculates the station coordinates, given an angular reading and a distance and a second angular reading. Angle and distance: creates a new point for polar coordinates. Fit curve: given three points and the radius, it creates two tangent points and the center point of the curve that can be inserted between two segments obtained from the joining of the three points. Tangent two circles: given two circles, it creates two new points on the points of the straight lines tangent to the two circles. Some of COGO commands have already been implemented on the tool previous versions. These commands are: Building/Walk : it allows to insert rapidly survey points on building corners or, in general, on sides orthogonal to themselves. Divide and Measure: allows to create points on an object at specified intervals.

Intersection distance-distance
With this command it is possible to create a new point from the intersection of two datum points for which distance is known. The command can be activated through one of the methods listed below: Toolbar COGO Menu Survey > COGO > Intersection distance-distance Command line: CGINTDD On command line the following questions appear: Enter first point: indicate first datum point. Enter first distance: specify the distance of the point to create from the first point. Enter second point: Enter second datum point. Enter second distance: specify the distance of the point to create from the second point. Select the insertion side: since there are two intersections, it is necessary to indicate which one to use for creating the new point. Point name: name of the point to create. During the elaboration, the tool draws geometric elements that allow to understand how the point position is determined; at the following redraw the elements are removed automatically from the drawing. Note. When the tool asks to enter a point it is possible to act in one of the following ways: Indicate with the mouse the point needed; answer the prompt by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will look for the point entered inside the file and if it finds the point, the tool will go on with the next question. give point X, Y coordinates.

185

Topko

Intersection distance-angle
This command creates a new point from the intersection of two datum points given the direction for the first point and the distance for the second point. The command can be activated through one of the following methods: Menu Survey > COGO > Intersection distance-angle Command line: CGINTDA

On command line the following questions appear: Enter first point: indicate the first datum point. Enter first distance: specify the distance of the point to create from the first point. Enter second point: indicate the second datum point. Enter angle (Azimuth): indicate the direction line along which the point calculated has to be positioned. Point name: name of the point to create. During the elaboration, the tool draws geometric elements that allow to understand how the point position is determined; at the following redraw the elements are removed automatically from the drawing. Note. When the tool asks to enter a point it is possible to act in one of the following ways: Indicate with the mouse the point needed; answer the prompt by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will look for the point entered inside the file and if it finds the point, the tool will go on with the next question. give point X,Y coordinates.

Intersection angle-angle
By this command it is possible to create a new point from the intersection of two datum points whose direction is defined. The command can be activated by one of the following methods: Toolbar COGO Menu Survey > COGO > Intersection angle-angle Command line: CGINTAA On command line the following questions appear: Enter first point: Indicate the first datum point. Enter first angle (Azimuth): indicate the first direction line on which the point calculated has to be positioned. Enter second point: indicate the second datum point. Enter second angle (Azimuth): indicate the second direction line on which the point calculated has to be positioned. Point name: name of the point to create. During the elaboration, the tool draws geometric elements that allow to understand how the point position is determined; at the following redraw the elements are removed automatically from the drawing. Note. When the tool asks to enter a point it is possible to act in one of the following ways: Indicate with the mouse the point needed;

186

Topko

answer the prompt by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will look for the point entered inside the file and if it finds the point, the tool will go on with the next question. give point X,Y coordinates.

Intersection 4 points
This command creates a new point from the intersection of two straight lines passing by two couples of points. The command can be activated through one of the following methods: Toolbar COGO Menu Survey > COGO > Intersection 4 points Command line: CGINT4P On command line the following questions appear: Enter first point: indicate the first datum point. Enter second point: indicate second datum point. Enter third point: Indicate the third datum point. Enter fourth point: indicate the fourth datum point. Point name: name of the point to create. During the elaboration, the tool draws geometric elements that allow to understand how the point position is determined; at the following redraw the elements are removed automatically from the drawing. Note. When the tool asks to enter a point it is possible to act in one of the following ways: Indicate with the mouse the point needed; answer the prompt by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will look for the point entered inside the file and if it finds the point, the tool will go on with the next question. give point X,Y coordinates.

Chain and offset

This command creates a new point in offset with reference to two points in chain. The command can be activated through one of the following methods: Toolbar COGO Menu Survey > COGO > Chain and offset Command line: CGCHAINOFF On command line the following questions appear: Enter first point: indicate the first point of the chain. Enter second point: indicate the second point of the chain. Enter distance from first point: specify the distance of the point to create from the first point. Enter offset from alignment: specify the distance of the point from the chain formed by the first two points. Point name: name of the point to create. During the elaboration, the tool draws geometric elements that allow to understand how the point position is determined; at the following redraw the elements are removed automatically. Note. When the tool asks to indicate a point, it is possible to act in one of the following ways: 187 Enter with the mouse the point needed;

Topko

answer the prompt by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will look for the point entered inside the file and if it finds the point, the tool will go on with the next question. give point X,Y coordinates.

Point on alignment
This command allows to create a new point along the alignment formed by two points. The command can be activated through one of the following modes: Toolbar COGO Menu Survey > COGO > Alignment Command line: CGALLD On command line the following questions appear: Enter first point: indicate the first alignment point. Enter second point: indicate the second alignment point. Enter distance from first point: specify the distance of the point to be created from the first point. Point name: name of the point to create. During the elaboration, the tool draws geometric elements that allow to understand how the point position is determined; at the following redraw the elements are removed automatically from the drawing. Note. When the tool asks to enter a point it is possible to act in one of the following ways: Indicate with the mouse the point needed; answer the prompt by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will look for the point entered inside the file and if it finds the point, the tool will go on with the next question. give point X,Y coordinates.

Normal intersection
With this command it is possible to create a new point on the projection of a point on the alignment created by two points. The command can be activated in one of the following modes: Toolbar COGO Menu Survey > COGO > Normal Command line: CGNORMAL

On command line the following questions appear: Enter first point: indicate the first point of the alignment. Enter second point: indicate second point of the alignment. Enter third point: indicate the third point whose projection on the alignment defines the position of the point to calculate. Point name: name of the point to create. During the elaboration, the tool draws geometric elements that allow to understand how the point position is determined; at the following redraw the elements are removed automatically from the drawing.

188

Topko

Note. When the tool asks to enter a point it is possible to act in one of the following ways: Indicate with the mouse the point needed; answer the prompt by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will look for the point entered inside the file and if it finds the point, the tool will go on with the next question. give point X,Y coordinates.

Parallel intersection
Given two points defining the direction and a third point, this command creates a new point parallel to the first two points and at a certain distance from the third. The command can be activated by one of the methods below: Toolbar COGO Menu Survey > COGO > Parallel Command line: CGPARAL On command line the following questions appear: Enter first point: indicate first datum point. Enter second point: indicate second datum point. Enter third point: indicate the third point from where the point to calculate will be created parallel to the first two points. Enter distance from third point: distance from the third point to the point to be created. Point name: name of the point to create. During the elaboration, the tool draws geometric elements that allow to understand how the point position is determined; at the following redraw the elements are removed automatically from the drawing. Note. When the tool asks to enter a point it is possible to act in one of the following ways: Indicate with the mouse the point needed; answer the prompt by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will look for the point entered inside the file and if it finds the point, the tool will go on with the next question. give point X,Y coordinates.

Projection
This command creates new point along an element and at a specified distance from the beginning. The command can be activated in one of the following methods: Menu Survey > COGO > Projection Command line: CGPROJEC On command line the following questions appear: Select object: select the object along which to insert the point. Block/Point/Survey point/<S>: choose S to insert a survey point. Segment length: distance from the beginning to point insertion.

Resection 3 points (Snellius-Pothenot)

This command allows to calculate a station coordinates by using three angular readings performed by the station itself on three datum points. 189

Topko

The command can be activated in one of the following ways: Menu Survey > COGO > Resection 3 points Command line: CGRESECT3P

On command line the following questions appear: Enter first point: indicate the first datum point. Enter first measured angle: specify the angular reading calculated from the station to the first point. Enter second point: indicate the second datum point. Enter second measured angle: specify the angular reading calculated from the station to the second point. Enter third point: indicate the third datum point. Enter third measured angle: indicate the angular reading calculated from the station to the third point. Point name: name of the point to create. During the elaboration, the tool draws geometric elements that allow to understand how the point position is determined; at the following redraw the elements are removed automatically from the drawing. Note. When the tool asks to enter a point it is possible to act in one of the following ways: Indicate with the mouse the point needed; answer the prompt by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will look for the point entered inside the file and if it finds the point, the tool will go on with the next question. give point X,Y coordinates.

Resection 2 points
This command allows to calculate the coordinates of a station by using the angular reading and the distance from the datum point and the angular reading from a second datum point. The command can be activated by one of the following methods: Menu Survey > COGO > Resection 2 points Command line: CGRESECT2P

On command line the following questions appear: Enter first point: indicate the first datum point.. Enter first measured angle: specify the angular reading carried out from the station to the first point. Enter first distance: specify the distance measured between the station and the first point. Enter second point: indicate second datum point. Enter second measured angle: specify the angular reading carried out from the station to the second point. Point name: name of the point to create. During the elaboration, the tool draws geometric elements that allow to understand how the point position is determined; at the following redraw the elements are removed automatically from the drawing. Note. When the tool asks to enter a point it is possible to act in one of the following ways: Indicate with the mouse the point needed;

190

Topko

answer the prompt by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will look for the point entered inside the file and if it finds the point, the tool will go on with the next question. give point X,Y coordinates.

Angle and distance

This command creates a new point by polar coordinates (angle and distance). The command can be activated through one of the following modes: Menu Survey > COGO > Angle and distance Command line: CGANGDIST

On command line the following questions appear: Enter first point: indicate the first datum point. Enter angle (Azimuth): specify the angular value. Enter distance: specify the distance. Point name: name of the point to create. During the elaboration, the tool draws geometric elements that allow to understand how the point position is determined; at the following redraw the elements are removed automatically from the drawing. Note. When the tool asks to enter a point it is possible to act in one of the following ways: Indicate with the mouse the point needed; answer the prompt by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will look for the point entered inside the file and if it finds the point, the tool will go on with the next question. give point X,Y coordinates.

Creation of survey building points

This command allows a rapid input of survey points on building corners or, in general, on sides orthogonal between themselves. Each time you input a point you have to indicate the direction (Forward, Back, Right, Left) and the distance where you want it to be positioned. The command can be activated through one of the following three methods : Toolbar Cadastral: Menu Survey > COGO > Building/Walk Command line: BUILDING

The tool perfoms the following requests: Enter first alignment point: indicate the first alignment point which defines the starting-direction Enter second alignment point: indicate the second alignment point which defines the startingdirection Direction Forward/Back/Right/Left: indicate the direction to be taken. (F - it goes on the same direction of the current alignment; B - it goes back on the same direction of the current alignment; R - The point is positioned on the right side of the current alignment; L - The point is positioned on the left side of the current alignment); Distance: indicate the distance along the direction. Point name: point data to be input... 191

Topko

Note. Requests following point position are made according to what is indicated in Points tab in Project properties window.

Fit curve
Given three points and the radius, this command creates the two tangent points of the curve and the center point of the curve that can be inserted between two segments obtained from the joining of the given three points. The command can be activated by one of the following methods: Toolbar COGO Menu Survey > COGO > Fit curve Command line: CGFITCURV

On command line the following questions appear: Enter first point: indicate the first point. Enter the curve vertex: indicate the curve vertex point. Enter second point: indicate the second point. Enter radius: specify the radius of the curve to indicate on the two segments. Point name: name of the point to create on the first tangent point. Point name: name of the point to create on the second tangent point. Point name: name of the point to create on the curve center. During the elaboration, the tool draws geometric elements that allow to understand how the point position is determined; at the following redraw the elements are removed automatically from the drawing. Note. When the tool asks to enter a point it is possible to act in one of the following ways: Indicate with the mouse the point needed; answer the prompt by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will look for the point entered inside the file and if it finds the point, the tool will go on with the next question. give point X,Y coordinates.

Tangent two circles

Given two circles, there are four straight lines tangent to both of them; this command allows to create two points on the tangent points of one of the four tangent straight lines. The command can be activated through one of the following methods: Menu Survey > COGO > Tangent Command line: CGTAN

On command line the following questions appear: Enter first point: indicate the first-circle center. Enter the first radius: specify the first-circle radius. Enter second point: indicate second-circle center. Enter the second radius: specify the second-circle radius. Select the insertion side of the first point: specify the side where to insert the first tangent point. Select the insertion side of the second point: specify the side where to insert the second tangent point. 192

Topko

Point name: name of the point to create on the first tangent point. Point name: name of the point to create on the second tangent point. During the elaboration, the tool draws geometric elements that allow to understand how the point position is determined; at the following redraw the elements are removed automatically from the drawing. Note. When the tool asks to enter a point it is possible to act in one of the following ways: Indicate with the mouse the point needed; answer the prompt by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will look for the point entered inside the file and if it finds the point, the tool will go on with the next question. give point X,Y coordinates.

Create topographic points by slopes

It is possible to calculate a new topographic point according to slope. The command can be activated as follows: Menu Rilievo > COGO > Points by slopes Command line: CGINTP

The possible options are the following:

Slope intersection
Given two 3D points it is possible to calculate a new point by defining the slope from the first point and the slope from the second point.. In the CAD command line the following requests will appear:

Enter first point. Indicate first point; Slope from start point: Slope (h-b). Enter slope (h/b) <1>. Enter a slope value; Slope %. Enter slope % <100>. Enter a % slope value; Enter second point. Indicate second point; Slope from second point: Slope (h-b). Enter slope (h/b) <1>. Enter h/b slope value; Slope %. Enter slope % <100>. Enter a % slope value;

Point name. Set a name to the point to create.

Slope and distance

Given a 3D point it is possible to calculate a new point by defining its slope and distance from a reference point. In the CAD command line the following requests will appear:

Enter first point. Enter first point; Enter angle (Azimuth) <0>. Enter the value of the horizontal angle compared to the north of the first point; Enter distance <0>. Enter the distance between first and second point; 193

Topko

Slope from start point: Slope (h-b). Enter slope (h/b) <1>. Enter h/b slope value; Slope %. Enter slope % <100>. Enter% slope value; Number of intermediate points <0>. Enter the number of intermediate points to insert between the first and the second point; Point name. Set a name to the point to be created.

Slope and end elevation

Given a 3D point it is possible to calculate a new point by defining slope and final elevation. In the CAD command line the following requests will appear:

Enter first point. Enter first point in the graphic window or insert coordinates; Enter angle (Azimuth) <0>. Enter horizontal angle value (azimuth) compared to the north of the first point; end point elevation <0>. Slope from start point Slope (h-b). Enter slope (h/b)<1>. Enter h/b slope value; Slope %. Enter slope % <100>. Enter % slope value; Number of intermediate points <0>. Enter number of intermediate points to insert between first and second point; Point name. Set a name to the point to be created.

Survey polylines
Survey polylines are special polylines to which it is possible to associate a code among the ones set in the table of Survey codes. Survey polylines are useful in profile and sections to obtain data by using not all survey points but only the ones crossed by survey polylines; in this case the polylines not only define the points to be used but also the order according to which they must be used. A typical case where survey polylines are very important is the survey of tunnels. In fact, in such a situation we have a set of points to obtain the sections from, but the order according to which they must be used to generate the section line becomes essential to represent the model of the tunnel in case it shows some recesses. Generating a survey polyline which can join, already in the planimetry, the points in the exact order allows to obtain the result desired on generating the sections. For profiles too, the opportunity to use survey polylines is a great advantage in certain circumstances. Consider, for example, an axis in which it is necessary to display only some survey points: the tool creates a survey polyline merging all those points and then projects the polyline on the profile.

Enter survey polylines

The command can be started as follows: Menu Survey > Insert survey polyline Command line: SURVPLINE

The following queries will appear on command line: Polyline code: entry one of the codes available in Survey codes table. Survey codes; ENTER button activates Survey codes window: 194

Topko

Start point: insert the polyline by the mode used for normal polylines. To create vertexes on survey points use snap to object. To create vertexes on survey points use snap to node. The code assigned to the polyline is used also to assign to a layer. The polyline will be automatically inserted in the layer the code assigns to drawing lines. A subproject survey polylines can be made visible or invisible by the drawing filters available in Survey properties window.

Drawing from codes

Survey polylines can be obtained automatically by Drawing from codes command. Remember that the command allows to generate lines, polylines, break lines merging survey points simply by using survey codes.

Profile extraction
Survey polylines can be used to obtain the profile of an axis. Polyline vertexes are projected on the axis so as to determine a station; the vertex elevation will be the elevation used for representation in the longitudinal profile. The command can be started as follows: Menu Profile > Extraction of profile Command line: PRO2PRO

195

Topko

The following window will appear:

To use survey polylines select Planimetry page and then the option From survey polyline; then, select the code to use in the process and the width of the band to use in the projection.

Calculation of section elevation

Survey polylines can be used in cross sections to obtain transversal elements from survey points. The peculiarity consists in the fact that the points will be displayed in the same order according to which they have been linked by the survey polyline. The command can be started as follows: Menu Sections > Calculation of section elevation Command line: DTM2SEC

196

Topko

The following window will appear:

To use survey polylines select the option Survey band and then Survey polylines; set the width of the survey band to use and the code of the polyline to use in the process. The vertexes of the survey polyline having the code requested, situated within the band requested, will be used in representing the transversal element.

3D Model/Drawing from parametric objects

By this command it is possible to generate a 3D drawing/model made of polylines, by inserting, along a reference polyline, parametric 3D objects such as sideslopes, ditches, walls, sidewalks. This means that it is possible, for example, to survey a sidewalk edge and measure its width on main points and then rebuild this situation simply by merging edge points by a polyline and applying on it the object "sidewalk" by setting the widths measured; the tool will rebuild the sidewalk in 3D, generating the sidewalk upper edge line and the external edge line. The same concept can be applied to other elements such as ditches, walls, sideslopes. In this way, it is possible to produce a very detailed final drawing in a very short time. Any object possesses different parameters regulating its size and can be inserted by using different insertion points: in case of a sidewalk, it is possible to use as insertion point either the edge towards the road or the external edge. The object can be inserted with the same parameters from the beginning to the end of the polyline, but it is also possible to specify start and end size, leaving the tool the task of performing the interpolation; speaking about the sidewalk again, it is possible to set different widths for the beginning and the end of the polyline, but it is also possible to set intermediate widths: the tool will build the drawing taking into account the values set by performing an interpolation along the polyline.

197

Topko

Enter object on complete polyline

The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar Survey Menu Survey > 3D drawing by object > On polyline Command line: PL3DOBJ C

On the CAD command line the following prompt will appear: Select reference polylines: select the polylines on which to apply the object.

A window resembling the following will appear:

The objects available are the following: Offset 3D: creates a surface by applying a 3D offset to the polyline. It is possible to specify offset on distances and elevations. Ditch by widths: creates a ditch by setting bottom width and top width. Ditch by slopes: creates a ditch by setting the slopes of the two sideslopes. Curb/Sidewalk: creates a curb or sidewalk type object. It is possible to set a height and a width from reference polyline. Wall (simple): creates a wall by setting the wall internal and external height, as well as the top width. Sideslope on right: creates a sideslope on the right of the polyline, as long as it meets a reference model. Requires Topko I. Sideslope on left: creates a sideslope on the left of the polyline, as long as it meets a reference model. Requires Topko I. Sideslope with berms on right: creates a sideslope with berms on the right of the polyline, as long as it meets a reference model. Requires Topko I. 198

Topko

Sideslope with berms on left: creates a sideslope with berms on the left of the polyline, as long as it meets a reference model. Requires Topko I. Pipe (Circular): creates a 3D circular pipe along the reference polyline. Requires Topko I. Pipe (Rectangular): creates a 3D circular pipe along the reference polyline. Requires Topko I

Object
Select from list the kind of object desired. After selecting the object it will be possible to choose the insertion point to use to insert the object. Insertion point will be the point along the polyline chosen as reference. In the table on the right it is possible to set the parameters regulating the drawing of the object selected.

Lines

Create drawing/lines model: activate this option to generate the object 3D polylines. Drawing type - Polylines or Constraints / Break lines: the tool can generate polylines or break lines to use to create a triangle model. To generate break lines it is necessary to possess Topko M module. Use reference polyline properties: by this option it is possible to generate new elements while keeping the origin polyline properties (color, layer). If this option is not active, it is possible to set another layer and color to the new elements. Create sideslope hatch drawing: by activating this option, sideslope hatches are drawn if there are some surfaces slopes between minimum and maximum slope. The button Settings allows to define sideslope hatches drawing parameters.

199

Topko

Model

Generates mathematical model: this option allows the generation of triangles on calculated surfaces.

Reference terrain model: for sideslope objects it is necessary to set the triangle model on which they must interrupt. Terrain band to calculate: terrain band to extract to calculate sideslope intersection on reference model. Maximum step for model creation: maximum distance of objects insertion along the polyline. To improve the quality of the final result it is possible to reduce this value. Check model intersections: by this option it is possible to solve the intersections that may be determined between the surfaces created. The option is active when the option Create drawing/lines model is not active. Triangles layer: layer to assign the triangles created to. Triangles color: color to assign to the triangles generated. Press OK to start the process.

Insert an object on polyline by intervals

The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar Survey Menu Survey > 3D drawing by object > On polyline by intervals Command line: PL3DOBJ I

On the CAD command line the following prompt will appear: Select reference polyline: select the polyline on which to apply the object. Enter start point along the polyline: indicate a point, along the polyline, to start applying the object from. 200

Topko

A window resembling the following will appear:

Set the object and the parameters it will assume on the point indicated. Press OK. On the command line the following prompt will appear: Enter end point along the polyline: indicate a point along the polyline, on which to stop applying the object.

The same window will appear again, on which it is possible to set the parameters the object assumes on the point just indicated. Press OK. The tool will start inserting the object along the polyline, by interpolating the parameters inserted from start values to end values. The process continues by asking a new end point and new parameters. To stop it, annul the prompt by ESC button.

Cadastral parcels
Parcels, in a work, are defined through this kind of management. The definition of these data is very important since they are going to complete: drawings : parcels are drawn, together with the color and line type chosen, on graphic CAD according to the Cadastral policy ;

As for entities, the tool offers a management from table and a management directly from graphic CAD.

Management of parcels from graphic CAD

Survey parcels can be created by manual digitalization of single points or by automatic location of boundary according to surrounding elements.

201

Topko

Insert a parcel from points

The insert-parcel command can be activated through one of the following modes: Toolbar Cadastral Menu Cadaster > Parcel > Create parcel > Parcel by point Command line: PARCEL

Create parcel by Points / by Boundary / <P>: P answer P to create parcel by points. Parcel description: First point: indicate parcel first vertex. Create parcel New vertex/ cancel Last vertex/Close answer N to insert a new vertex in the parcel. answer L to annul the last vertex inserted answer C to close the parcel on start point.

At the same time, the following window appears. Through this window, it is possible to choose the color and the linetype of the parcel segments while you are drawing the parcel itself:

During the drawing activate the colour and linetype desired for each segment forming the parcel. Once the digitizing has been carried out, a window will be displayed for the insertion of parcel data.

202

Topko

When parcel description is entered and color and linetype have been defined, the tool asks to indicate the parcel vertexes. In order to end the procedure press twice the right button of the mouse or press twice ENTER. Note. When the tool asks to specify the point it is necessary to operate according to one of the following methods: Indicate by the mouse the point needed; answer the question digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will search the indicated point inside the file and, if it finds this point, it will go on to the next question.

Insert parcel by boundary

Parcel insertion command is activated as follows: Toolbar Cadastral Menu Cadaster > Parcels > Create parcels > Parcel by boundary Command line: PARCEL

On command line the following prompts will appear: Create parcel by Points / by Boundary / <P>: B answer B to create the parcel by boundary. Enter internal point: indicate a point inside the parcel to create. The tool will analyse the elements displayed around the point and, if possible, it will obtain automatically the parcel boundary.

How to erase a parcel

A parcel can be erased directly from graphic CAD window using ERASE command, usually used to erase any kind of entities.

How to modify a parcel

To modify a parcel from the graphic window use Modify property command. The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar Objects Menu Edit > Modify object Command line: DDMODIFY

203

Topko

By selecting a parcel, the following window will appear:

Vertexes

In this page it is possible to modify parcel vertexes.

204

Topko

Parcel
This page displays the parcel features.

Parcel display styles

The drawing of parcels inside a graphic window can be integrated with other data, such as parcel name, owner, area, etc. All the settings concerning labels, data to display, number of decimals and possible prefixes in parcel labels can be defined by applying a different parcel style. It is possible to choose the style to be applied by Styles page in survey data setting window, which can be activated as follows: Toolbar: Survey Menu Survey > Survey Properties Command line: DDDATGEN

205

Topko

Select Styles; the following window will appear:

206

Topko

In Parcels , activate the style to be used by Stylesbutton; the following window will appear:

The table allows to customize the following properties of the style selected: Labels. Text style. Choose a text style from the list; Text size. Set text height in mm; Text color. Choose colour to set to the text; Data. Choose among various options the data which will be displayed; Decimals. Area. Set number of decimals of area value; Labels prefix. Allows to set a prefix to add to labels for each datum displayed.

Style table toolbar

Styles: Select a style from the list; New style. Allows to create a new style; Copy style. Copies an existing style; the following window will appear, where it is possible to define the name of the style to be created:

207

Topko

Remove style. Deletes a style; Import style. Allows to import a style from an external path; Export style. Allows to save the style in an external path, so that it is possible to activate it in other works; Help. Activates the topic of the corresponding guide.

Creating a table reporting parcel data

The drawing of a cadastral survey can be integrated with the insertion of tables reporting the data of each parcel; it is possible to report the coordinates, elevation included, of each point that constitutes the parcel, its area and its perimeter. The command can be activated as follows: Menu Cadastre > Parcels > Draw parcel table Command line: INSTBPARC

The following dialog box will appear:

Data to report: in this group it is possible to decide which data to report in the table to obtain. The tool provides also for the display of the length of each segment constituting the parcel perimeter by choosing Distance option.

208

Topko

Parcel to report: it is possible to obtain the drawing of the tables of all the parcels or select the parcels for which to obtain the drawing. Number of columns field allows to decide how the tables must be paged up in the drawing. Settings: finally, it is possible to set the text style to use and the characters size. Press OK to confirm the settings. On the command line the following prompts will appear: Select parcel: indicate the parcels for which to generate the table. Table insertion point: specify the point where to position table drawing.

Management of parcels from table

Parcels table is activated as follows: Menu Cadaster > Parcels > Parcels table Command line: TBPARCEL

The upper side lists the parcels available in the file. Parcels are grouped by Survey, Map, Updated map. It is possible to pass from a group to another by selecting the corresponding page situated in the lower part of the table. The lower part of the window displays the data and the vertexes of the parcel selected. C/L column is available both in parcel and in vertexes table. The C/ L column available in parcels table allows to define the colour and the line type with which to draw all the segments linking the parcel vertexes (except when these have been redefined in vertexes table); complying with cadastral rules, the tool proposes the following options, which take into consideration all the possible cases: NC - Continuous-Black 209

Topko

NT - Dashed-Black NP - Dot-Black RC - Continuous-Red RT - Dashed-Red RP - Dot-Red VC - Continuous-Green VT - Dashed-Green VP Dot-Green In vertexes table C/L column has the same meaning explained above, but in this case the datum is referred only to the segment from vertex and the following vertex.

Input of a parcel
In order to input a parcel it is necessary to start by entering, in the right table, its description, and if necessary the symbol representing color and line type; then shift on the left table by mouse or TAB button. In the left part of the table, you insert the names of the points representing the vertexes of the parcels; if necessary, select the symbol representing the color and the line type of the line connecting the selected vertex to the next. By pressing TAB button you go back to the left table.

How to erase a parcel

In order to erase a parcel it is sufficient to erase a row in the left table.

Creating particulars for cadastral parcels

To include in the drawing of a cadastral work also the particulars of the parcels drawn with a different scale you just have to select the item Per includere nel disegno di un lavoro catastale anche i particolari delle particelle disegnati con scala diversa sufficiente selezionare la voce di menu Create particular from Cadastre menu or select PARTICULAR command. Toolbar Cadastral Menu Cadaster > Create particular Command line: PARTICULA

By this procedure three different kinds of particular can be created: :

particular drawing with points : the parcel is drawn in the new scale with the indication of the points names on the vertexes; particular drawing with sights : the parcel is drawn in the new scale with the dimensions reported on the parcel sides; particular drawing with chains and offsets: the parcel is drawn in the new scale with the indication of the chains and offsets and of the names of the points that form the chain;

The prompts are the following: Select the parcels whose particular is requested : Particular scale <500> : Particular drawing with points|Yes/No/<Y> : Indicate the position of particular with points : Point text size : Particular drawing with sights|Yes/No<Y> : Indicate the position of particular with sights : Sight text size: Particular drawing with chains and offsets|Yes/No<Y> : 210

Topko

Indicate the position of particular with chains and offsets: Chain and offset text size: You can select different parcels, obtaining in this way the particular including all the parcels. PARTICULAR command

Printing of parcels
To set the printing of parcels, operate as follows: Menu File > Print Command line: PRINT

The following window will appear:

In the dialog box select Parcels and choose the kind of report to be obtained.

Subdivisions
By subdivisions it is possible to calculate, automatically or manually, the subdivision line of a closed parcel in order to subdivide an area previously determined. The tool offers also the possibility to insert survey points on the intersections between the subdivision line and the parcel; The two new parcels resulting from the subdivision and the Red-Continuous line of the new subdivision line between subdivision points are created automatically; besides, you have to indicate the data concerning the parcel subdivided, so that the tool can compile automatically the subdivision model for the database taxpayer for expropriations.

211

Topko

The subdivision line can be created through the following methods: subdivision subdivision subdivision subdivision line line line line parallel to two points or to a fixed angle perpendicular to two points or to a fixed angle through two points through one point

For all methods the subdivision line can be elaborated as follows: Automatic mode: the tool asks to specify the area to subdivide and then it calculates the subdivision line position; Manual mode: through a stay on top window it is possible to shift the subdivision line inside the parcel observing area variation and till the needed situation is found. Moreover, there is a command for cutting the time needed for the management of expropriation procedure. See Expropriation.

Subdivision line parallel to two points or to a fixed angle

The command can be activated by one of the following modes: Cadaster Toolbar Menu Cadaster > Subdivisions > Parallel line by two points Command line: SUBDIV

The parallel subdivision line can be defined by two modes:

Subdivision line parallel to two points:

Command: SUBDIV Subdivision line Parallel/peRpendicular/through 1Point/through 2Points/<P>: P Subdivision line parallel to 2Points/to a line with fixed Angle/<2P>: 2P Elaboration mode Automatic/Manual/<A>: A Select parcel to subdivide: select parcel on which the subdivision has to be performed Enter first point of subdivision line: specify the first point to which the subdivision line has to be parallel. Enter second point of subdivision line: specify the second point to which the subdivision line has to be parallel. Subdivision line by Area to subdivide/Point/Equal areas/<A>: A Parcel area: XXXXXX.XXX Parcel perimeter: XXXXXX.XXX Area to subdivide: specify the area to be subdivided Select the side of area to subdivide: specify the side to be subdivided Insert intersection points Yes/No/<Y>: Y The tool asks you to enter the two points to which the subdivision line has to be parallel and the parcel to which the subdivision line itself has to be applied. The tool indicates the area of the selected parcel and then asks the value of the area to subdivide. According to these data, the tool calculates the subdivision line; then asks if the points, resulting from the intersection between the parcel and the subdivision line, have to be inserted in the survey.

Subdivision line parallel to a fixed Angle:

Command : SUBDIV Subdivision line Parallel/peRpendicular/through 1Point/through 2Points/<P>: P Subdivision line parallel to 2Points/to a line with fixed Angle/<2P>: A Elaboration mode Automatic/Manual/<A>: A Select parcel to subdivide: select parcel on which the subdivision has to be performed Enter first point of subdivision line: specify the first point to which the subdivision line has to be parallel. Angle of subdivision line: Specify subdivision line angle. Subdivision line by Area to subdivide/Point/Equal areas/<A>: Parcel Area: XXXXXX.XXX Parcel Perimeter: XXXXXX.XXX Area to subdivide: specify the area to be subdivided 212

Topko

Select the side of area to subdivide: specify the side to be subdivided Insert intersection points Yes/No/<Y>: Y In the latter case, the tool asks to specify a point and the Azimuth to create the line to which the subdivision line will be parallel.

Special cases:
If the subdivision line has to pass through a specific point it is possible to answer P to question Subdivision line by...; in this case the tool asks you to indicate the point instead of the area to subdivide. If you want to divide the parcel into equal parts, it is necessary to answer E to question Subdivision line by...; then the tool asks you to specify the number of equal parts into which the parcel has to be divided. The tool calculates automatically the position of subdivision lines so as to divide the parcel into the number of areas required.

Subdivision line perpendicular to two points or to a fixed angle

This command can be activated through one of the following modes: Cadaster Toolbar Menu Cadaster > Subdivisions > Perpendicular line by two points Command line: SUBDIV

Perpendicular line can be defined by two methods:

Subdivision line perpendicular to two points:

Command : SUBDIV Subdivision line Parallel/peRpendicular/through 1Point/through 2Points/<P>: R Subdivision line perpendicular to 2Points/to a line with fixed Angle/<2P>: 2P Elaboration mode Automatic/Manual/<A>: A Select parcel to subdivide: select the parcel on which the subdivision has to be performed Enter first point of subdivision line: specify the first point to which the subdivision line has to be perpendicular Enter second point of subdivision line: specify the second point to which the subdivision line has to be perpendicular Subdivision line by Area to subdivide/Point/Equal area/<A>: A Parcel area: XXXXXX.XXX Parcel perimeter: XXXXXX.XXX Area to subdivide: specify the area to be subdivided Select the side of area to subdivide: Specify the side to be subdivided Insert intersection points Yes/No/<Y>: Y The tool asks you to specify the two points to which the subdivision line has to be perpendicular and the parcel to which the subdivision line itself has to be applied. The tool indicates the area of the selected parcel and asks the area to subdivide. According to these data, the tool calculates the subdivision line; then asks if the points, resulting from the intersection between the parcel and the subdivision line, have to be inserted in the survey.

Subdivision line perpendicular to a fixed angle:

Command : SUBDIV Subdivision line Parallel/peRpendicular/through 1Point/through 2Points/<P>: R Subdivision line perpendicular to 2Points/to a line with fixed Angle/<2P>: A Elaboration mode Automatic/Manual/<A>: A Select parcel to subdivide: select the parcel on which the subdivision has to be performed Enter first point of subdivision line: specify the first point to which the subdivision line has to be perpendicular Angle of subdivision line: set the subdivision line angle Subdivision line by Area to subdivide/Point/Equal area/<A>: 213

Topko

Parcel area: XXXXXX.XXX Parcel perimeter: XXXXXX.XXX Area to subdivide: Specify the area to be subdivided Select the side of area to subdivide: specify the side to be subdivided Insert intersection points Yes/No/<Y>: In this case, compared to the previous one, the tool asks you to specify a point and the Azimuth to create the line to which the subdivision line will be perpendicular.

Special cases:
If the subdivision line has to pass through a specific point it is possible to answer P to question Subdivision line by...; in this case the tool asks you to indicate the point instead of the area to subdivide. If you want to divide the parcel into equal parts, it is necessary to answer E to question Subdivision line by...; then the tool asks you to specify the number of equal parts into which the parcel has to be divided. The tool calculates automatically the position of subdivision lines so as to divide the parcel into the number of areas required.

Subdivision line through two points

The command can be activated as follows: Cadaster Toolbar Menu Cadaster > Subdivisions > Line through two points Command line: SUBDIV Command : SUBDIV Subdivision line Parallel/peRpendicular/through 1Point/through 2Points/<P>: 2P Select parcel to subdivide: select the parcel on which the subdivision has to be performed Enter first point of subdivision line: Enter second point of subdivision line: Insert intersection points Yes/No/<Y>: This type of subdivision can be used only if you already know the two points through which the subdivision line passes and, for example, you want to define other intersections between subdivision line and parcel.

Subdivision line through one point

This command can be activated by one of the following methods: Cadaster Toolbar Menu Cadaster > Subdivisions > Line through one point Command line: SUBDIV Command : SUBDIV Subdivision line Parallel/peRpendicular/through 1Point/through 2Points/<P>: 1P Select parcel to subdivide: Enter first point of subdivision line: Enter second point of subdivision line: Select the side of subdivision area: specify the side to be subdivide Insert intersection points Yes/No/<Y>: In this case, the tool asks to specify a point through which the subdivision line passes and a second point that defines its starting direction; then, through the manual elaboration the subdivision line is rotated on the first point entered; in this way, the area on the parcel is defined.

214

Topko

Manual elaboration
Through a stay on top window, the manual eleboration allows to controle the shifting of the subdivision line, previously defined, on the parcel; after each shifting, it is possible to observe the new area calculated by the tool. The controle window is the following:

Through buttons Up and Down it is possible to controle the forward and the backward shifting of the subdivision line, whose forward step can be defined by Step edit box. Mouse-clicking on OK button you confirm the subdivision line position, thus continuing with the input of the points; Cancel button stops the operation without performing any change.

Expropriation
By this command it is possible to reduce the time needed to manage expropriation procedures, since it divides the parcels automatically, according to one or more polylines representing the limits of the expropriation. The command can be activated as follows: Menu Cadaster > Expropriation Command line: EXPROPRIATION

On the command line the following prompts will appear: Select subdivision line [1]: indicate the first polyline representing the subdivision line on the parcels. Number of the first point of the subdivision line [1]: since the subdivision line will be transformed into a parcel, the tool inserts automatically some points on the vertexes of the polyline; for this reason it needs to know the number to assign to the first point of the subdivision line. Select subdivision line [2]: besides the first, it is possible to indicate other subdivision lines... Select polyline/parcel to subdivide: indicate the parcel or the polyline representing the parcel to expropriate. Select the subdivided parcel: indicate the expropriation area, compared to the position of the subdivision lines. Then the tool prompts for specifying the next parcel to elaborate: Select polyline/parcel to subdivide: ... Once the command has been executed, the subdivision lines will be transformed into parcels.

215

Topko

Topographic calculation
Problem of Hansen Simple
In order to activate the solution of Problem of Hansen simple, select Topographic calculations item from Survey menu or give SUTILITY command. Menu Survey > Topographic calculations Command line: SUTILITY

The following dialog box will appear:

Required data are : Cartesian coordinates of point A; if this point is in the table of coordinates, it is possible to return automatically its coordinates by indicating A name in edit box A; Cartesian coordinates of point B; if this point is in the table of coordinates it is possible to return automatically its coordinates by indicating B name in edit box B; APQ, PQA, BPQ and PQB angles expressed in centesimal degrees; if P and Q stations are in the fieldbook of measures and perform readings on A and B, it is sufficient to indicate the name of the stations in P and Q edit boxes, so that the tool calculates automatically the angles required. Clicking on Calculate, the tool displays, on the right side of the dialog box, the coordinates calculated for P and Q; the two buttons below the coordinates allow to move calculated data respectively into the topographic coordinates table and into the Datum points table.

Solution of triangle problems

In order to activate solution of triangles, select Topographic Calculations item from Survey menu or give SUTILITY command. Menu Survey > Topographic calculations Command line: SUTILITY

216

Topko

The following dialog box appears, where you have to select Solution of triangle problems tab.

Through this procedure, it is possible to calculate the elements of a triangle provided one of the following cases is given:

the triangle three sides two sides and the angle between them

two angles and the side between them Six data are needed, but it is sufficient to indicate three of them if above mentioned conditions are granted; unknown data can be omitted by erasing field content. Calculate button starts the calculation, whose sides and angles results are displayed on the left of the dialog box, while perimeter and area are displayed on the right.

Transformation by control points

By this command it is possible to perform a transformation of coordinates, specifying the point data that must be kept fixed and the corresponding points in the survey. Coordinate transformation can be applied not only to the topographic coordinates of a survey but also to all the other entities forming a subproject: axes, drawings, etc. The weight assigned to the different reference points can be determined automatically by the tool, taking into account the distance of the points from the survey barycentre and the reliability of the points. The command is activated as follows: Menu Survey > Coordinate transformations > By Control Points Command line: COORDTRANSF

217

Topko

Control points
The following window will appear, in which it is necessary to specify the couples of coordinates to be used to perform the rototranslation. The following window appears:

+/-. Specifies if data present in this row have to be used to calculate transformation parameters. Datum point. Name of the reference point (Datum point); if the name of the point input is available in the datum points table , the corresponding coordinates are loaded into the following fields. Datum E. E Coordinates of the reference point (datum point). Datum N. N Coordinates of the reference point (datum point). Datum Elevation. Reference point (datum point) elevation. Survey point. Name of the corresponding survey point; if the name of the point input is available in the Coordinates table, the corresponding coordinates are loaded into the following fields . Survey E. E Coordinates of the survey point. Survey N. N Coordinates of the survey point. Survey Elevation. Survey point elevation. Weight. Numeric value identifying the reliability of the point coordinates. The specified value represents the degree of multiplicity of the points itself compared to the point representing the unitary weight (i.e. to assign a point weight 3 means to input the point itself 3 times with weight 1). Weights calculation. This button opens the following dialog box:

218

Topko

In this window the tool proposes the coordinates of the survey barycentre, to use to calculate the points weights; as you can see from the formulas reported on the left, the weight is inversely proportional to the distance between the point and the survey barycentre and it is directly proportional to the reliability of the point. By pressing Calculate button the tool calculates the weight of each point.

Press Calculate to pass to the next window from which it is possible to choose the kind of transformation and verify the deviations.

Calculations and results

Transformation. By this list box it is possible to chose the kind of transformation to apply: Conformal. It performs one X translation, one Y translation, one rotation and one scale variation; at least two points are needed; it does not modify elevations. Unscaled. It performs one X translation, one Y translation, one rotation but it does not perform scale variation; at least two points are needed; it does not modify elevations. Primo punto fisso. Questa opzione si attiva solo nel caso si esegua una trasformazione Rigida utilizzando due punti. Serve per fare una rototraslazione del rilievo utilizzando il primo punto come riferimento (fisso) e il secondo solo come orientamento. Affine. It performs one X translation, one Y translation, one X scale variation, one Y scale variation and one rotation; at least three points are needed; it does not modify elevations. Homographic. Transformation by homography mode requires at least four points and it does not modify elevations. Polynomial. It is used when Affine transformation is not sufficient. It is obtained from the Affine transformation through the linear combination of higher order coefficients. At least six points are needed; it does not modify elevations. Helmert 3D. The tool extracts 7 coefficients of transformation: X, Y, Z translation, X, Y, Z rotation and scale variation. Three points are needed and elevations are modified. 3D Conformal. 7 coefficients transformation which requires 4 points. 3D transformation: by this option it is possible to perform a correction of the points elevations; the correction of the elevation is calculated according to datum and survey point elevations. In this way it is possible to apply to the coordinates not only bidimensional but also tridimensional transformations. Results page reports the following data: +/-. Indicates whether to use the data in the line for the calculation of transformation parameters. Survey point. Name of survey point. Survey E. Coordinate E of survey point. 219

Topko

Survey N. Coordinate N of survey point. Elevation survey. Survey point elevation. Deviation DE. Difference in E between point transformed and datum point. Deviation DN. Difference in N between point transformed and datum point. Deviation DZ.Difference in Z between point transformed and datum point.

Transformation coefficients page reports the transformation coefficients calculated, which can vary according to the transformation mode chosen. Press Print button to obtain the report of the results of the transformation and calculation parameters. Press Transformation to arrive to the last window from which it is possible to select the subprojects to which to apply the transformation.

Subprojects to transform

This page reports all the survey, axis, drawing subprojects contained in the file; for each of them it is possible to decide whether to apply the transformation to the graphic entities they contain. In this way the transformation does not concern only the survey points but also the drawings, the axes, etc.

Press Transformation button to start transforming the data.

220

Topko

Transfomation between coordinate systems

The transformation of coordinates between systems allows to transform single points, GPS points or coordinate tables as well as entire drawings from any origin system to any final system. In particular, it is possible to perform transformations:

from map coordinates to map coordinates; from geodetic coordinates to map coordinates and vice versa; from geodetic coordinates to geodetic coordinates.

The transformations can use either the classical coordinate systems or IGM grids; the tool identifies automatically the grid to use for any single point to transform. The elevation transformation can be obtained using either predefined geoid models or the geoid model available in IGM grids. The transformation can be performed by Topko with survey calculation procedure. The command can be activated as follows: Menu Survey > Coordinate transformations > Between coordinate systems Command line: COORDTRANSFSYS

The following window will appear:

221

Topko

From Geodetic to Map (simple) and vice versa

This transformation allows to pass from geodetic coordinates to map coordinates and vice versa, inside the same coordinate system set; so, no ellipsoid change occurs. The process is activated as follows: Menu Survey > Coordinate transformations > Between coordinate systems Command line: COORDTRANSFSYS

Choose Geodetic <--> Map; the following window will appear:

The tool allows to customize the following information: Choose the kind of transformation to be performed among the ones in the list: Trasformation simple(on same system). This transformation allows to pass from geodetic coordinates to map coordinates and vice versa, inside the coordinate system set; therefore, no ellipsoid change occurs.

Info geoids The button activates a window displaying information about the reference geoid.

222

Topko

Transorm elevation If this option is active, the tool transforms also the elevations according to the option set in Vertical datum input field.

Coordinate System Control Group - Transformation simple (on same system) In the upper side of coordinate transformation window it is possible to define the coordinate system which, in case of simple transformation, looks as follows:

Geodetic coordinate system. Set the coordinate system inside which to carry out the transformation, specifying: Group, System, Ellipsoid, Datum e Projection; Change. By this command it is possible to define a new coordinate system; Vertical datum: If the option Transform elevations is active, the tool makes it possible to choose a datum to use to calculate elevations; in particular, it is possible to choose whether to keep ellipsoid height by the option Ellipsoid height, or set a geoid model and apply a correction to elevation.

Geodetic data system In the lower side of the window it is possible to set the transformation mode as well as to define origin data and decide where to save the results; two boxes are displayed, one for geodetic coordinates, the other for map coordinates.

By Transform button it is possible to choose the calculation direction desired: from geodetic to map or vice versa. Possible transformations are: From Geodetic to Map: the GPS coordinates in the survey selected can be saved as topographic points or datum points in the same subproject or in any other subproject. From Map to Geodetic: the topographic points or datum points in the survey selected can be saved as GPS coordinates in the same subproject or in any other subproject.

223

Topko

Transform single point This option allows to carry out the transformation for a single point, whose geodetic coordinate or map coordinate values are inserted manually; by deactivating the option it is possible to apply the transformation to the data contained in the subproject selected. Specify the control point geodetic coordinates and map coordinates.

Transform By Transform button it is possible to choose the calculation direction desired: from geodetic to map or vice versa.

From Geodetic to Map (Transformation with change of coordinate system(WGS84)) and vice versa
This transformation allows to pass from geodetic coordinates to map coordinates and vice versa, between different coordinate systems. The process is activated as follows: Menu Survey > Coordinate transformations > Between coordinate systems Command line: COORDTRANSFSYS

Choose Geodetic <--> Map; the following window will appear:

224

Topko

The tool allows to customize the following information:

Transformation mode: Choose the kind of transformation to be performed among the ones in the list: Transformation with change of coordinate system(WGS84). By this transformation it is possible to pass from the geodetic coordinates of a system to the map coordinates of another system; according to the Datum selected, the transformation can be performed by ellipsoid change, passing to ellipsoid WGS84, or by using transformation grids.

Info geoids The button activates a window displaying information about reference geoid.

Transform elevations If this option is active the tool will transform also the elevations according to the option set in Vertical Datum input field.

Coordinate System Control Group - with change of coordinate system(WGS84).

In the upper side of coordinate transformation window it is possible to define the coordinate system which, in case of transformation with change of coordinate system, looks as follows:

Geodetic coordinate system. Set geodetic coordinate system, specifying: Group, System, Ellipsoid, Datum e Projection; Change. By this command it is possible to define a new coordinate system; Vertical datum: If the option Transform elevation is active, the tool allows to choose a datum to use for the calculation of elevations; in particular, it is possible to choose whether to keep the ellipsoid height by the option Ellipsoid height, or set a geoid model and apply a correction to elevation. Similarly, in the right side of the window it is necessary to specify the data concerning the coordinate system as far as the Map: Map coordinate system: Set Map coordinate system, specifying:Group, System, Ellipsoid, Datum e Projection; Change By this command it is possible to define a new coordinate system; Vertical datum: If the option Transform elevation is active, the tool allows to choose a datum to use for the calculation of elevations; in particular, it is possible to choose whether to keep the ellipsoid height by the option Ellipsoid height, or set a geoid model and apply a correction to elevation. 225

Topko

With systems ED50 e ROMA40 adopted in Italy, it is possible to set two kinds of datum: ED50-Italy or ROMA40-Italy: such Datums perform the transformation by passing to ellipsoid WGS84, using the Datum own transformation parameters. ED50-Italy IGM Grid or ROMA40-Italy IGM Grid: such Datums perform the transformation by using the IGM grid files. It is possible to specify the folder containing the grid files Info geoids button; the following window will appear:

The box on the left displays a list of the grids contained in the path specified below; by selecting a grid from the list, the box on the left will display the information concerning it.

Coordinate system data In the lower side of the window it is possible to set the transformation mode as well as to define origin data and decide where to save the results; two boxes are displayed, one for geodetic coordinates, the other for map coordinates.

By Transform button it is possible to choose the calculation direction desired: from geodetic to map or vice versa. Possible transformations are: 226

Topko

From Geodetic to Map: the GPS coordinates in the survey selected can be saved as topographic points or datum points in the same subproject or in any other subproject. From Map to Geodetic: the topographic points or datum points in the survey selected can be saved as GPS coordinates in the same subproject or in any other subproject.

Transform single point This option allows to carry out the transformation for a single point, whose geodetic coordinate or map coordinate values are inserted manually; by deactivating the option it is possible to apply the transformation to the data contained in the subproject selected. Specify the control point geodetic coordinates and map coordinates.

Transform By Transform button it is possible to choose the calculation direction desired: from geodetic to map or vice versa.

From Geodetic to Geodetic

This transformation allows to pass from geodetic coordinates (latitude, longitude) to another geodetic coordinate reference system. The process is activated as follows: : Menu Survey > Coordinate transformations > Between coordinate systems Command line: COORDTRANSFSYS

227

Topko

Choose Geodetic <--> Geodetic; the following window will appear:

The tool allows to customize the following information:

Transformation mode: Choose the kind of transformation to perform among the ones available in the list; possible options are: Transformation with change of coordinate system(WGS84). By this transformation it is possible to pass from the geodetic coordinates of a system to the map coordinates of another system; according to the Datum selected, the transformation can be performed by ellipsoid change, passing to ellipsoid WGS84, or by using transformation grids. Info geoids The button activates a window displaying information about reference geoid.

Transform elevations If this option is active the tool will transform also the elevations according to the option set in Vertical Datum input field. Coordinate system Control group The window is subdivided into two parts, one for the settings concerning the first system reference geodetic coordinate system, the other for the geodetic coordinates of the second system:

228

Topko

Geodetic data system (1). Choose the first reference system, specifying: Group, System, Ellipsoid, Datum and Projection. Change. By this command it is possible to define a new coordinate system; Vertical datum: If the option Transform elevations is active, the tool makes it possible to choose a datum to use to calculate elevations; in particular, it is possible to choose whether to keep ellipsoid height by the option Ellipsoid height, or set a geoid model and apply a correction to elevation. Geodetic data system (2). Choose the second reference system, specifying in particular: Group, System, Ellipsoid, Datum e Projection. Change. By this command it is possible to define a new coordinate system; Vertical datum: If the option Transform elevations is active, the tool makes it possible to choose a datum to use to calculate elevations; in particular, it is possible to choose whether to keep ellipsoid height by the option Ellipsoid height, or set a geoid model and apply a correction to elevation.

With systems ED50 e ROMA40 adopted in Italy, it is possible to set two kinds of datum: ED50-Italy or ROMA40-Italy: such Datums perform the transformation by passing to ellipsoid WGS84, using the Datum own transformation parameters.

ED50-Italy IGM Grid or ROMA40-Italy IGM Grid: such Datums perform the transformation by
using the IGM grid files. It is possible to specify the folder containing the grid files Info geoids button; the following window will appear:

229

Topko

The box on the left displays a list of the grids contained in the path specified below; by selecting a grid from the list, the box on the right will display the information concerning it.

Coordinate system data In the lower side of the window it is possible to set the transformation mode as well as to define origin data and decide where to save the results; two boxes are displayed, on the left the one for the geodetic coordinates of the first system, on the right the one for the geodetic coordinates of the second system.

By Trasform button it is possible to choose the calculation direction desired; from geodetic to map and vice versa.

Transform single point Choose this option to transform a single point; the lower side of the window, which will contain the data of the two reference systems will look like the following:

230

Topko

Specify the geodetic coordinates of the control point in the two systems.

Transform By Transform button it is possible to choose the calculation direction desired: from the first reference system to the second and vice versa.

From Map to Map

This transformation allows to pass from a map coordinate reference system to another map coordinate reference system. The process is activated as follows: Menu Survey > Coordinate transformations > Between coordinate systems Command line: COORDTRANSFSYS

Choose Map <--> Map; the following window will appear:

The tool allows to customize the following information:

Transformation mode: Choose the kind of transformation to perform among the ones available in the list; the possible options are the following: 231

Topko

Transformation with change of coordinate system(WGS84). This transformation allows to pass from the map coordinates of a system to the map coordinates of another system; according to the Datum selected, the transformation can be performed by ellipsoid change, passing to WGS84 ellipsoid, or by using transformation grids. Fixed transformation. By this transformation it is possible to pass from the map coordinates of a system to the map coordinates of another system, according to preset reference systems. Info geoids The button activates a window displaying information about reference geoid.

Transform elevations If this option is active the tool transforms also the elevations according to the options set in Vertical Datum input field.

Transform single point Choose this option to transform a single point; the lower side of the window, containing the data of the two reference systems will become: specify the map coordinates of the control point in the two systems. Transform By Transform button it is possible to choose the calculation direction desired: from the first reference system to the second and vice versa.

Transformation with change of coordinate system

By choosing a transformation with change of coordinate system the window will look as follows:

232

Topko

This transformation allows to pass from the map coordinates of a system to the map coordinates of another system; according to the Datum selected, the transformation can be performed by ellipsoid change, passing to WGS84 ellipsoid, or by using transformation grids. Fixed transformation. By this transformation it is possible to pass from the map coordinates of a system to the map coordinates of another system, according to preset reference systems. Info geoids The button activates a window displaying information about reference geoid.

With systems ED50 e ROMA40 adopted in Italy, it is possible to set two kinds of datum: ED50-Italy or ROMA40-Italy: such Datum perform the transformation by passing to ellipsoid WGS84, using the Datum own transformation parameters. ED50-Italy IGM Grid or ROMA40-Italy IGM Grid: such Datum perform the transformation by using the IGM grid files. It is possible to specify the folder containing the grid files Info geoids button;

233

Topko

the following window will appear:

The box on the left will display a list of the grids contained in the path indicated below; by selecting a grid from the list, the box on the right will display the information concerning it.

Coordinate system (with change of coordinate system) The window is subdivided into two parts, one for the settings concerning the first system reference map coordinate system, the other for the map coordinates of the second system:

The tool asks to specify the following settings concerning the two reference systems: Map data system (1). Choose the first reference system, specifying: Group, System, Ellipsoid, Datum, Projection. Change. By this command it is possible to define a new coordinate system; 234

Topko

Vertical datum: If the option Transform elevation is active, the tool allows to choose a datum to use for the calculation of elevations; in particular, it is possible to choose whether to keep the ellipsoid height by the option Ellipsoid height, or set a geoid model and apply a correction to elevation. Map data system (2). Choose the second reference system, specifying: Group, System, Ellipsoid, Datum, Projection. Change. By this command it is possible to specify a new coordinate system; Vertical datum: If the option Transform elevation is active, the tool allows to choose a datum to use for the calculation of elevations; in particular, it is possible to choose whether to keep the ellipsoid height by the option Ellipsoid height, or set a geoid model and apply a correction to elevation. Coordinate system data (with change of coordinate system) In the lower side of the window it is possible to set the transformation mode as well as to define origin data and decide where to save the results; two boxes are displayed, on the right the one for the first system data, on the left the one for the second system data.

By Transform button it is possible to apply the transformation to the origin data.

Fixed transformation - Cassini Gauss-Boaga

By this transformation it is possible to pass from Gauss-Boaga coordinates to Cassini cadastral system coordinates and vice versa.

235

Topko

By setting Cassini <-> Gauss-Boaga (Italy) as fixed transformation the following window will appear:

The tool requires the definition of the following settings:

Cassini - Gauss-Boaga transformation

The transformation can be performed by setting some parameters; in particular, it is necessary to specify the cadastral system center, possible False North and False East values, zone and ellipsoid orientation. System origin: Choose cadastral system origin by choosing from the list; pressing on List button will activate the cadastral system centre manager and it will be possible to integrate or modify existing data:

236

Topko

By New button it is possible to create a new center; it is necessary to set a name:

Choose the settings concerning the new center to be created:

Press OK to confirm the data inserted. Center data will be displayed automatically. Zone. Choose one of the two zones; Ellipsoid orientation (Cassini-Soldner). Choose ellipsoid orientation; 237

Topko

Coordinate system data (with change of coordinate system)

System data (1). Topographic points table: Indicates that the points found in the coordinate table are used; Datums table:Indicates that the points found in the datum points table are used; Complete project. By choosing this option it is possible to apply a transformation not only to topographic points or datum points but to the whole project data: drawings, axes, etc. Subproject: Choose a subproject from the list or create a new one by New command. System data (2). Topographic points table: Indicates that the points found in the coordinate table are used; Datums table:Indicates that the points found in the datum points table are used; Complete project. By choosing this option it is possible to apply a transformation not only to topographic points or datum points but to the whole project data: drawings, axes, etc. Subproject: Choose a subproject from the list or create a new one by New command.

Fixed transformation - Change origin

By choosing Change origin as fixed transformation the following window will appear:

238

Topko

The tool requires to specify the following information: Change origin. Origin. Indicate reference point East North coordinates; Translation. Specify East North translations to apply to the reference point; Rotation. Specify the rotation to apply to the reference point; Scale. Specify the scale variation to apply to the reference point.

Info geoid
Info geoid button activates the following window, displaying the information concerning the geoid:

Geoid: set reference geoid among the ones available in the list: : Italy or EGM96; Latitude (WGS84): Enter latitude value; Longitude (WGS84): Enter longitude value; Calculate. Start calculation of geoid undulation for the coordinates specified; Geoid ondulation (N): Indicates the geoid undulation in a specified position; Details. This command displays such geoid data as minimum and maximum latitude and longitude as well as the step in the two directions; the following window will appear:

239

Topko

Reversing the axes

Through this procedure it is possible to swap coordinates according to all possible combinations. This command can be activated through one of the following methods: Menu Survey > Coordinate transformations > Reverse axes Command line: SWAPXYPNT

The following window appears:

Select the kind of swap you want to perform and then specify the elements you want to swap: Swap point coordinates, Swap datum coordinates. Press OK to start the elaboration.

240

Topko N - Network Adjustment

Both in case of surveys with just one constrained cross section and in case of very complex networks of cross sections with different combinations of trilaterations and triangulations, Topko N can adjust all survey data and give the best result by using the adjustment according to the least squares technique. At the end of the calculation it is possible to obtain the drawing of the network with the display of error ellipses for each point, so that any weakness in the network can easily be seen graphically.

The presence of this calculation module in a topographic software as Topko offers a complete and integrated solution which does not need the transfer of data between different applications, making it possible to work always in the same environment. Topko N performs two kinds of adjustments: Horizontal network adjustment Vertical network adjustment

Horizontal network adjustment

The data needed to perform the adjustment can be inserted in different tables, according to the kind of measure. Calculation algorithm can analyze the following kinds of measure at the same time:

Directions Angles Azimuth Distances

For every measure it is possible to set the error which might affect the measure; it will be used later to determine the weights. For every point it is possible to specify whether its coordinates (X and Y) are both fixed, or only one of them is fixed Any measure can be temporarily excluded by the calculation without having to cancel it from the table; in this way it is possible to set a relationship between the results obtained from different calculation conditions. Data tables can be compiled automatically by the tool, according to the measures available in the field book, so the user will not have to insert the data manually The command can be activated by one of the following methods: Menu Survey > Horizontal network adjustment Command line: HNETADJ

241

The lateral menu allows to have access to data insertion, result display and reports.

Topko

Data
By activating the lateral option Data, it is possible to have access to data insertion tables. There are five tables of data insertion, each allowing the insertion of specific data according to the needs.

Stations tab

In this table insert the names and the approximate coordinates of the points to be calculated.

Use: allows to activate and deactivate the use of a point during the calculation. Station: point name. E: approximate coordinate E. N: approximate coordinate N. Cost. E: if active, the tool will keep fixed the E coordinate of the point. Cost. N: if active, the tool will keep fixed the N coordinate of the point. Notes: point description.

243

Directions tab

In this table insert the angles of direction between the different points of the survey to calculate. Use: allows to activate and deactivate the use of a point during the calculation. Station: point name. Point: name of the point measured. Measure: direction angular value from station to point. Error: error caused by instruments Orientation: Notes: measure description.

Topko

Angles tab

In this table insert the internal angles between the different points of the survey to calculate. Use: allows to activate and deactivate the use of a point during the calculation. Station: point name. Backsight: name of back point. Foresight: name of point forward. Measure: internal angular value between three points taking the station as centre. Error: error caused by instruments Notes: measure description.

245

Azimuth tab

In this table insert orientation azimuth of the survey to calculate.

Use: allows to activate and deactivate the use of a point during the calculation. Station: name of the station the measure has been taken from. Point: name of point measured. Measure: measure azimuth between measure, station and point. Error: error caused by instruments Notes: measure description

Topko

Distances tab

In this tab insert the distances between the different points of the survey to calculate. Use: allows to activate and deactivate the use of a point during the calculation. Station: name of the station the measure has been taken from. Point: name of point measured. Measure: distance between station and point. Error: error caused by instruments Notes: measure description

Automatic compilation from field book

It is possible to obtain the automatic compilation of table data by using the measures in the field book. The tool will use the measures to fill automatically the fields of the different tables without having to insert them manually. To start the operation select from Data menu the item Import.

Perform adjustment
To start the calculation, select from Calculate menu the item Horizontal adjustment. The tool will start the calculation, at the end of which it will display the results in a part of the table.

Results
By activating the lateral option Results you have access to the tables that display calculation results. The results are subdivided into two pages: Adjustment and Ellipses. 247

Adjustment tab

This table displays the main results of the calculation. Two tables can be seen: Station coordinates and Measures. In Coordinate station table the following data will be displayed: Stations: station name. Eo: E start coordinate. dE: correction in E applied. E: E coordinate adjusted. No: N start coordinate. dN: correction in N applied. N: N coordinate adjusted. In Measures table the following data are displayed: Station: station name. Point A: name of the point measured. For angles measures this point is the Back point. Punto B: only in case of angular measures; it is the Back point. Type: measure type: Azimuth, Direction, Distance angle or Distance. Measure: measure original value. Standard Dev.: standard deviation. Correction: correction applied to measure. Adjusted: measure adjusted value.

Topko

Ellipsis tab

This table displays the data concerning the error ellipses calculated. Two tables are displayed: Absolute ellipses and Relative ellipses. In Absolute ellipses table the following data are displayed: Station: station name. X: X coordinate adjusted and ellipsis centre. Y: Y coordinate adjusted and ellipsis centre. Semi-major axis: size of semi-maior axis. Semi-minor axis : size of semi-minor axis. Azimuth: direction of ellipsis semi-major axis.

In Relative ellipses table the following data are displayed: Station: station name. Measure. Semi-major axis: size of semi-maior axis. Semi-minor axis : size of semi-minor axis. Orientation: direction of ellipsis semi-major axis. Distance: distance between station and point Dst.Std.Dev.: distance standard deviation. 249

Precision. Azimuth. Azimuth.Std.Dev.

Updating survey points with adjustment results

At the end of the calculation it is possible to update the coordinates of the topographic points with the new adjusted values obtained from the elaboration. From Data menu select the item Update points.

Reports
By activating the lateral option Reports it is possible to have access to the management of reports as far as the results calculated.

From Reports menu select the kind of report desired. The report preview will appear in the window. It is then possible to pass to the direct print or save it on file .

Topko

Vertical network adjustment

The data needed to start the vertical adjustment are the approximate point elevation and the differences in elevation measured between the points. For each measure it is possible to set the possible error the measure might have, which will be used to determine the weights. For each point it is possible to specify whether the elevation must be considered fixed or not. Any measure can be temporarily excluded by the calculation without having to cancel it from the table; in this way it is possible to set a relationship between the results obtained from different calculation conditions. Data tables can be compiled automatically by the tool, according to the measures available in the field book, so the user will not have to insert the data manually The command can be activated by one of the following methods: Menu Survey > Vertical network adjustment Command line: VNETADJ

The lateral menu allows to have access to data insertion, result display and reports.

Data
By activating the lateral option Data, it is possible to have access to data insertion tables. There are two tables of data insertion, one for approximate elevations and one for the differences in elevation between points. 251

Stations tab

In this tab names must be inserted, and the approximate elevations of the points to calculate. Use: allows to activate and deactivate the use of a point during the calculation. Station: point. Elevation: approximate elevation. Fixed: if active, the tool will keep the point elevation fixed. Notes: point description.

Topko

Measures tab

This tab must be filled with the height differences between the points to calculate. Use: activates and deactivates the use of a measure during the calculation. First station: name of the first station. Second station: name of the second station. HD: difference in elevation between the first and the second station. Distance: distance between the stations. Notes: description of the measure.

Automatic compilation from field book

It is possible to obtain the automatic compilation of table data by using the measures available in the field book. The tool will use the measures to fill automatically the fields of the different tables, so the user will not have to insert the data by hand. To start the operation select the item Import from Data menu.

Perform adjustment
To start the calculation, select from Calculate menu the item Vertical adjustment. The tool will start the calculation, at the end of which it will display the results in a part of the table.

253

Results
By activating the lateral option Results it is possible to have access to the tables displaying calculation results. There are two tables, one for the elevations adjusted and one for the measures adjusted.

Adjusted elevations table displays the stations adjusted elevations Station: station name. Quota: start elevation. Correction: correction applied to the start elevation. Adjusted elevation: adjusted elevation. Standard deviation.

Adjusted measures table displays the adjusted measures. First station: name of the first station. Second station: name of the second station. Distance: distance. Measure: original measure. Correction: correction to apply to the measure. Adjusted measure: Adjusted measure.

Topko

Standard deviation.

Updating survey points with adjustment results

At the end of the calculation it is possible to update the elevations of the topographic points with the new adjusted values obtained from the elaboration. From Data menu select the item Update points.

Reports
By activating the lateral option Reports it is possible to have access to the management of reports as far as the results calculated.

From Reports menu select the kind of report desired. The report preview will appear in the window. It is then possible to pass to the direct print or save it on file .

255

Topko M Standard - Mathematical modelling

Mathematical models
The management of mathematical models allows the management of tridimensional survey (by creating a triangle mathematical model), and the management of cross-sections. Topko M module can be integrated with Topko T module, through the management of numeric and cadastral topography.

Points, constraints, triangles

In order to work with mathematical models it is necessary to have a points file, representing the initial phase of the generation of a triangle mathematical model. Points can be obtained in different ways: from numeric topography by means of survey calculation, by loading them directly from a data recorder, by inserting them manually through the table of coordinates or in the graphic widow, by loading them from a text file (ASCII), or by importing them from a DXF file. From 3D points it is possible to build a triangle-strated terrain area obtaining so called mathematical models, which can be obtained manually, semi-automatically or in a completely automatic way. It is possible to build automatically a mathematical model in two ways: free or constrained. Triangles connecting points without taking into consideration either perimeters or possible ground discontinuities, are built by free mode, while the constrainted mode respects: outer perimeters : delimiting the zones where triangulation has to be performed ; exclusion perimeters : in order to de-activate the triangulation on zones not surveyed but situated inside outer perimeters; discontinuity (break) lines: in order to point out those surveyed elements such as ditches, canals, road edges, walls, etc that the triangulation must take into consideration. The input of perimeters and discontinuity lines is performed by inserting entities called boundary lines (perimeter) and break lines (discontinuity), i.e. special 3D lines connecting the points. If the free triangulation is sufficient, input the points and then start elaboration of triangulation. In case of constrained triangulation, first it is necessary to input the points, then to define the constraints and at the end to start constrained triangulation command. The quality of the mathematical model obtained through constrained triangulation is much higher than that obtained through free triangulation, provided all the constraints needed have been input. Manual and semiautomatic input is used if the morphology of the terrain surveyed is very complicated and to input all the data needed for automatic triangulation takes longer than to perform manual or semiautomatic model construction. The creation of a triangle mathematical model is the first result that has to be obtained to have access, subsequently, to all the functions and the utilities of a mathematical model.

Contour lines
The phase following triangulation is that of calculation of contour lines which are obtained automatically. The tool requires only the equidistance between the lines. Normal contour lines, main (with contour label) contour lines and auxiliary contour lines. The lines can be displayed as linear polylines or as rounded lines. The only requirement for the elaboration of contour lines is the presence of a triangle mathematical model.

Topko

Volume of the solid

Among the most frequent calculations there is the calculation of the volume of the model compared with a reference elevation which, in Topko, calculates also the surface (plane and inclined) covered by the model.

Intersection of models (not available in Topko Express)

If, on the contrary, the calculation of cut and fill volumes is carried out not between the model and a horizontal plane with a defined elevation but between two different mathematical models, it is necessary to use the function of volume calculation by intersection of models. This function needs a model corresponding to the original situation and a model corresponding to the situation modified. Topko does not require either the same perimeter, or the same points. It only requires that it is possible to overlap the two models, not that they coincide. During the elaboration, the tool compares all the project triangles (situation modified) with the triangles of the original situation, splits the triangles that cannot be completely overlapped into new triangles that can be overlapped and calculates the volume between the two resulting prisms. The sum of all these values gives the quantity of cut and fill. This method is rigorous and provides exact data about earthworks both as difference between cut and fill, and as shifting of volumes inside the model. The tool returns crossing lines between cut and fill and calculates the elevation for each survey point on both models, so that it is possible to draw elevation differences.

Levelings
On mathematical models the tool allows the calculation of levelings. A leveling plane can be defined according to the following modes:

one point and two slopes two points and one slope three points

Levelling calculations can be performed with an adjustment plane. It is also possible to indicate a quantity (in cubic metres) of earth either to be added or to be subtracted to the adjustment plane; not available in Topko Express. Also in this case, crossing lines between cut and fill are displayed, and the second elevation (plane elevation) is calculated for each point.

Cross-sections
Cross-sections can be set on every point of a mathematical model and of a survey. The position of the section is indicated from a planimetric point of view, both as a single element and as a complex polyline, free or attached to existing points. After planimetric input, the sections are managed through the Sections module and its CAD. Section CAD allows a complete management of sections. From a mathematical model, it is possible to extract any kind of section lines, to calculate cut and fill areas and from them to obtain volume calculations (through equalized and averaged sections), thus providing reports which can be supplied as accounting enclosures. The extraction of data is performed through: triangle mathematical model, line mathematical model, survey and contour lines. Section CAD offers other performances, whose input can be carried out also manually. Section module provides drawings complete of terrain and project lines with all dimensionings.

257

Allotments (not available in Topko Express)

Topko M allows the management of allotments, i.e. the opportunity of dividing the whole model into parts that can be defined independently. Each volume calculation can be applied to the whole model as well as to each allotment: this allows for example to differentiate the levelings according to each allotment of the model, thus obtaining partial results as far as volume calculation, (one for each allotment). This utility finds its application, for example, in land-settlements, or in the calculation of a pit earthwork, in case it has different owners.

Mesh models (not available in Topko Express)

Specifying the step, it is also possible to obtain automatically triangle or square mesh models. On these models too you can perform shading and tridimensional view.

Raster maps (not available in Topko Express)

From triangle mathematical model it is possible to obtain raster maps that allow to display the model from another point of view: altimetric, slopes, exposures maps and cut and fill map are created.

Additional entities
Topko M provides the CAD with new entities, such as: Break lines : Segments representing discontinuity lines in the automatic generation of triangles. Boundary lines : Segments, representing outer perimeter, to be respected in the automatic generation of triangles. Triangles : Defining the area of a mathematical model. Contour lines : Contour lines. Crossing lines between cut and fill : Showing, after volume calculation between models (intersection, leveling) the points where the passage from cut to fill occurs. Sections : Showing planimetric position of cross sections. Allotments : Delimiting zones for volume calculation.

Topko M menus
Topko M module introduces a personalized menu :

D.T.M. : consisting of menu items to manage the input of constraints, the triangulation, volume calculation, sections, allotments and other options.

Moreover, another item is added to the File menu::

Project properties: containing all the parameters settings for the survey and topographic entities management. It is very important to compile this item.

Topko M toolbar
Topko M module introduces the following additional toolbar.

Topko

Constraints
Constraints are tridimensional lines which connect survey points. They can be used in order to: Define constraints for the construction of a triangle mathematical model. The presence of these lines forces triangulation procedure to build the triangles according to what has been set by the user, so that the survey mathematical model resembles the real model as much as possible; Define a line (not a triangle) mathematical model, to be used, usually in road planning, to survey cross-sections. For some works, (e.g. betterment of existing roads) the line mathematical model is the easiest solution and offers the most accurate results. There are two kinds of constraint lines:

Break lines (discontinuity); Boundary lines;

If, after the next triangulation, you do not obtain the results needed, because of the triangles overimposed on one another or created outside the boundary, it is possible to perform an automatic check on the correctness of the input constraints. See Check on constraints. It is possible to transform drawing lines into constraints and vice versa. See Transformation of drawing entities into topographic entities. The time needed to insert the constraints among the points can be reduced by drawing polylines passing by the points to connect; a specific command allows to transform these polylines into constraints passing exacltly through the points. SeeGeneration of constraints from polylines. Constraints can be created automatically using surveyed points codes. See Automatic drawing from codes. Constraints can be imported from DXF file of AutoCad and they can also be exported on DXF file. See Import and export of constraints from DXF file. An utility option is also available which allows to create survey points directly from constraints extremities. See Creation of coordinates from constraint line extremes.

Break lines
Break lines represent so called discontinuity lines, that are lines which refer to some particular characteristic of the zone surveyed. They can be input for example to represent the basis and the top of a slope: in this case the procedure for the creation of triangles will build some triangle strata inside the two polylines indicated, so the model and the results of the elaboration obtained hereafter will be precise. More complex is the case of a vertical wall, since the tool is unable to manage those survey points which coincide from a planimetric point of view. For this reason, it will be necessary to move slightly the points representing the top of the wall and then to insert some break lines connecting all the top points of the wall and all the basis points of the wall. In order to input break lines, it is necessary to operate using one of the following methods: DTM Toolbar: Menu D.T.M. > Constraints > Breaklines Command line: CONSTRAINTS On CAD command line the following questions appear: Constraints break Lines/Boundaries/<L>: L First point : Next point : The points indicated must have an elevation. Otherwise the tool refuses their selection. Note. When you create break lines, situations when two constraints intersecate should never be created otherwise the created model will result wrong. See Check on Constraints. 259

Note. When the tool asks you to indicate constraint points, it is necessary to operate in one of the following ways: indicate by mouse the point needed ; answer the question by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will search inside the file the point indicated and, if it finds this point, it will proceed to the following question.

You might have to change the typology of a constraint, turning a boundary line into a break line or vice versa. There is a specific command which allows to make this change: How to modify constraints typology How to erase and modify constraints

Boundary lines
Boundary lines are used to define the area inside and/or outside which the triangles have to be built. They must enclose the area, so the last constraint must be connected with the first. Boundary lines are different from Break lines in that they have a perpendicular segment, representing the direction opposite to which the triangles have to be built. In order to set the size of the perpendicular segment see Miscellaneous page in Project properties. It is possible to set a contour area inside which the program will build the triangles and exclude from it some inner zones that are not important for the building of the model: it is sufficient to input boundary lines with the perpendicular segment situated at the opposite of the area where the triangles will be built. In order to input boundary lines it is necessary to operate in one of the following ways: DTM Toolbar: Menu D.T.M. > Constraints > Boundary Command line: CONSTRAINTS

On CAD command line the following questions appear: Constraints break Lines/Boundaries/<L>: B First point : Next point : The points indicated must have an elevation, otherwise the tool refuses their selection. Note. When you create a boundary, it is necessary that the boundary created is closed and that all boundary lines have the perpendicular segment always situated at the opposite of the area where the triangles will be built. See Check on constraints. Note. When the tool asks you to indicate constraint points, it is necessary to operate in one of the following ways: indicate by mouse the point needed ; answer the question by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will search inside the file the point indicated and, if it finds this point, it will proceed to the following question.

You might have to change the typology of a constraint, turning a boundary line into a break line or vice versa. There is a specific command which allows to make this change : How to modify constraints typology How to erase and modify constraints

Topko

Generation of constraints from polylines

A new command allows the creation of break lines and boundary lines in a very fast way, reducing considerably the time needed to build constraints. To use the command it is necessary to draw a polyline passing by the points to link through break lines and boundary lines. The polyline vertexes do not need to be connected to the points or located near the points; what matters is that the polylines pass by the points. So, if we want to build the boundary lines of an almost rectangular area, it can be sufficient to draw a polyline connecting the four vertexes of the rectangle without having to connect all the points along the perimeter. Therefore, the command can be activated as follows: Menu DTM > Creates constraints from polylines Command line: MCONSTRAINTS

On the command line the following prompts will appear: Multiple constraints creation|Breaklines/External boundary/Internal boundary <L>: choose the kind of constraint to create. Maximum distance for points <1>: this is the maximum distance of a point from the polyline, admitted for creating a constraint. If a point has from the polyline a distance that is smaller than this value it will be used for generating the constraints, otherwise it will be rejected. Select polylines: indicate the polylines to use for generating the constraints.

Check on Constraints
This command allows to verify particular error situations, present inside constraints, that may compromise the result obtained from automatic triangulation. It is possible to perform three kinds of examination: Points. The tool verifies that to each constraint extremity corresponds a survey point; if the point is found the constraint extremity assumes the coordinates of the point itself (X,Y,Z). If the point is not found an error situation is notified. Use this option also when it is necessary to turn 2D constraints into 3D constraints. Intersections. The tool verifies if intersections between constraints are present; if an intersection is found the tool performs a zoom on it allowing to erase one of the two constraints. Boundary. The tool verifies if the boundary is closed.

Check on points
Check on constraints procedure can be activated through one of the following modes: Menu D.T.M. > Constraints > Check constraints Command line: SETCONST

On CAD command line, the following questions appear: Constraint check Points/Intersections/Boundary/All/<P>:P Check tolerance <0.01>: 0.01 Tolleranza di controllo <0.01>: 0.01 Maximum distance necessary in order to check the presence of a point on constraints extremity. If a constraint is found and on one of its extremities a point is lacking, within a provided tolerance, the tool performs an automatic zoom on it and then asks the following question:

261

Delete constraint Yes/No/yes All/no aLl/Exit The meaning of the options is the following: Yes: the constraint is deleted; No: the constraint is not deleted; Yes all: the constraint is deleted and also all the other constraints which are not linked; No all: the constraint is not deleted and also all the other constraints which are not linked;

Check on intersections
The check on constraints procedure can be activated by one of the following modes: Menu D.T.M. > Constraints > Check constraints Command line: SETCONST

The tool asks you the following questions: Constraint check Points/Intersections/Boundary/All/<P>: I If an intersection between two constraints is found, the tool performs an automatic zoom on it and then asks you the following question: Delete first constraint Yes/No/<Y>: Delete second constraint Yes/No/<Y>: Then, it is possible to delete one of the two constraints

Check on boundary
The check on constraints procedure can be activated by one of the following modes: Menu D.T.M. > Constraints > Check constraints Command line: SETCONST

The tool asks you the following questions: Constraint check Points/Intersections/Boundary/All/<P>: B Select a boundary constraint: indicate the boundary segment from which to start the verification. If the boundary results opened, the tool performs an automatic zoom on the specified part and an error message appears.

How to modify constraints typology

In order to modify the type of one or more constraints it is necessary to operate through one of the following modes: DTM Toolbar: Menu D.T.M. > Constraints > Constraint properties Command line: DDCHPRCONS

Topko

The command asks you to select all those constraints whose properties have to be modified. Then, the following window will appear:

In Constraint properties tab, it is possible to set the required typology for the set of selected constraints; more precisely, it is possible to transform the selected constraints into break lines or boundaries. As far as boundaries, it is also possible to decide the direction of the perpendicular segment which, as we know, it is necessary for the correct performance of the triangulation. Pressing button Apply, it is possible to see the result of the changes made directly on the graphic window, without closing the dialog box. In Properties tab it is possible to modify standard properties of such entities as Layer, Color and Linetype.

How to erase and modify constraints

Modify
If you want to modify the position of a constraint, you can use all edit functions offered by the graphic CAD (move, copy, rotate, etc.).

Erase
In order to erase one or more constraints from graphic CAD window it is sufficient to use erase command used to erase any kind of entity. Erasing objects How to erase all constraints

How to erase all constraints

In order to erase all the constraints of the current subproject it is sufficient to select Erase all and Constraints from D.T.M. menu; on command line it is possible to write DELDATA: Erase data coNstraints/Triangles/cOntour lines/cut Fill lines/Allotments/Drains/Cancel/<C>: N

263

Creation of coordinates from constraint line extremes

There is a specific function which allows to create the survey starting from constraint lines: for each constraint two survey points are created, one for each extreme; of course no double points are created. The procedure is activated by selecting Extraction of coordinates item from D.T.M. menu, then choosing the sub-item From constraint lines; it is also possible to give DTM2POINT command; Menu D.T.M. > Extraction of coordinates > From constraint lines Command line: DTM2POINT

The following question appears: Creation of points from Triangles/Constraints/<T>: C Note. If survey points are already present, the tool informs you that the procedure cannot be performed.

Triangles
The management of a terrain mathematical model allows to create triangles, in order to approximate mathematically the real terrain model, so that it is possible to interpolate terrain elevations even where points have not been observed. The definition of a mathematical model can be performed in one of the following ways: manual mode:indicating one by one the triangles that make up the model (not available in Topko Express); semi-automatic mode: a set of points is indicated, and the tool creates the triangles on the points according to rules set before (not available in Topko Express); automatic mode: the tool builds automatically the triangles, respecting possible break lines and boundaries (see Constraints). swap two triangles surface: the tool swaps two adjacent triangles inverting the surfaces the represent (not available in Topko Express). Triangles colour can vary according to barycentre elevation: the user can decide the range of colours to use and the intervals to associate to each colour. A colour can be set on creating the triangles but also later. The tool gives the possibility to transform drawing 3DFaces into triangles and vice versa. See 3DFacetriangles transformation. Triangles can be imported from AutoCad DXF file and can also be exported, again on DXF file. How to import/export triangles from DXF file. As far as the management of triangles, there is a command which allows to modify the elevation of all triangles or only of those selected. Change triangle elevation (not available in Topko Express). If you create allotments inside mathematical model, you will have to break all triangles positioned along the allotment boundary. The tool offers the possibility to break triangles positioned on more than one allotment at the same time. Break triangles on defined polylines (not available in Topko Express). The presence of triangles allows to obtain a square or triangle mesh mathematical model. Creation of mesh models. (not available in Topko Express) On the basis of the triangles calculated all the other mathematical model elaborations are performed: Raster maps (not available in Topko Express) Contour lines Calculation of levelings Volume calculation by intersection of models Solid volume

Topko

Cross-sections Printing Triangles There is also an utility function which allows to create survey points from the vertexes of the mathematical model triangles. Creation of coordinates from triangle vertexes (not available in Topko Express) Creation of a point grid from a triangle mathematical model (not available in Topko Express) The tool can also calculate the plane and slope area of all the triangle model, of a part of it defined by an allotment or only of the triangles selected: Calculation of plane and slope area (not available in Topko Express)

Input of triangles in manual mode

The activation of a single triangle input command is carried out through one of the following methods: DTM Toolbar: Menu D.T.M. > Triangulation > Manual Command line: TRIANG

On CAD command line the following questions appear: Triangles Single/Multiple/<S>: S First point : Second point : Third point : The points indicated must have an elevation, otherwise the tool refuses their selection. Note. When the tool asks you to indicate the points that make up a triangle, it is necessary to operate in one of the following ways: indicate by mouse the point needed; answer the question by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will search inside the file the point indicated and, if it finds this point, it will proceed to the following question.

Input of triangles in semi-automatic mode

In order to input a group of triangles starting from a set of survey points it is necessary to operate in one of the following ways: DTM Toolbar: Menu D.T.M. > Triangulation > Manual Command line: TRIANG

On CAD command line the following questions appear: Triangles Single/Multiple/<S>: M New point: The tool asks you to indicate the points to be triangulated. Remember that the last point must be the same as the first or the second point indicated. Two cases might occur:

265

a.

creation of triangles with a common vertex : in this case the point which will be the vertex of all the triangles created is indicated as first point. Then, all the other points will be indicated; the last point specified must be the same of the second point.

b. creation of standard triangles : in this case the points to be triangulated must be indicated and the last point must be the same of the first point. The points indicated must have an elevation, otherwise the tool refuses their selection. Note. When the tool asks you to indicate the points that make up a triangle, it is necessary to operate in one of the following ways: indicate by mouse the point needed; answer the question by digiting the name of the point needed: the tool will search inside the file the point indicated and, if it finds this point, it will proceed to the following question.

Automatic triangulation
The tool can build the triangles automatically in two ways : Free triangulation : the tool generates the triangles without taking into consideration possible boundary or break lines; Constrained triangulation: if boundary or break lines have been set, the tool will follow this information during the generation of the triangles which will not exceed the boundary set and will not cross a break line (see Constraints). This procedure can be activated through one of the following modes: Toolbar DTM: Menu D.T.M. > Triangulation > Automatic Command line: MAKEDTM The following dialog box appears :

Topko

Triangulation
The following data are required: Subproject. Select the subproject on which to carry out the triangulation. Triangulation mode. Select the triangulation mode to be perfomed: Free: on triangles creation constraints are not taken into account. Constrained: triangles creation depends on the presence of constraints. Polyline: triangles are created inside a closed polyline (only for Incas users). Allotment: triangles are created inside an allotment (only for Incas users). Entities to triangulate: In case of Free and Constrained triangulation it is possible to decide on what entities to carry out the triangulation. All: all the points and break lines contained in the survey subproject are used. Select by window: After pressing Apply button the tool will prompt the creation of a check window in the graphic CAD; the model will be created by using only the points and the break lines selected. Select by polyline: After pressing Apply button the tool will ask to indicate the polyline delimiting the area to triangulate; the model will be created by using only points and break lines inside the polyline. The break lines partially included in the polyline are automatically broken. If the option Delete previous triangles is active, the tool, before performing the triangulation, will delete automatically the possible triangles inside the polyline. Speed. In order to perform the elaboration, the tool gives the possibility to choose among three different speeds. They differ from the mode by which the tool creates triangles: a slower elaboration creates triangles better than a faster one, which creates triangles without performing a choice of points. Max length side. For triangle sides it is possible to set the maximum length. Use this setting to avoid creation of insignificant triangles on model boundary. If the edit box is empty, the condition is ignored. Exclusion external boundary:The external boundary is always considered as an inclusion boundary; on the contrary, if the internal boundary is an exclusion boundary it will be necessary to activate this option. Check data. If the option is active, during the triangulation, a check on data will be performed; the check consists in verifying the occurrence of the following errors: Survey points with coincident planimetric coordinates: if the tool is confronted with such a situation, the double point will not be used to perform the triangulation; Intersection of constraints: in this case the tool informs you of the error and interrupts the elaboration; Overlapped constraint lines: one of the two lines will not be used to perform the triangulation; Zero-length constraint: the constraint is erased; Point with no distance from the constraint: the situation is pointed out and the elaboration is interrupted; Delete previous triangles. If the option is active, the previous triangles are deleted before performing triangulation. Symbols. It is possible to choose one of the three symbols listed below to represent the triangle: Lines: the three bisecting lines of the triangles are created; Number: triangle number is drawn. This option is particularly useful when volume calculation printout is added to drawings; by this way, it is possible to compare printout data with drawing ones. None: Only the three sides of the triangle are drawn.

267

Layers

Layer. It is possible to set the layer where to save the triangles created. Flat triangles color. It is possible to set a specific color for those triangles created using points with the same elevation. As this kind of triangles may return unreal contour lines, through the chromatic differentiation it is possible to find out easily the triangles to be corrected.

Topko

Colours Not available in Topko Express

In this page it is possible to set triangle colour according to barycentre. Triangles with colors shade: this option activates the generation of triangles with colour according to elevation. Elevation intervals customized: by activating this option it is possible to specify the intervals to which to apply the colours defined in the table below. When this option is not active, the tool distributes uniformly the colours along the whole interval between minimum elevation and maximum elevation. In the table it is possible to define the colours to be used for colouring. It is possible to define up to 16 different colours.

Press Apply button to start the triangulation. Note. To stop the elaboration press ESC.

Set triangles colour

By this command it is possible to set a colour to triangles according to their elevation. The command can be activated as follows: Menu DTM > Triangulation > Set triangles color Command line: SETDTMCOLOR

269

The following dialog box will appear:

Triangles with colors shade: this option activates the generation of triangles with colour according to elevation. Elevation intervals customized: by activating this option it is possible to specify the intervals to which to apply the colours defined in the table below. When this option is not active, the tool distributes uniformly the colours along the whole interval between minimum elevation and maximum elevation. In the table it is possible to define the colours to be used for colouring. It is possible to define up to 16 different colours.

Swap two triangles surface

This command allows to swap two adjacent triangles surfaces (with one side in common). The command can be activated through one of the following modes: Menu D.T.M. > Triangulation > Swap two triangles surface Command line: SWAPTRI

On command line the following questions appear: Select the first triangle: Select the second triangle: Once you selected the second triangle the tool erases both the selected triangles and makes them up again in the opposite way. Both the triangles selected must have two points in common.

Topko

How to erase or modify triangles

Modify
If you want to modify the position of a triangle, you can use all the edit functions offered by Graphic CAD (move, copy, rotate, etc.). It is possible to modify easily the shape of a triangle by Grips (see Grips). There are four grips per triangle: one for each vertex and one grip along the first side of the triangle. The three grips which are on the vertexes are used to change the position of each vertex, that is the shape of the triangle. On the contrary, the fourth grip is used to move the triangle.

Erasing
In order to erase one or more triangles from graphic CAD window it is sufficient to use erase command used to erase any kind of entity. In order to erase all the current subproject triangles it is sufficient to select Erase all item and then Triangles from D.T.M. menu; On command line you can write DELDATA : Erase data coNstraints/Triangles/cOntour lines/cut Fill lines/Allotments/Drains/Cancel/<C>:T

Change triangle elevation

By this command it is possible to move altimetrically the whole triangle mathematical model or part of it; the command is activated by selecting Triangulation item from D.T.M. menu and then choosing Change triangle elevation; otherwise you can give CHELEV. Menu D.T.M. > Triangulation > Change triangle elevation Command line: CHELEV

Change triangle elevation aLl/by Allotment/Selected/<T>: Height difference : It is possible to change each triangle elevation as well as the elevation of triangles belonging to an allotment (which must be indicated) or of the triangles selected.

Break triangles on defined polylines

By performing a subdivision by allotment inside a mathematical model, you will see that some triangles are positioned on different allotments at the same time. For the elaboration of volume calculation by allotment, this kind of situation is wrong because only the triangles inside the allotment are calculated. It is, therefore, necessary to break triangles on defined polylines. In order to perform this operation, there is a specific command that can be activated through one of the following modes: Menu D.T.M. > Triangulation > Break triangle on defined polyline Command line: BREAKTRI

After the elaboration the triangles are broken on defined polylines and no one of them is positioned on two different allotments at the same time.

Square and triangle mesh model

From triangle mathematical model it is possible to obtain a triangle or square mesh model created according to a set step. The command for mesh model creation can be activated selecting from D.T.M.

271

menu the item Extraction of DTM and then the item Mesh models; you can also digit DTM2MESH on CAD command line. Menu D.T.M. > Extraction of DTM > Mesh models Command line: DTM2MESH

The following window appears :

In this dialog box you can choose the type of mesh to be created, square or triangle, and the step for mesh creation. The tool asks if you want to obtain a rectangular model (Squared model) or if you want the meshes to be created only where the triangles are. Moreover, it is possible to set grid orientation angle and, as far as elevations, it is possible to set a different scale to make them stand out more and a reference elevation, for building grids in case a square model is created. It is also possible to create a grid only on a part of the whole mathematical model. In this case, it is necessary to set the start point of the area to process and the number of grids desired in the two directions. Finally, the tool asks to specify the subproject where the mesh has to be created. Before carrying out this operation, it is therefore necessary to create a subproject which will contain the elaborated mesh. See Subprojects management. By pressing Browse button a dialog box appears which shows the situation of the works open inside the tool and for each of them the subprojects forming the work. From the list, the current subproject is obviously missing. The user task is to select the subproject that will contain the mesh model.

Creation of coordinates from triangle vertexes

There is a specific function which allows to create a survey starting from a triangle mathematical model: for each model triangle vertex a survey point is created with the plano-altimetric coordinates of that vertex. Of course, no double points are created.

Topko

The procedure is activated by selecting first Extraction of coordinates item from D.T.M. menu, then the sub-item From triangle vertexes; otherwise you can give DTM2POINT command; Creation of points from Triangles/Constraints/<T>: T Note. If survey points are already present, the tool informs you that the procedure cannot be performed.

Creation of a point grid from a triangle mathematical model

This procedure allows to obtain a spot height map from a triangle mathematical model by defining a regular grid; this command can be activated by selecting the item Extraction of coordinates from D.T.M. menu and choosing the sub-item Grid of coordinates from DTM; you can also give DTM2GRID command. Menu D.T.M. > Extraction of coordinates > Grid of coordinates from DTM Command line: DTM2GRID

The following window appears:

The tool asks you to input Step and orientation Angle with which to create the grid. Grid points will be interpolated with the mathematical model in order to determine the elevation. Besides, you can create the grid only on a part of the whole mathematical model. In this case it is necessary to set the origin of the area to be elaborated and the number of meshes desired in the two directions. Finally, the tool asks you to specify the subproject where the grid has to be created. Before carrying out the operation, it is thus necessary that the subproject which will contain the grid points is available. See Subprojects management. Pressing Browse button a dialog box appears which shows the situation of the works opened inside the tool and for each work all the subprojects forming it. From the list, the current subproject is obviously missing. The user task is to select the subproject which will contain grid coordinates.

Calculation of plane and slope area

This command returns the total plane and slope area of all models triangles or of only a part of them, by defining an allotment or selecting them manually. 273

The command can be activated through one of the following methods: Menu D.T.M. > Triangulation and then Plane and slope area Command line: AREADTM

On command line the following questions appear: Calculate triangle area aLl/by Allotment/Selected/<L>: Answer L to perform the calculation of all the model area; answer A to obtain the area of the triangles inside an allotment and S to calculate the area of the triangles selected. In case of calculation by allotment the tool asks you to indicate the allotment to elaborate, while in case of triangles selected the tool goes on selecting them. Plane area: XXXXX.XXX Slope area: XXXXX.XXX Finally, the command displays the areas calculated.

Printing of Triangles
In order to obtain the printing of triangles select the item Print from File menu, or digit PRINT on CAD command line. In the appearing dialog box select DTM tab. It is then sufficient to select the option Triangles. For each triangle, its coordinates and elevation are printed; triangle plane area and slope area are calculated. At the end of the report the total calculation of the plane area and slope area of the model is displayed.

Raster maps
Starting from a triangles mathematical model, it is possible to obtain four different types of raster maps which can be necessary to display the work done in a different way. The maps are the following:

Altimetric map: it returns a map whose color scale shows mathematical model altimetric variations which correspond to chromatic variations; Map of slopes: it assigns a different color to each triangle according to its maximum slope. Map of exposures: triangles are colored with bright or shade colors according to the exposure of the side to light; Cut and fill map: Cut and fill zone, obtained from an elaboration by volume calculation, are colored with two different colors.

The command can be activated by one of the methods listed below: Menu D.T.M. > Map creation Command line: MAKEMAP

Topko

The following window appears:

Map type. Select the type of map needed. Legend. Specify if you want to create a legend and calculate its value scale automatically or if you want to set a minimum and a maximum limit. Raster name. Indicate the name to be assigned to the raster to be created; set the other raster features such as the Resolution (datum points per inch), Margins to be assigned to the raster to be added to the extensions of the model and, finally, the Number of colors to be used. According to the values set, the tool calculates automatically the dimension in byte of the raster to be obtained; check that the value is not too high as it represents the real space necessary to save the image. To modify dimensions in byte of the image change the resolution and the color number. In Legend tab, it is possible to choose the position and the dimensions of the legend; it is also possible to choose the dimensioning mode and the titles to assign to the raster. Finally, you can choose colors and their sequence to be used in map creation.

275

Legend. Set the position of the legend (right or left) and the size in mm. on paper. Dimensioning. Set the step with which to insert the reference in the legend and set also the font to be used for dimensioning text. Title. In the upper part of the raster image, it is possible to insert two titles and for each of them specify the font to be used for text report. Colors. Inside this list it is possible to specify the colors to be used in the creation of the map and the order according to which they have to be used. In cut and fill maps only the first two colors are used; in exposure maps, instead, the color assigned to each triangle is used. By Up and Down buttons it is possible to change the order of the colors inside of the list.

Contour lines
On the basis of mathematical model triangles, it is possible to obtain contour lines through the intersection between horizontal planes (at different elevations) and the model itself. It is possible to generate two kinds of contour lines: Linear contour lines : more adherent to the triangle mathematical model, they however do not grant an appreciable aesthetic effect; B-Spline contour lines: more rounded and nice to see than linear contour lines, even if less accurate; The colour of contour lines can vary according to the elevation assumed by the curves: the user can choose the range of colours to use and the intervals to be associated to each colour. Colour setting can be performed on creating the curves but also later. Contour lines can be quoted either automatically, during their creation, or manually The tension on contour line vertexes can be set automatically on creating the contour lines, but later it can also be modified manually. So it is possible to set a specific tension on a particular contour line and also to set a specific tension on a single vertex of a contour line. It is possible to transform drawing polylines or contour lines with no elevation (2D) into contour lines with an elevation. Besides, you can digitalize the contour lines as if they were normal polylines; before drawing each curve, it is necessary to specify its elevation.

Topko

It is possible to transform drawing polylines into contour lines and vice versa. Contour lines can be imported from DXF file of AutoCad and also be exported on DXF file.

Creation of contour lines

The procedure that creates contour lines can be activated as follows: Toolbar DTM Menu D.T.M. > Contour lines > Contour lines Command line: CONTOURS

Dialog box is subdivided into four pages:

Countour lines

Subproject. Select the subproject where the triangulation has to be performed. Contour line intervals. The tool is able to generate three kinds of lines which can differ as far as the layer they belong to and therefore in colour and linetype; you are asked to indicate the equidistance between Normal contours as well as the equidistance of Main contours (i.e. which will be quoted automatically) : this value must be a multiple of the normal contours equidistance. The other kind of contours is the Auxiliary contours, which will be drawn among normal lines: its value must therefore be a submultiple of normal contours equidistance.Moreover, the tool displays the minimum and maximum elevation found in the triangle digital model.

277

Contour lines can be created by the user also on single intervals which can be defined by specifying Min elevation and Max elevation. Type of curves. The curves the tool can generate are of two kinds: Linear: segments obtained from the intersection between triangles and planes at different elevations. B-Spline: from the points of intersection between the planes and the triangles, the tool performs a B-spline interpolation, so it can generate rounded-off, better looking curves. If you choose B-spline option, the tool allows to set two other parameters: Vertexes tension: The tension regulates the side friction factor of the contour line compared to the points of interpolation; the greater the tension, the nearer the curve will be to the points that determined it. It is possible to regulate the tension by Automatic or Manual mode. With the first option the tool calculates the tension automatically, according to the triangle slope; with a high vertical slope the curve tension will be bigger than the one calculated on less sloped triangles, creating tighter and more linear contour lines on the leaning sides and more rounded off on the triangles in plane areas. Step: it is the length of the hatches that constitute the b-spline: the shorter the hatches, the more the curve will be rounded. It is better to set values from 0.5 to 5.

Labels

Draw labels. If this option is active, contour line elevation labels are inserted on the bases of the parameters set in the other fields of the window. Labels on fixed step: allows to obtain the label at a fixed step along the contour line. Label distance. Distance between two consecutive labels along the contour line. Labels at begin and end curve: allows to obtain the label at the two ends of the contour line. Text size (mm). Label characters height (in mm.). Precision. Number of decimals of label text.

Topko

Prefix. Text added to label text as a prefix. Suffix. Text added to label text as a suffix. Border around labels: drawing of the border around labels Font. Label text font. Position Top. Positions dimensioning text above the curve; Bottom. Positions dimensioning text below the curve; Center. Interrupts the curve and enters the text in the middle. Orientation. Automatic. The angle of the contour line dimension texts can be determined automatically by following the contour line; Direction rise curves. Positions the text according to the direction of the contour lines; the angle is calculated so as to represent the direction towards which contour line elevations increase.

Layers

In this page it is possible to set the layers to which to assign the three kinds of contour lines that will be generated and the layer to assign the dimension texts to.

279

Colours Not available in topko Express

Contour lines with colors shade: this option activates the generation of contour lines with colour according to elevation. Elevation intervals customized: by activating this option it is possible to specify the intervals to which to apply the colours defined in the table below. When this option is not active, the tool distributes uniformly the colours along the whole interval between minimum elevation and maximum elevation. In the table it is possible to define the colours to be used for colouring. It is possible to define up to 16 different colours. Press Apply to start the elaboration. Note. To interrupt the elaboration press ESC.

Modify labels
Interactive shifting of labels
The labels of the contour lines can be moved interactively along the contour line simply by clicking on the label and then selecting the central grip that appears.

Topko

Single deletion of labels

Labels can be deleted one by one from the contour line: it is sufficient to select the label and then select the central grip that appears. On the command line the following options will appear:

Press Delete button or enter C to delete the label selected. A second possibility to delete the labels one by one is to use a specific command: Menu DTM > Contour lines > Delete labels Command line: DELCVLQT

On the command line the following prompt will arrive:

Select Single option; Select contour line on which to remove labels: Select contour line Select point nearest label : Indicate the point nearest to the label to delete.

Multiple deletion of labels

It is also possible to delete automatically all the labels contained in all the contour lines or all the labels of a specific contour line. Menu DTM > Contour line > Delete labels Command line: DELCVLQT

On the command line the following prompt will appear:

Select the option All to cancel all the labels of all the contour lines; select Contour line to cancel the labels of a specific curve. In this case the tool asks to indicate the contour line from which to remove the labels.

281

Set colors to contour lines

By this command it is possible to set a colour to contour lines according to their elevation. The command can be activated as follows: Menu DTM > Contour lines > Set contour lines color Command line: SETCONTCOLOR

The following dialog box will appear:

Contour lines with colors shade: this option activates the generation of contour lines with colour according to elevation. Elevation intervals customized: by activating this option it is possible to specify the intervals to which to apply the colours defined in the table below. When this option is not active, the tool distributes uniformly the colours along the whole interval between minimum elevation and maximum elevation. In the table it is possible to define the colours to be used for colouring. It is possible to define up to 16 different colours.

Tension editing on vertexes

The tension on contour line vertexes can be set automatically on creating the contour lines, but later it can also be modified manually. So it is possible to set a specific tension on a particular contour line and also to set a specific tension on a single vertex of a contour line. Editing tension on vertexes.

Topko

The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar DTM Menu DTM > Contour lines > curve editing Command line: EDITCVL

The following window will appear and it will always stay open:

In the window you can choose to modify the tension either on all the curve or on a single vertex. So, select the contour line or indicate the vertex to modify; after selecting them, in the window you will see the current tension of the curve or of the vertex selected. By modifying the value of the tension, the drawing of the curve changes according to the values set; after getting to the desired value, it is possible to select the curve or the following vertex.

Manual labelling
Contour lines can be also quoted manually (Manual labelling) by positioning, for example, the labels along a unique direction in order to facilitate reading. It is possible to perform a manual labelling by selecting the point where the label has to be positioned or by drawing a segment: the contour line label is then positioned where the segment intersecates main contour lines. The command can be activated through one of the following methods: DTM Toolbar Menu D.T.M. > Contour lines > Manual labelling Command line: CONTOURSL

The tool asks the following questions :

Manual labelling by point:

Insert label by Line/Point/<L>: P Enter point where to insert label:

Manual labelling by Line:

Insert label by Line/Point/<L>: L Enter first point of line: Enter second point of line:

Setting elevations to polylines or contour lines

Quite often a drawing contains contour lines obtained, for example, from a raster map, from an automatic vector or digitized manually; these contour lines are not 3D, so, to use them for what they represent, it is necessary to assign them an elevation.

283

This command automatizes this process of transformation of 2D polylines into 3D contour lines. The tool prompts for the insertion of a segment that crosses, and then intersects, a group of contour lines; moreover, you have to set the elevation of the first contour lines met by the segment and the interval between the contour lines. Now the tool has all the information it needs to assign an elevation to all the contour lines that intersect the segment. The command can be activated as follows: Menu DTM > Contour lines > Set elevation to contour lines Command line: SETCVLELEV

On the command line the following prompts will appear: Select polylines or contour lines: select all the contour lines on which to set an elevation. Select first point: indicate the first point that determines the segment which crosses the contour lines selected before. Select second point: indicate the second point that determines the segment which crosses the contour lines selected before. Start elevation: elevation of the first contour line intersected by the segment. Difference between contour lines: elevation difference between contour lines.

Digitalizing contour lines

By this command you can draw on screen some contour lines as if they were normal polylines; before drawing each curve, specify its elevation. The command can be activated as follows: Menu CVL > Contour lines > Inserting a contour line Command line: CVLINS

On the command line the following prompts will appear: Contour line elevation: indicate the elevation assumed by the contour line to be drawn. First point: indicate the first point of the contour line. ...

How to erase or modify contour lines

Modify
If you want to modify the position or the shape of a contour line, it is possible to use all the edit functions (move, copy, rotate, etc.) the graphic CAD offers.

Erase
In order to erase one or more contour lines from graphic CAD window, it is sufficient to use erase command, used to erase any kind of entity. To erase the current subproject contour lines, it is sufficient to select Erase all item and Contour lines from D.T.M. menu; on command line you can write DELDATA: Erase data coNstraints/Triangles/cOntour lines/cut Fill lines/Allotments/Drains/Cancel/<C>: O

Topko

Topographic cross sections

The sections management includes not only the automatic extraction of sections from the mathematical model but also the possibility to complete the sections with the insertion of typical elements, working lines etc. Each work starts with the definition of work parameters; first of all it is necessary to define the elements which will make up the sections: terrain, project, stripping, terrain recovery, etc. Then, some rules have to be defined for area and width calculation, units and other parameters used during the calculation. It is possible to calculate both cut, fill, terrain recovery, etc. volumes and such surfaces as geotextile, seal coat, binder etc, both in projection and in length. The program can extract automatically the transversal view of the section from triangle mathematical model, line mathematical model, contour lines and survey points. Section elements can also be imported from DXF files. As far as road or hydraulic sections, it is possible to choose from the library the typical section to use or define your own typical section; then you go on with the insertion of the typical section in the current section or automatically in a group of sections. The tool also allows the calculation of areas for each section and to verify directly on screen the calculation performed; finally, by setting the distances between sections, you can obtain the calculation of volumes. Sections can be plotted together with the dimensioning of their elements, personalizable by the user. Along with the drawing it is possible to print the reports concerning area and volume calculations.

Additional entities
Section module introduces just one new entity: the polyline representing the elements by which the sections will be built: terrain polyline, project polyline, stripping polyline, etc. Each polyline possesses a code that distinguishes it, allowing to perform the calculation of section areas properly.

Sections module Menus

Cross section personalized menus are : Sections : including menu items to manage calculation of sections, elements editing, definition of dimensioning, calculation of areas, etc. Section editing : including menu items for the insertion of new elements inside the cross sections. Moreover, the following items are added in File menu: Project properties : including the setting of all the parameters for the management of the project. It is very important to know these parameters that can be modified by this menu item. Plot preview : this item is active only for profile and sections module and allows to open a graphic window containing the profile and sections drawing preview. From the new graphic window it is then possible to go on as usual by plotting and creating DXF file.

Topko Toolbars
Cross sections module adds the following toolbars.

Toolbar Design: contains some of the commands concerning the product management.

Cross-sections Toolbar: it includes some of the commands concerning the management of cross sections.

285

How to move quickly among sections

For certain works the number of cross sections can be very high. For this reason it is necessary to move rapidly from a section to another. In order to meet this need, a navigator has been created. It is situated in the lower part of the sections graphic window.

Navigator is made up of five buttons whose meaning is specified below :

Load first section Load section preceding current section Load section following current section Load last section Search a section

Cross-sections properties
Many data and parameters concerning not the open subproject but the active subproject are grouped in this section. This means that inside any project there can be more subprojects, each one with its own general data, apart from the others (see Management of subprojects). The management of the sections properties is activated from Sections menu, by the item Crosssections properties; as usual, it is possible to give DDSECPROP command.

Topko

General tab

Terrain code Shows the code used for the terrain line in cross-sections. This is useful in performing those elaborations where a terrain line is used (e.g. slope calculation), because the tool avoids making one more question. In Section codes table an element, used as terrain line, must be inserted with the same code inserted here. Project code Shows the code used for the project line in cross-sections. The rules are the same as those for Terrain code, so it is necessary to insert in Section codes table an element with the same code as the one inserted here. X, Y scale Allows to set drawing scales for abscisses and ordinates. It is possible to use also SCALEDRAW command on graphic CAD window. Decimals It is possible to choose the number of decimals with which to represent coordinates, widths, areas, surfaces and volumes. Section view If the option Store section view is active the tool saves, for each section, the last view you used; by this means, when you go back on the section, the last view you used in that section will be shown. OK button confirms the changes made, while button Cancel exits the dialog box without making any change. By button Apply it is possible to confirm the changes and see in the CAD window the result of these changes while keeping the dialog box active.

287

Calculation tab

Automatic Allows to activate/deactivate automatic recalculation of sections when you go out of a section. by Gauss method Applies Gauss method to determine the section areas. It is also possible to use a method that consists in breaking each area into triangles and trapezia. Volume calculation with barycentre: Volume calculation on sections can be performed by considering the position of the figure barycentre compared to the axis. In this way, quantities on curve are considered more precisely. After the setting, it is necessary to perform volume and area calculation. If volume calculation has been performed with barycentre, then the report will consider also the radius values of the curve passing by the figure barycentre and the corresponding multiplicative factor allowing the correction of the volume calculated. Calculation of triangle widths For width calculation in case of figures with triangular extremes, the tool can calculate the total width, as well as the width on the median point of the triangular face and on the inner extreme. Areas to calculate Allows to decide whether to calculate the whole section or only its right/left side (as to the axis).

Topko

S.O.P. tab

It is possible to carry out volume calculation even only on one part of the section; by this way, it is possible to obtain volumes up to a specified elevation or between two elevations. It is also possible to specify two elements inside the sections to be used as a limit for the calculation: you can then calculate volumes up to a specified section element or between two section elements. In this page it is possible to specify whether you want to carry out elaborations by State of Progress; in the affirmative case, it is possible to specify the name of the S.O.P. and the two elements to be used as limit in volume calculation. The start element and the end element names must coincide to those of the elements present in Section codes, Lines tab table. If inside the sections there are elements having the same code as the one set in the previous fields, areas calculation will include only the areas present between the two elements. If the option Elaboration with S.O.P. has been activated and the options have some S.O.P. elevations, the graphic window will report a horizontal line at the different elevations. Elaborations by S.O.P. by setting elevations.

289

Drawing filters tab

By this page you can control not only the visualization of the dimensioning and of the cross elements that make up the sections, but also the visualization of generic drawing elements.

Titles tab

In order to set a description associated to the active subproject it is sufficient to insert it in the last two rows of this page. The first two rows cannot be edited because they report the description associated to the project.

Topographic cross-sections
Cross-sections can be input manually by indicating the position of the section or automatically by specifying the element on which the section has to be insert; moreover, it is possible to insert and calculate horizontal sections. The last two options are available only for INCAS users.

Manual insert
In order to insert the planimetric position of one or more sections it is necessary to activate the planimetry graphic window and perform the command in one of the following ways:

Topko

Toolbar DTM: Menu D.T.M. > Topographic cross-sections > Manual insert Command line: SECTIONS

On CAD command line the following questions appear: Section Single/on Element/Horizontal <S>: S From point : End point : The section can be inserted also as polyline on more than two points.

Insert on elements
In order to insert the planimetric position of one or more sections it is necessary to activate the planimetry graphic window and perform the command in one of the following ways : Toolbar DTM: Menu D.T.M. > Topographic cross-sections > Sections on object. Command line: SECTIONS

On CAD command line the following questions appear: Section Single/on Element/Horizontal/<S>: E Select element (line or arc) where to insert sections: Specify the element on which the automatic insert has to be performed Number of parts into which to divide an element : Specify the number of parts into which to divide the element; the number of sections will be equal to the number of parts +1 Section width on the left <20>: Section width on the right <20>: Specify the section width on the right and on the left of the element. At this point, the sections are automatically inserted on the specified element. Once the sections have been inserted, you will notice that in Profile table a row has been added, proving the connection between the concepts of cross section and longitudinal profile. In order to see the transversal length of the section inserted, it is necessary to open the sections graphic window by Selection of work module and then carry out the Calculation of sections elevation. There is a method allowing to obtain automatically the drawing in plan of the sections, using survey point codes. See Drawing section from codes. On inserting the sections it is possible to check interactively the calculation on the model or the survey, opening the window of dynamic sections. See Dinamic sections.

Open sections graphic window on the section selected

By pressing the mouse right button on a cross section it is possible to open the sections graphic window corresponding to the section selected. This seemingly simple command allows to avoid several manual processes like opening the sections graphic window and shifting on the section desired. By a single command it is now possible to have a direct access to the section.

291

To activate the command press the mouse right button near the cross section; from the local menu select the item Open section. The section graphic window will be opened near the section selected.

Dynamic sections
By the management of dynamic sections it is possible to open a window which displays dynamically the longitudinal length of sections in the following situations: insertion selection modify by grips modify by Move and Rotate commands (only for topographic sections)

The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar View Menu View > Dynaminc Profiles/Cross-Sections Command line: DYNPROFXSEC

The following window will appear:

The upper side of the window reports a toolbar, allowing to set calculation mode and display of the dynamic section.

The first 6 buttons allow to choose the data source to use to calculate the section: Section is calculated by using line mathematical model (break lines / constraints)

Topko

Section is calculated by using triangle mathematical model Section is calculated by using contour lines Section is calculated by using survey points Section is calculated by using the survey points situated within a certain band. Section is calculated by using DEM. The following check list reports the survey subprojects available. It is possible to calculate the section by using more models at the same time.; it is sufficient to activate calculation on model by turning on the corresponding light. By button it is possible to set some window properties:

Also in this window it is possible to choose the data source to use; it is also possible to specify some parameters such as the tolerance between section vertex and point or the width of the survey band within which to consider the points to use to extract the section. For road sections it is possible to set the width of the terrain band to survey on the right and on the left of the axis. Finally, it is possible to set the ratio between the display scale of elevations and distances.

Dynamic section window will display the section transversal length, on executing the following commands: Insertion: on inserting a topographic section or section on axis, the section transversal length will appear in the window of dynamic sections. Selection: by selecting a section from the graphic window, the section transversal length will appear in the window of dynamic sections. Modify by grips: by selecting a section and stretching its grips, the section transversal length will appear in the window of dynamic sections. Modify by Move and Rotate: by using Move and Rotate command on a topographic section, the section transversal length will appear in the window of dynamic sections.

293

Calculation of section elevations

The calculation of section elevations is carried out by using the mathematical model as source from which to extract all data needed. Before carrying out the calculation it is however better to make sure that in the Section codes - Lines tab table there is at least one element. The extraction of the transversal view of cross sections can be performed by using triangle mathematical model, line mathematical model, contour lines or survey points. Combinations among the different types of data are also admitted. The calculation phase begins in Sections module by giving DTM2SEC command or by selecting Calculation of section elevations from Sections menu. Menu Sections > Calculation of section elevations Command line: DTM2SEC

Sections to be calculated
In this part it is possible to decide on which sections the calculation has to be performed; it is possible to calculate All the sections, only the Current one (displayed by the CAD window) or choose the Group of sections to be calculated.

Band to be calculated
For road sections, i.e. sections inserted along a horizontal alignment, it is possible to set the amount of terrain to be calculated on the left and on the right of the axis.

Calculation from
From Origin check list select the mode to use to extract the sections:

Topko

Digital model

Data used are those present inside the survey digital model:

Triangle digital model: the extraction is performed by intersection between the triangles and the vertical plane determined by the section. From the intersection you obtain the polylines that form the transversal view of the section; Break lines: the extraction is performed by the intersection between the break lines and the vertical plane determined by the section. From the intersection you obtain the polylines that form the transversal view of the section; Contour lines: the extraction is performed by the intersection between the contour lines and the vertical plane, determined by the section. From the intersection you obtain the polylines that form the transversal view of the section;

DEM
The extraction is performed by using data present inside DEM (Digital Elevation Model).

Survey points

The extraction is performed by using directly survey points, without having to build a mathematical model; this is useful especially when the section points are surveyed on site. For each point of the polyline, representing the section planimetrically, the tool verifies whether it coincides, inside the Tolerance set, with a survey point. If so, that point is used to build the cross section. 295

The option Extract description by points reports, in section drawing, the descriptions of the points used to generate the cross section; the description text is reported vertically near the point. The option Extract symbol by points code allows to report, in the section drawing, a symbol near the points used to generate the section. The symbol to report is linked to the point survey code. Codes button allows to set the following relations:

For each survey code it is possible to set a symbol/block to use to represent the point in the sections. It is necessary to set also the size to assign to the symbol/block.

Survey band

In this case a band is set, both in front and behind the section, inside which it is possible to search for the survey points; the band width is set in Band width input field. If a point is found inside the band the tool considers the projection of the point on the section and from the projection it calculates the point distance on the section. This kind of extraction is particularly useful in survey by road sections and canal or, in general, in case a group of points are surveyed transversally to the axis; since points are almost never aligned, to perform the calculation it is possible to set a band in order to consider them as they were aligned Select the option Survey points to use all the points of survey subproject, and select Survey polyline to generate the section only from survey polyline vertexes. In case sections are generated from survey points it is possible to use supplementary options: By the option Move points on cross-section line it is possible to move automatically topographic points from their original planimetric position to the projection on the section planimetric line. The option Extract description by points reports, in the section drawing, the descriptions of the points used to generate the cross section; the description text is reported vertically near the point. The option Extract symbol by points code allows to report, in the section drawing, a symbol near the points used to generate the section. The symbol to report is linked to the point survey code. Codes button allows to set the following relations:

Topko

For each survey code it is possible to set a symbol/block to use to represent the point in the sections. It is necessary to set also the size to assign to the symbol/block.

Terrain profile
For each section a horizontal line is created. It has an extension on the left which depends on the value set in the Band to be calculated on the left field and an extension on the right that depends on the value set in the Band to be calculated on the right field. The elevation of the line will be extracted from the terrain elevation set for section calculation. This option is useful when you have no other survey points except for the point on alignment or on hydraulic project and the terrain around the sections is supposed to be on the same elevation of the axis.

Project planimetry
In calculating the cross sections the tool can use the project planimetry of the axes contained in the project. This new mode of section extraction allows for example to obtain sections in which the cross sections of all the axes intersected by the section itself are represented; take for example complex projects with different road axes, tunnels, gutters, railways, etc. In such cases it is possible to create general sections cutting the whole project and then test on them the relationship, for example in terms of distance, between the axes.

Calculation options
Delete previous data: if this option is active the tool will replace the existing data with the new ones calculated. Projection on line connecting first and last point of section polyline: With this option active you can decide whether the distance, to be assigned to calculated points, must be the real distance or the distance of the point projection on the line connecting the first and the last point of the section. Press Next button to go to the second part of the calculation. The elaboration can be performed in two methods: Single: a section line is calculated from a single digital model or from a single DEM (the option Calculation from DEM must be active); Multiple: section lines are calculated from different digital models or from different DEM (the option Calculation from DEM must be active)

297

Single elaboration

The single elaboration mode is activated by selecting the option Single in the upper part of the window; select the section element to be extracted from the calculation and the subproject to be used as base of data. Press Calculate button to start the calculation. Element to calculate: indicate the only section element to be created to represent the transversal development of section. Elements by planimetry layers: In calculating the cross sections from digital triangle model, the tool can verify the layer the triangles belong to and then create distinct elements. If the triangles of the mathematical model have been assigned to different layers because they represent, for example, materials strata etc, the tool can consider this difference and create section elements separated from each other, as if the triangles belonged to distinct models. By activating this option the tool will not calculate a specific and single section element, but more section elements according to the layer the triangles belong to. The tool analyses the layer of the triangle processed and verifies whether a section element code exists, which has been assigned to the same layer; if the correspondence is found, a section element will be created with that code, otherwise a new section code will be created. Start digital model: select the subproject to be used as database.

If the sections are calculated from the project planimetry, the window does not display the whole list of survey subprojects but the list of the axis subprojects to analyse in the calculation:

Topko

Multiple elaboration

299

On the left side of the section the tool reports the section elements that can be used, while on the right side the tool reports all the projects currently opened; for each project, the tool reports all subproject, or DEM, that can be used. Select the section element to calculate and the corresponding subproject to be used as a base of data; then select Add: the elaboration is reported in the lower part of the window. Perform the same sequence of operations to extract the other section elements. If the option Elements by planimetry layers is activated, it will be possible only to add the subprojects to process, and it is not possible to associate them a section element, because the element will be obtained according to the layer the triangles belong to. Pressing button Calculate all elaborations reported in the list are carried out at the same time. This mode is particularly useful when it is necessary to extract cross sections from different mathematical models: existing terrain, project, first state of progress, etc. Once the elaboration is finished the lines calculated will appear in the CAD window. Note. Each time this command is performed, a section element is calculated; with the same data, if this command is performed more than once you can obtain several section elements overlapped that may bring to a volume calculation result higher that the real one. When you have to perform a calculation that will replace the previous one, be sure that the option Delete previous data is active.

Copy of sections
If you have to copy some, or all, the elements of a section on a group of other sections, it is possible to use this function activable by COPYSEC command or by selecting Automatic editing item and then Copy Sections from Sections menu. Menu Sections > Automatic editing > Copy Sections Command line: COPYSEC

The following dialog box appears:

Source section Number of the section containing the data to be copied; pressing on the button at a side you get into a window that lists all the sections. To select a section it is sufficient to click twice on the table line or press OK button. Destination sections Interval representing the group of sections where the elements have to be copied. It is necessary to indicate the number of the first and the last section of the group. Pressing on the button at a side you get into a window that lists all the sections. To select a section it is sufficient to click twice on the table line or press OK button. Cancel sections if the box is active, all the elements in the sections will be erased, before copying the new elements.

Topko

Pressing OK a second dialog box will appear, including all the elements that can be input in the section (see Section codes-Lines tab).

It is necessary to select the elements to copy from the source section to destination sections. Pressing OK you start copying the elements.

Cancel sections
In order to erase the whole content of a section or of a group of sections it is possible to use this function, activable by RESETSEC command, or select Reset sections item from Sections menu. Menu Sections > Automatic editing > Reset sections Command line: RESETSEC

The following dialog box appears:

In this box it is necessary to indicate the group of sections to be canceled. It is necessary to indicate the number of the first and the last section of the group. Pressing on the button at a side you get into a window that lists all the sections. To select a section it is sufficient to click twice on the table line or press OK button.

301

How to erase and modify cross sections on a mathematical model Modify

If you want to modify the position of a section, it is possible to use all the edit functions (move, copy, rotate etc.) the graphic CAD offers. On modifying the sections it is possible to verify interactively the transversal progress on model or on survey by opening the window of dynamic sections. See Dynamic Sections Note. When the planimetric position of a section is modified, it is necessary to perform again the Calculation of section elevations in order to obtain the new transversal view.

Erase
In order to erase one or more sections from the graphic CAD box, it is necessary to use the erase command used to erase any kind of entity.

Creation of sections from codes

In Control codes, it is possible to set some codes of section points which have a specific meaning for an elaboration, contained in the tool, that can be used to interpret these codes so to draw automatically the sections surveyed. By COD2SEC command or by selecting Topographic cross-sections item and then Sections from codes from D.T.M. menu, it is possible to obtain automatically the drawing of the sections. The tool interpretes survey point codes according to the rules set in Control codes and will obtain the position of the vertexes of polylines representing the sections. This operation quickens the elaborations, since it is not necessary to draw anything inside the graphic CAD. It is sufficient to give the proper codes to the points during the sections survey phase. Moreover, to obtain the transversal view of the sections elaborated it is necessary to pass to Sections module and perform Calculation of section elevations, choosing Survey points as calculation option.

Elaboration codes
The module for cross-section management allows the management of every kind of section: road, railway, hydraulic, etc. In order to make the tool as versatile as possible, the operator can define: a. b. c. the elements that make up a section (terrain line, project line, stripping line, terrain recovery line, etc); the quantities to be calculated (cut, fill, stripping, terrain recovery); the calculation procedures of the preceding quantities, which can be computed both as areas (cut and fill) and as widths (Seal coat, geotextile, topsoil). This option is available only in tools equipped with Accounting Sections module, by which it is possible to set one's own calculation rules in order to determine any quantity from the cross-sections. If the tool is not equipped with Accounting Sections module, calculation rules are fixed and allow to count the following quantities: cut and fill, backfilling, gutters, ditches and walls, pavement, stripping. hatches have to be automatically assigned to calculated areas: it is possible to fill automatically some of the calculated areas by using a hatch model so as to create a drawing understandable even to those who are not allowed to works.

d.

The management of the elaboration codes is therefore subdivided into the following phases : Definition of the codes of the elements to be inserted in the sections Definition of areas to calculate in the sections Setting area hatches (optional) An example is set from which you can learn how to personalize section calculation. An example of how to fill Elaboration codes tables.

Definition of the codes of the elements to be inserted in the sections

The definition of the codes for the elaboration of sections is activated from Sections menu, by the item Section codes; it is also possible to give ELABCOD command. In the appearing dialog box select Lines page for the management of the elements to be inserted.

Topko

This table allows to define the codes of the elements (lines) with which the sections will be built. By section elements we mean for example terrain line, project line, terrain recovery line, etc. It is not possible to insert in the sections lines that have not been inserted in this table before. This is therefore a very important table so that the sections work properly and it must absolutely be edited. If the work has been created on the basis of a model file, you will find the table already set, even if modifiable. The data required for each line are : Code: It is a code or an abbreviation used during the phase of section input in order to identify the element to be inserted or modified (there must not be equal codes!). In the table it is necessary to input codes for terrain and project lines, as defined in Cross-sections properties. Description: It is a text used to describe the kind of line. This description is reproduced in the reports of the elements and in some tables for the selection of the elements to be elaborated. The text must describe the element it represents and it must never be left empty. V.Seg: It is an indication for the drawing of the sections dimensioning and is used to trace the vertical segments connecting the points of the elements as far as the reference elevation. There are three possibilities: No. No segments traced. Complete. A complete segment is traced, connecting the points of the element to the reference elevation. Partial. The complete segment is traced only for the first and the last point. Pavement layers: the area belongs to the pavement layer. Layer. It is possible to set a layer for any element; this solution allows therefore to manage the aspect (colour and linetype) of the entities drawn. Type. The value set in this column is used by the procedure for the guided creation of area calculation sequence. It is possible to select one of the following values: None: the line has no particular meaning and will not be used for the guided creation of calculation sequence. Cut: the line represents a cut element if compared to terrain line. Fill: the line represents a fill element if compared to the lowest cut line. Pavement layers: the line belongs to the pavement layer. 303

Terrain: the line is the existing terrain line; only a line from the list can have this attribute. Project: the line is the one representing the project for cut and fill calculation; only a line from the list can have this attribute. Join: this option is used on inserting the typical sections in the cross sections. If the option is active, the segments with the same code and with the extremes in common will be joined to form lines. KZREB: not used.

Planimetry of project tab

By selecting Planimetry of project tab, in the lower part of the table, the following window appears:

In this table it is possible to specify, for each element, the different properties determining the way planimetry of project is generated and the tridimensional model of the road: Plan: this property can assume the following values: None: the element is not considered for the generation of the planimetry of project. Top line: the element is considered for the generation of the planimetry of project, but the tool will use only the element segments which are not "covered" by any other segment; only the visible part of the element will be used. It is convenient to activate this property only in case of elements at the top of the section and not for those which are under other elements. Complete: the element is considered for the generation of the planimetry of project in a complete way, so any of its segments will be reported in the planimetry of project. It is convenient to activate this property only in case of elements to be exported integrally into the planimetry of project, such as guard-rails, fences, etc. DTM break: this option must be activated for those elements along the outer part of which the terrain model must be broken. For example, in case of sections having the project line represented by the sideslope of the road and a line representing a ditch, it is necessary to select the project line code and the ditch line code; in this situation, the tool will use the ditch boundary as terrain model cut polyline and will delete automatically all triangles of the terrain inside the ditch; then the tool will perform the same operation for the project boundary.

Topko

Slope hatches: activate this option if you want to display the slope hatches drawing of the corresponding element. Hatch: in this column it is possible specify whether in project planimetry the element must be filled with a color or with a hatch choosen among those loaded in the project. See How to load hatch patterns. Angle: start angle for hatch drawing. Scale: scale factor to be applied to the hatch model. Colour: colour by which to display the hatching or full colour to use. If Slope hatches option has been activated and the slope of the segment to represent is negative, then this colour is used; otherwise, the colour set in 2nd colour property will be used. 2nd colour: colour by which to display the hatching or full colour to use. If Slope hatches option has been activated and the slope of the segment to represent is positive, then this colour is used; otherwise, the colour set in Colour property will be used. Note. By setting two different colours in Colour and Colour 2 properties for the element that defines the slope in the cross sections it is possible to have a different coloration for cut sections and fill sections respectively.

Setting area hatches

The tool allows to fill each calculated area by using a hatching model among those suggested or by using a solid color. The definition of areas hatches can be activated from Sections menu by selecting the item Section codes; you can also give ELABCOD command. In the appearing dialog box, select the Areas tab and then, in the lower part of the table, select the item Area hatches.

Code. In the first column of the table the codes of the areas, set in Area tab, are recalled. Hatch. For each area it is possible to set the hatch model chosen among those loaded in the file. See How to load hatch model. Angle. It is possible to associate a start angle to the the drawing of the hatch. Scale. It is possible to assign a scale coefficient to the drawing of the hatch. Layer. It is possible to assign a layer on which the area hatch will be drawn. The hatch will be of the color defined by the layer.

305

Cross-elements
Management of section elements
The user can completely modify sections by modifying present lines, adding new ones, erasing present lines. These operations can be done through one of the following modes: Management of section elements from graphic CAD Management of section elements from table In order to operate in a correct way the following requirements are needed:

sections must be inserted in the mathematical model or, in general, must be present as longitudinal profile stations; In Section codes dialog box data must be inserted; the codes of the elements to be inserted must be certainly present;

Section elements can be obtained also from the transformation of drawing polylines and vice versa; for example it is possible to import sections from DXF files and so transform the drawing polylines into section elements without having to insert them again. See Transformation of drawing entities.

Management of section elements from table

By selecting Cross elements item, and then Cross elements table, from Sections menu, the following table appears, where it is possible to manage (modify, insert, erase) the lines of the cross elements. It is also possible to give TBELEM command or select button from Sections Toolbar.

In the upper part there are some important data concerning the section: Section. Name of the section or progressive number. Station. Progressive distance of the section from the beginning of the axis. Terrain elevation. Terrain elevation on axis. Project elevation. Project elevation on axis. Note. Description associated to the section. Datum level. Reference elevation used in section drawing.

Topko

By using "navigator" buttons you can shift from one section to another without having to close the table, change section and open the table again. Through Details button it is possible to show the lower part of the window containing the tables with the data of the elements. In the table on the left you can find the codes of all the elements included in the section; elements with + symbol at a side are those containing points. By clicking on + symbol all the elements present in the section having that code are displayed; clicking on one of them the coordinates and the features of the single points are displayed on the table on the right. In this table the type of the element is also reported: Line or Area. Note. The coordinates of the points are referred to a local reference system, limited to the same section having 0 on the road axis, negative abscisses on the left and positive on the right; elevations have the same reference as profile elevations.

Insertion of an element
In order to insert a new element it is necessary to select the correspondent code and then select the New text that appears connected with the code. Now, go in the table on the right and insert the coordinates.

How to erase an element

In order to erase an element, first it is necessary to erase its coordinates: select, then, the element and go in the table on the right; select all the rows and then press rows erase button more elements inside an element, then the element can be erased. . When there are no

The changes made inside the table are immediately visible in the graphic CAD window.

Insertion of a terrain line

It is possible to add a polyline representing the terrain inside the section by the following modes: Toolbar Sections Menu Sections > Cross elements > Terrain Command line: SECPLINE

The following questions appear : Element type Terrain/Project/Other/<T>:T Polyline code: TER From point : End point :

The request for a Pline code can be answered by the code assigned to the terrain in the table of Section codes-Lines tab . The same code must have been set in Section properties. After inserting the code, you go on indicating the points that make up the terrain polyline.

307

Insertion of a project line

In order to add a polyline representing the project inside the section use one of the following methods: Toolbar Sections Menu Sections > Cross elements > Project Command line: SECPLINE

The following questions appear : Element type Terrain/Project/Other/<T>: Polyline code: PRO From point : End point: The request for a Pline code can be answered by the code assigned to the project in the table of Section codes-Lines tab. The same code must have been set in Section properties. After inserting the code, you go on indicating the points that make up the project polyline.

Insertion of a generic line

It is possible to add a polyline representing a line like terrain recovery, handwork, etc. inside the section, by one of the following commands: Toolbar Sections Menu Sections > Cross elements > Other Command line: SECPLINE

The following questions appear : Element type Terrain/Project/Other/<T>: O Polyline code: XXXX From point : End point : The request for a Pline code can be answered by the code of the element to be inserted; this code must have been set in the table of Section codes-Lines tab , otherwise the tool will not allow you to insert the element. After inserting the code, you can indicate the points that make up the polyline required.

Change element code

With this command it is possible to change the code of one or more elements inside the cross-section. The command can be activated through one of the following methods: Menu Sections > Cross Elements > Change element code Command line: SZCHCODE

The following questions appear: Select the element whose code has to be changed: inside the graphic window select the elements whose code you want to change. Enter new code: specify the new code that the elements selected have to assume

Topko

Create topographic point from section

In the sections graphic window it is possible to create a topographic point in the planimetry window. The point planimetric position is determined by the section planimetric position, while the elevation is that of the point indicated in the sections window. The command can be activated as follows: Menu Section > Insert topographic point... Command line: XSECINSPOINT The following prompts will appear: Point. Select the point in the graphic window or specify its coordinates. Point name. Set point name.

How to erase and modify cross-elements from graphic CAD How to erase a polyline
In order to erase the polyline of a section element directly on the graphic CAD box, it is sufficient to use the erase command used to erase any kind of entity.

How to modify a polyline

In order to modify a polyline, directly on the graphic CAD box, you can use, of an element, all the edit functions offered by the CAD.

How to import cross sections from DWG/DXF files

The procedure of importation of DWG/DXF files in cross-sections is the same performed in the planimetry graphic window but with a little difference. This difference consists in importing DWG/DXF files containing sections directly on the sections themselves; in this way it is possible to avoid having to perform manually section by section the import command. Then, the purpose is to dispose of a method that allows to carry out the importation of DWG/DXF files in groups, each one to be imported in a specific section already set. It is then necessary that sections, where DWG/DXF files will be imported, have already been created. Then, it is necessary to create a DWG/DXF file for each section; to make the tool understand which section each DWG/DXF file refers to, it is necessary to follow the rules listed below: 1. the name of all DWG/DXF files begins with the same prefix. (for example: Test). 2. together with the prefix there must be a numeric value corresponding to the number of the section the DWG/DXF file refers to; (Example: Test5.DXF refers to section n.5) To activate the command, it is necessary to select the item Import/Export from File menu and then DWG/DXF In; you can also digit DWGIN or DXFIN directly on CAD command line. The tool asks to indicate the folder where DWG/DXF files to be imported are saved and their common prefix. Finally, you are asked to indicate the group of sections where DWG/DXF files have to be imported:

309

Now, the tool will import in each section of the group the corresponding file DWG/DXF according to the rule explained before. For each polyline imported the tool verifies its layer; if the layer coincides with one of the layers assigned to one of the section elements then the tool transforms the drawing polyline into a section element having that layer. If the polylines are located in different layers it is however possible to go on with the transformation through Entities transformation command. The import command together with the export command allows, for example, to export sections on another CAD, modify them and then import them again inside the tool. See How to export cross-sections on DXF files.

How to export cross sections to DWG/DXF files

Cross-sections can be exported on DWG/DXF files by the following two methods: 1. First carry out the sections plot preview and then perform the command to export DXF file of the sheet or sheets obtained. 2. Perfom directly the command to export DWG/DXF file from one of the graphic windows containing one section. In the last case, for each section a DWG/DXF file is created and besides, through this method, sections are exported in real coodinates and are not scaled on sheet as happens with the first method. Sections in real coordinates inside another CAD represent a great advantage; in fact, it is possible to work on them without having to make particular calculations to adapt commands to the scale and moreover it is not necessary to re-scale them. In order to export sections into DWG/DXF format it is necessary to select the item Import/Export from File menu and then DWG/DXF Out; you can also digit DWGOUT or DXFOUT command directly on CAD command line. Remember to perform the command from one of the graphic windows of the sections. The tool asks to indicate the folder where to save the DWG/DXF file and the name to assign. Pressing button Options it is possible to check some parameters that regulate the creation of the DWG/DXF file. See How to export to DWG/DXF file. After having indicated the name of the DWG/DXF file to create the tool asks to indicate the group of sections to be exported:

Topko

It is necessary to indicate the number of the first and the last section of the group. Pressing on the button on the right you get into a window thast lists all the sections available. To select one section it is sufficient to click twice on the table row or press OK button. As the tool must create one DXF file for each section, it will use the name of the file set as prefix and the number of the section as suffix; so, for example, if you want to create a DXF file with the name Test, the tool will create as many DXF files as the sections to be exported are; so each file will be assigned with the name of Test1, Test2, ... , Test10, etc.

Automatic editing of elements

Automatic editing
In order to modify the section elements quickly, a set of functions have been arranged. These functions can work on a specified group of sections at the same time, so reducing working times.

Automatic editing - Move elements

Allows to move one or more elements inside each section. The procedure is activated by MOVEEL command or by selecting Automatic editing item from Sections menu, and then Move elements item. The following window appears:

It is necessary to indicate the group of sections where the shift has to be performed. It is necessary to indicate the number of the first and the last section of the group. Pressing on the button at a side you get 311

into a window that lists all the sections. To select a section it is sufficient to click twice on the table line or press OK button. In the end, it is necessary to set the shift the elements must undergo both in a horizontal and in a vertical sense. Pressing OK the tool asks you to indicate, among the available ones, the elements that have to be shifted.

Automatic editing - Erase elements

Allows to delete one or more elements inside each section. The procedure is activated by ERASEEL command or by selecting Automatic editing item from Sections menu, and then Erase elements item. A window appears, where it is necessary to indicate the number of the first and the last section of the group. Pressing on the button at a side you get into a window that lists all the sections. To select a section it is sufficient to click twice on the table line or press OK button. Pressing OK the tool asks you to indicate, among the available ones, the elements that have to be deleted.

Automatic editing - Rename elements

Allows to rename (change the code) an element inside each section. The procedure is activated by RENAMEEL command or by selecting Automatic editing item from Sections menu, and then Rename elements item. The following window appears:

It is necessary to indicate the group of sections where the code of the element has to be changed. It is necessary to indicate the number of the first and the last section of the group. Pressing on the button at a side you get into a window that lists all the sections. To select a section it is sufficient to click twice on the table line or press OK button. It is then necessary to indicate the code of the element to be renamed and the new code the element must assume. Possible codes are those of the table of Section codes-Lines tab. They can be selected directly in the window combo boxes. It is also possible to choose the type of the element to be renamed. By this way, you can transform the type of the element from Line to Area. Pressing OK the tool renames the element in the sections indicated. Note. If you want to rename more elements the procedure has to be repeated for each element.

Topko

Automatic editing - Copy elements

This function allows to copy inside each section an element already included in it. In other words, it combines the operations performed by Move elements and Rename elements functions. This procedure is activated by COPYEL command or by selecting the item Automatic editing from Sections menu, and then the item Copy elements. The following window appears:

It is necessary to indicate the group of sections where the copy of the element has to be performed. It is necessary to indicate the number of the first and the last section of the group. Pressing on the button at a side you get into a window that lists all the sections. To select a section it is sufficient to click twice on the table line or press OK button. It is then necessary to indicate the code of the element to be copied and the new code the element must assume. Possible codes are those of the table of Section codes-Lines tab. They can be selected directly in the window check lists. It is then necessary to set the shift the element must undergo both in a horizontal and in a vertical sense. Pressing OK the tool copies the chosen element renaming it with a new code and shifting it according to given values. Note. If you want to copy more elements the procedure has to be repeated for each element.

Automatic editing - Trim elements

This command allows to remove automatically all those element vertexes whose distance, both on the right and on the left side, from the main axis is higher than the one set. You can use this command when, for example, you have to calculate a section line from the mathematical model by setting a survey band higher than needed and you need to keep a lower one. The procedure can be activated by digiting command SZTRIM or by selecting the item Automatic editing from Sections menu, and then item Trim elements. The following window appears:

313

It is necessary to indicate the group of sections where the trim has to be performed. It is necessary to indicate the number of the first and the last section of the group. Pressing on the button on the right you get into a window that lists all the sections. To select a section it is sufficient to double-click on the table row or press OK. Now, you can select the element where the trim has to be performed and finally it is possible to set the data to perform the operation: Trim distance on left: if this option is active, all vertexes on the left of the axis, whose distance is higher than the value set in Distance edit box, will be erased; at the trim limit point one vertex is created whose abscissa is the trim distance and whose ordinate is the result obtained from the interpolation of the previous vertexes. Trim distance on right: if this option is active, all vertexes on the right of the axis, whose distance is higher than the value set in Distance edit box, will be erased; at the trim limit point one vertex is created whose abscissa is the trim distance and whose ordinate is the result obtained from the interpolation of the previous vertexes. Press OK to perform the operation.

Automatic editing - Rounding coordinates

Utility rounding the coordinates of the element points. This rounding will be the one set in Sections properties. The procedure is activated by the command ROUNDEL or by selecting the item Automatic editing from Sections menu, and then the item Rounding coordinates. It is necessary to indicate the group of sections where the rounding of the element has to be performed. It is necessary to indicate the number of the first and the last section of the group. Pressing on the button at a side you get into a window that lists all the sections. To select a section it is sufficient to click twice on the table line or press OK button.

Updating element properties according to code

By this command it is possible to update the colour, the layer, the line type etc of a transversal element with new settings assigned to the element code. You can use this command whenever you have complete sections and you intervene on the table of section codes to change, for example, the layer assigned to an element. Since the elements already in the table do not assume this new setting, it is necessary to update them and this is what this command performs.

Topko

The command can be activated in one of the following ways: Menu Sections: Automatic editing > Update elements properties Command line: UPDATEEL

The following dialog box will appear:

Indicate the group of sections where the elements updating must be performed. It is necessary to indicate the number of the first and the last section of the group. Pressing on button you enter a check list of the sections available. To select a section it is sufficient to click twice on the table line or press OK button.

Joining adjacent elements

By this command the adjacent elements of sections are joined together if they have the same code. In fact, it may happen you have elements with the same code, separated but with a point in common; in these cases it can be useful to join the two elements and have a single, complete element. The command can be activated in one of the following ways: Menu Sections > Automatic editing > Join elements Command line: JOINEL

315

The following dialog box will appear:

Indicate the group of sections where the elements must be joined. It is necessary to indicate the number of the first and the last section of the group. Pressing on button you enter a check list of the sections available. To select a section it is sufficient to click twice on the table line or press OK button. The following window is then displayed, where to select the elements to join:

Select the elements and press OK.

Automatic editing - Invert elements

With this command it is possible to perform an invertion of a group of sections with regard to the vertical axis; the result of this operation is the same obtained by using the command MIRROR which has the section axis as reference line. The command can be activated by digiting SZFLIPH or selecting the item Automatic editing and then the item Invert elements from Sections menu. In the appearing dialog box, it is necessary to indicate the number of the first and the last section of the group. Pressing the button on the right side you get into a window that lists all the sections. To select a section it is sufficient to double-click on the table row or press OK.

Automatic editing - Shift zero on section axis

The tool allows to manage the position of road axis also on a point different from zero. It might be necessary to move all the section so to make the zero abscissa of the section coincide with the position of the road axis. Practically, the tool performs a translation, of all the abscissas of the elements inserted,

Topko

equal to the abscissa of the road axis. If, for example, in a section the axis has a -3meters abscissa, then the abscissas of all the elements will undergo a -3 meters translation. This procedure is activated by SHIFTEL command or by selecting the item Automatic editing from Sections menu, and then the item Shift zero on section axis. It is necessary to indicate the group of sections where the shift of abscissas has to be performed. It is necessary to indicate the number of the first and the last section of the group. Pressing on the button at a side you get into a window that lists all the sections. To select a section it is sufficient to click twice on the table row or press OK button.

Automatic editing - Reduce number of vertexes

By this command it is possible to reduce the number of vertexes present inside section elements by erasing all those vertexes too close and aligned between themselves. You can use this command in case, for example, the section is calculated through the mathematical model so determining an elevated number of intersections with the sides of the triangles; using this command the number of vertexes, each of them corresponding to one intersection, can be reduced. The command can be activated in one of the following ways: Menu Sections > Automatic editing > Reduce number of vertexes Command line: RIDVERTEX

The following dialog box appears:

Indicate the group of sections in which it is necessary to perform the reduction from the first to the last section of the group. By pressing the lateral button a window is activated, for the consultation and selection of the sections available. To select a section it is sufficient to click twice on the table row or press OK. Section line code: select the element on which to carry out the reduction of the number of vertexes; The command allowing to reduce the number of section element vertexes can operate also on more elements and not only on one element at a time. Choose Multiple selection; the window containing the list of codes will appear; choose the ones to apply the reduction to:

317

It is possible to select the mode by which the tool performs the reduction: Vertex minimum distance: by activating this mode, and specifying in Distance field the minimum distance to respect for the vertexes, all the vertexes whose distance from the previous vertex is shorter than the distance set will be deleted. Vertex minimum alignment: by activating this mode, and specifying in Alignment field the minimum offset distance to respect, all the vertexes that, compared to the alignment formed by previous and next vertex, determine an offset that is shorter than the one set, will be deleted. Press OK to carry out the command.

Calculation of elementary areas

The tool allows to calculate areas and widths included in the sections according to rules defined in the Calculation sequence table. The tool allows to calculate the areas of the current station and to display directly the values calculated both from a graphic and from a numeric point of view.

Calculation of elementary areas on the current section

In order to perform the calculation of elementary areas on the current section you can operate in one of the following ways: Toolbar Cross-sections Menu Sections > Calculation of section area Command line: CALCULATE

The tool carries out the calculation of areas and widths according to rules defined in the Calculation sequence table. Visualization of calculation results on section

Visualization of volume calculation results on section

It is possible to visualize directly on the graphic CAD the data calculated concerning the elementary areas and the widths. If, in the section, something has been modified, we suggest you to perfom the recalculation of the elementary areas before executing this command. The command is activated by selecting the item Totals on screen from Sections menu, or give TOTALS command. Toolbar Cross-sections

Topko

Menu Sections > Totals on screen Command line: TOTALS

On the CAD command line, the data calculated for each element present in the section will appear. In the CAD window, the areas calculated are also highlighted so as to show to the user the result of the operation. Calculated areas can be exported directly into Opera, the tool for work accounting, by using Genius system, which allows the dynamic transfer of data between the two programs.

Volumes
Volume calculation by sections
Volume calculation is carried out by two methods: by average end area method and by equalized area method. On the basis of the data derived from the calculation of the elementary areas of the sections, it is possible to extract, for each area, the elementary figures (triangles and trapezia) that constitute it and are indispensable to carry out the calculation. The partial distances between the sections are obtained by the Table of longitudinal profile. Besides volumes, the procedure can return the values of the surfaces calculated both in projection and length. It is also possible to exclude from the calculation segments representing typical elements (ex. bridges, tunnels, etc.) Volume and area calculation on sections can be performed by considering the position of the figure barycentre compared with the axis. In this way, quantities on curve are considered with more precision. Before performing the calculation it is better to make sure that the data which are indispensable for the elaboration have been inserted properly. Many mistakes can be made. For example, it is possible you do not insert the stations of the sections, of course obtaining as a result volumes and sections equal to zero. Remember that volume calculation is performed on the basis of the data derived from the management of the cross sections. So, before performing the calculation, make sure the tables of Section codes have been compiled. Calculation requirements can be summed up as follows:

check of the stations of the sections in the table of the longitudinal profile indication of the segments of project to be excluded from the calculation

Now, it is possible to perform the calculation: How to perform volume calculation. From the window of volume calculation management it is possible not only to perform calculation, but also to display and obtain calculation results. From volume and area calculation, the tool can generate Bruckner diagram, which allows to study how cut and fill volumes alternate along a road. Bruckner Diagram . The volumes calculated can be exported directly to accountancy tool Opera by using Genius system, which allows the dynamic transfer of data between the two tools.

319

How to perform volume calculation

Once all the parameters for volume calculation have been defined it is possible to start the calculation. The elaboration can be activated from Sections menu, by the item Volume/area calculations or by giving VOLCALC command. Menu Sections > Volumes > Volume/area calculations Command line: VOLCALC

The following window appears containing:

If volume calculation has already been performed and it is necessary only to consult totals or generate reports, pass directly to Results page. Calculation page reports the list of the axis subprojects on which elaboration can be performed. Select the item in Process column, to assign the subproject corresponding to the list of subprojects to process. Volume calculation can be performed on a part of the alignment delimited by two sections; the tool proposes in From section and To section columns, the first and the last section of each axis; to perform calculation on a part of the axis indicate the sections delimiting the area to calculate. To select all the axes use Select all button; vice versa, to annul the selection on all the axes use Clear all button; Break on project button allows to open Break on volume calculation dialog box from which it is possible to choose in what segments not to perform the calculation of volumes and areas. The lower part of the window reports a list of the areas and the surfaces on which calculation can be performed; such areas have been inserted in the table Section codes, Areas to calculate.

Topko

For any single item it is possible to specify whether it must be calculated or not; to select all the items press Select all button; vice versa, to annul selection on all the items use Clear all button. To start calculation press Calculate button. At the end of the process Results page will be displayed.

The table reports, for each subproject, the list of calculated areas and quantity. Cancel button allows to delete the items selected from the list. To print areas and volumes select the items to be printed and press Print button. The following window will appear:

321

From the window select the kind of report, area or volume and then choose the mode by which to obtain the report: on printer, on screen, on PDF file, etc.

Definition of section dimensioning

This procedure allows to set the dimensioning content, the drawing sizes and other parameters that check the final result. It is possible to create different dimensioning styles, each with different settings, both as far as columns and other parameters such as sheet size, margins, etc. The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar Sections Menu Sections > Dimension... Command line: DIMENSIONING

Topko

The following dialog box appears:

Management of dimensioning styles not available in Topko Express

The upper section of the window displays styles management, which reports the list of the different styles available and allows their creation, deletion and change of name. From the list it is possible to select the style desired, whose data and settings will be displayed in the rest of the window. Any change made on columns or on any other property is saved on the style active in that moment. There is, however, a default style, called Standard. On opening the window the tool will set, as current style, the style the window was closed with, which is the style the tool will use to represent current axis sections. Duplicate button allows to perform a copy of the current style and to assign the copy a new name; the new style becomes the active style. Delete button allows to delete the current style and all its settings. Standard style cannot be deleted. Moreover it is not possible to delete the styles which are used by some sections. Rename button allows to change the name of the current style. Standard style cannot be renamed.

To set the default style the tool will have to use to generate the final drawing of the current axis profile it is sufficient to select from the list the style desired and close the window pressing OK button.

To import dimensioning styles from a work to another it is necessary to use the command in File > Import/Export > ProSt/Topko Win In and select the item Section dimensioning.

323

Setting style on single sections

The style set in Drawing dimensioning window identifies the style all the current subproject sections will be represented with. It is however possible to assign, for every single section, a specific style. This setting is performed from the window reporting the data of all the sections: name, station, terrain elevation, project elevation, etc. The table can be opened as follows:

Planimetry
Toolbar Axis Menu Axis > Profile/Sections > Table Command line: TBPROFILE

Profile
Toolbar Profile Menu Profile > Terrain and Project > Table Command line: TBPROFILE

Sections
Toolbar Sections Menu Sections > Profile/Sections Command line: TBPROFILE

In the window now appearing select Datum Lev./Axis:

By Dimension style column it is possible to set, for each section, the style to use. It is possible to choose between the style named Default and then among all the styles defined, included Standard style. The style named Default is the style chosen, in Profile dimension, as the style to use for sections. Therefore, if a section uses Default style, it uses the style defined in profile dimension window; otherwise, it can use a style among the others available.

Topko

Definition of section dimensioning - Dimensioning tab

The data required for each line of the table are the following: Use. By this option it is possible to activate and deactivate the display of every single dimensioning in the sections; to hide a dimensioning it is not necessary to delete the row in the table; it is sufficient to deactivate it; Code: code of the element to be quoted in the dimensioning. This code must be one of the codes set in the table of Section codes - Lines tab. Type. Type of data to be displayed for the element with its code indicated. Possible types are: Num. - Point number progressive number of the point (printed near the point); Elev. - Elevation elevation of the point (printed near the point); Prog. - Progressive progressive distance (printed near the point); Parz. - Partial partial distance (printed between two progressive points); Slope - Slope slope of the section segment (printed between two progressive points); H.Dif. - Height difference difference in height of the section segment (printed between two progressive points); PrIn. - Slope Progressive progressive distance inclined (printed near the point); PzIn. - Slope Partial partial distance inclined (printed between two progressive points); H.Dif. Height difference reports the height differences between any section lines

AreaY - Elementary area elevations elevations of points belonging to areas which have this code 325

DeltY - Elementary area difference difference of elevation between points belonging to areas which have that code; AreaX - Elementary area distance progressive distances of points belonging to areas which have that code; DeltX - Elementary area partials partial distances between points belonging to areas which have that code; NArea - Elementary area number progressive number of elementary area; Sup.E - Area higher elevation elevation of higher points belonging to areas which have that code; Inf.E - Area lower elevation elevation of lower points belonging to areas which have that code; East - Point East Coordinate East planimetric coordinate of section point; North - Point North Coordinate North planimetric coordinate of section point; Name - Point name name of survey point, only if the section is a topographic section and linked to survey points; -Ar- - Integrative area completes the line data by interpolating the elevations near the beginning and the end of the lementary areas. ..... - Integrative Used to optimize the number of the dimensioning rows since you obtain the representation of two or more lines in a single row. When a line of the table is followed by one or more integrative lines, the tool represents them by drawing a single row that contains the line data along with the data of the following integrative lines. Title Text reproduced in the dimensioning heading which describes the row. U Not available. H Horizontal label. S Complete segment in row. C Centered label. R If active, very close labels will not be displayed:

Example R not active

Example R active

H.Row height of row in mm. H.Char. height of characters in mm. W.Char. width of characters in mm. N.Dec. number of decimals to display the values with.

Topko

How to calculate the difference of elevation between terrain and project

To obtain height difference between two section elements set data as follows:

Code: set code of reference element; Type: choose option Elev.Dif.; Aux. code: set the code of the section element with which to calculate the difference.

Dimensionig colors
A specific page allows to set title and dimensioning colours in the section dimensioning; it is therefore possible to manage different colours for the different dimensioning rows. The following window will appear:

In this table, for each dimensioning row it is possible to set the colour to be used for the title text and for the texts reporting the dimensioning data. Besides standard colours also the options Default and From layer are available: Default: a layer is used, that the system has prearranged for the title or the dimensioning. Predefined layers are managed by the command available in Format > Layer entities menu. From Layer: uses the colour applied to the layer the element to dimension belongs to; for example, the dimensioning of TER element, belonging to TERRAIN layer, will be drawn with the colour assigned to that layer. To change the display order of the dimensioning rows use table. and buttons, situated below the

327

Definition of section dimensioning - Layout tab

In this tab it is possible to set some sizes and parameters concerning the section drawing.

Sheet (single section)

Allows to set the width and the height of the sheet that will contain every single section. It is possible to set also right, left, upper and lower margins.

Formula grid
On the left side of the drawing, it allows to set the space reserved to the report of area formulas; besides, it is possible to choose the type of formula to print. The definition of the areas to print is performed in the Section codes window.

Grid
The sections drawing can be completed by a grid reporting the values of the distance from the axis and the elevation. X Axis grid: indicates whether you want to generate the reference grid on the distance axis. Step: distance between grid lines. Y Axis grid: indicates whether you want to generate the reference grid on the elevation axis. Step: distance between grid lines. Passo: elevation difference between grid lines. Grid texts are displayed according to the style specified in Text styles tab.

Topko

Aspect
Squaring sheet. It is possible to choose the kind of squaring to apply to the section by selecting the possible types in Squaring sheet box. It is possible to perform the choice also by clicking on the image preview. Heading width. Sets the size of the dimensioning heading, the one containing the description of the row. Display subproject name on the axis: If this option is active the section drawing reports the name of the corresponding axis. Such option is particularly useful in case we use correlated sections which determine, in displaying a section, the drawing of the lateral axes sections. Multiple sections dimensioning. Activates the dimensions in the dimensioning also of multiple sections; otherwise only the dimensioning of the main section will be kept. Drawing title. It is possible to decide whether (and where in the sheet) to print the section title. Round Datum Level m. The tool asks to specify the rounding value of the reference elevation in case this is calculated by the tool. If, for example, the reference elevation calculated is 143.372, it is possible to set the rounding at 0.5 to obtain 143.5 as reference elevation.

Definition of section dimensioning - Text tab

Personalizable texts
For every text reproduced on the left it is possible to set the real text to be printed. It is useful especially when it is necessary to comment the drawings using a foreign language.

Characters size
It is possible to set the size (height, width) of the characters used in the different kinds of texts used in the drawing. 329

Definition of section dimensioning - Text style tab

Fonts. It is possible to specify the fonts to be used in the dimensioning of the sections as to the elevation texts, the headings, the tables and the titles. See Loading fonts.

Printing section reports

There are two types of section reports: reports of elements and reports of areas.

Printing section reports - Distance and elevation

In order to obtain the report of the coodinates of the element points, it is necessary to select the item Print from File menu, or digit PRINT on the CAD command line. In the appearing dialog box select Sections-Elements tab. It is then sufficient to select the option Distance and elevation. The tool will ask you to indicate the group of sections whose report you need to be printed; in the appearing dialog box it is possible to select the elements, among those present inside the section, whose point coodinates have to be printed. Each section data (abscissa and ordinate) concerning the selected element points are printed.

Printing section reports - Plano-altimetric position

In order to obtain the report of the plano-altimetric coordinates of the element points, it is necessary to select the item Print from the File menu, or digit PRINT command on the CAD command line. In the appearing dialog box select Sections - Elements tab. It is then sufficient to select the option Planoaltimetric position. The tool will ask you to indicate the group of sections whose report you need to be printed; in the appearing dialog box, it is possible to select the elements, among those present inside the section, whose point coodinates have to be printed. For each section, the planimetric data (N, E and elevation) of the selected element points are printed.

Topko

Printing section reports - Elementary areas

There are four different types of reports concerning the elementary areas calculated. Reports can be activated by selecting the item Print from File menu, or digiting PRINT command on the CAD command line. In the appearing dialog box select Sections-Areas tab. Areas and lenghts. The data of each section are printed concerning the quantities calculated (areas and lengths). Report with factors. Elevations and distances between the points forming the area are reported for each section. The height to average and the distance (width) of the area are also reported. Analytic formulas. The analytic formulas used for the calculation of the areas of trapezoids and triangles are reported in three different modes.

Printing section reports - Areas and lengths

In order to print the report of the areas and lengths calculated it is necessary to select the item Print from File menu, or digit PRINT command on the CAD command line. In the appearing dialog box select Sections-Areas tab. It is then sufficient to select the option Areas and lengths. The tool will ask you to indicate the group of sections whose report you need to be printed. Each section data concerning the quantities (areas and lengths) calculated are printed.

Topographic profiles
Topko M includes the complete management of topographic profiles: it is possible to insert a planimetric profile, as well as to insert, either automatically or manually, the sections along the axis defined. It is then possible to calculate a longitudinal profile, complete with customizable dimensioning. Profile data can also be inserted by station and elevation, without having first to define the topographic profile and then calculate the elevations from a survey. A topographic profile is an entity resembling the polyline made of contiguous segments and is saved in Axis-type subprojects. Each axis-type subproject can contain a single topographic profile. The insertion of a topographic profile is performed in planimetry graphic window. Along the topographic profile it is possible to insert automatically, or manually, some cross sections; any topographic profile has its own sections, distinct from the sections of other profiles. The management of the cross sections connected to the topographic profile can be performed also by a specific table which, for each section, reports station, terrain elevation, and project elevation. A longitudinal profile is displayed in a specific graphic window, the profile graphic window, where the different sections are reported at their station and elevation. Moreover, it is possible to obtain the real profile of the topographic profile, that is to say the intersection between the profile and the terrain mathematical model. Section elevations can be obtained automatically from a mathematical model or from a set of topographic points. Besides the main profile, it is possible to manage up to 4 other supplementary profiles, each constituted by its own set of sections, with its own station and elevation. Profile dimensioning can be completely customized, and allows to insert all kinds of dimensioning necessary: elevations, stations, partials, elevation differences, etc. Some reports are also available, which specify the different data managed by the profile.

The functions introduced are the following: Insert a topographic profile Insert sections along a topographic profile Delete and modify topographic profiles Profile table Topographic profile sort 331

Activate profile graphic window Profile properties Calculate topographic profile elevations Extract other elevations from a topographic profile Calculation of the real profile of a topographic profile Manage supplementary profiles Profile dimensioning Print profile or plot preview Print profile

Some of the above mentioned functions are common to ProSt planning design modules, of which Topko uses only a part. For this reason, in the explanation concerning some commands, it is possible to find the description of functions and options available only in ProSt and not in Topko M.

Longitudinal profile properties

Many data and parameters concerning not the open project but the subproject that is active among the road axes subprojects, are grouped in this section. This means that inside any project there can be more road axes subprojects, each one with its own properties, apart from the others. The management of planimetry properties is activated from Profile, by the item Longitudinal profile properties; as usual, it is possible to give DDPRPROP command.

Topko

General tab

In this page it is possible to modify some parameters concerning the drawing of the profile: Scale. Setting a scale for elevations and distances; Profile type. Specifying if it is a road or a hydraulic profile; Miscellaneous. Allows to set a reference elevation for the drawing of the profile and the initial progressive of the road alignment. Therefore, in order to calculate the planimetric position of a point, the procedure subtracts this value to the progressive of the point so to obtain the progressive referred to the beginning of the alignment. Grade lines and vertical curves: sets a group of grade lines and vertical curves currently active. Reference axis: In generating the longitudinal profile final drawing it is possible to add some dimensioning referred to a different axis in the project. This option is particularly useful in case of parallel or pseudo-parallel alignments, since it makes possible to verify, at each station, the alignment elements contained in the secondary axis. Select from the list the axis whose horizontal alignment must be reported in the current profile drawing. OK button confirms the changes made, while button Cancel exits the dialog box without making any change.

333

Drawing filters tab

By this page you can check the visualization of all the entities of the active subproject: if the check box is active, then the corresponding entity will be visible, if not it will be invisible. OK button confirms the changes made, while button Cancel exits the dialog box without making any change.

Titles tab

In order to set the description associated to the active subproject it is sufficient to insert it in the last two rows of this tab. It is impossible to edit the first two rows, since they report the description associated to the project.

Topko

OK button confirms the changes made, while button Cancel exits the dialog box without making any change.

Insert topographic profile

By this command it is possible to create a topographic profile in planimetry graphic window. The topographic profile is saved in the Axis-type current subproject. If Axis-type current subproject already contains a topographic profile, it is not possible to add a new profile and it is necessary to create a new Axis-type subproject. See Create subproject.

The command allowing the creation of a new topographic profile can be activated as follows: Toolbar DTM Menu DTM > Topographic profile > Insert profile Command line: PROFILE

On CAD command line the following prompts will appear: Start point: End point : ... It is therefore necessary to indicate all the points determining the path followed by the profile. To extract the profile directly from survey points, profile vertexes must coincide with topographic points. On inserting the longitudinal profile it is possible to verify interactively the length of the profile on model or on survey by opening the window of dynamic profile. See Dynamic Profile. After inserting a topographic profile it is necessary to perform the elaboration of profile sort; in this way we shall define the extreme of the topographic profile chosen as profile origin. See Topographic profile sort.

Dynamic profile
By the management of dynamic topographic profiles it is possible to open a window which displays dynamically the longitudinal length of a topographic profile in the following situations:

insertion selection modify by grips modify by Move and Rotate commands (only for topographic sections)

The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar View Menu View > Dynamic Profile/Cross-Sections Command line: DYNPROFXSEC

335

The following window will appear:

The upper side of the window reports a toolbar, allowing to set calculation mode and display of the dynamic profile.

The first 6 buttons allow to choose the data source to use to calculate the profile: Profile is calculated by using line mathematical model (break lines / constraints) Profile is calculated by using triangle mathematical model Profile is calculated by using contour lines Profile is calculated by using survey points Profile is calculated by using the survey points situated within a certain band. Profile is calculated by using DEM. The following check list reports the survey subprojects available. It is possible to calculate the profile by using more models at the same time.; it is sufficient to activate calculation on model by turning on the corresponding light.

Topko

By

button it is possible to set some window properties:

Also in this window it is possible to choose the data source to use; it is also possible to specify some parameters such as the width of the survey band within which to consider the points to use to extract the profile. Finally, it is possible to set the ratio between the display scale of elevations and distances. Dynamic profile window will display the topographic profile longitudinal length, on executing the following commands: Insertion: on inserting a topographic profile, the profile longitudinal length will appear in the window of dynamic profile. Selection: by selecting a topographic profile from the graphic window, the profile longitudinal length will appear in the window of dynamic profile. Modify by grips: by selecting a topographic profile and stretching its grips, the profile longitudinal length will appear in the window of dynamic profile. Modify by Move and Rotate: by using Move and Rotate command on a topographic profile, the profile longitudinal length will appear in the window of dynamic profile.

Insert sections on a topographic profile

After defining a topographic profile it is possible to pass to the insertion of the cross sections along it. Sections can be inserted automatically, by defining the distance between sections, or manually, by defining what position the section must be inserted in.

Automatic insertion
The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar DTM Menu DTM > Topographic Profile > Automatic Insertion of cross sections Command line: ASEZ

On command line the following prompts will appear: Indicate axis on which to insert cross sections: Indicate the topographic profile on which to insert the sections. 337

The following dialog box will appear:

Sections can be inserted along the profile according to two modes: Insert cross sections with fixed step: sections are inserted at a fixed distance from each other; set in Insertion step text box the desired distance between sections. Insert cross sections only on main points: sections are inserted only on the vertexes of the topographic profile. Minimum distance of sections: if both the previous modes have been activated, it is possible to set the minimum distance between two consecutive sections.

Once the process has come to an end, cross sections will be positioned along the profile and it will be possible to see / modify cross sections stations from the Table of Longitudinal profile.

Manual insertion
The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar DTM Menu DTM > Topographic Profile > Manual insertion of cross sections Command line: MSEZ

On CAD command line the following prompts will appear: Manual insertion by Segment / poiNt / Station / <S>:

Insertion by segment
Insertion by segment allows to insert the section by indicating its position directly on the topographic profile by defining a segment intersecting the profile itself. Manual insertion by segment / poiNt / Station / <S>: S Segment first point: Segment second point: It is necessary to indicate two points so that the segment they form can intersect the topographic profile. The section will be inserted on the intersection point.

Insertion by Point
Insertion by point allows to insert the section by indicating its position with a point throgh which the section must pass.

Topko

Manual insertion by Segment / poiNt / Station / <S>: N Indicate point position:

Insertion by Station
The section will be inserted on the station indicated. Manual insertion by segment / poiNt / Station / <S>: P Insertion of cross-section station:

possible to see / modify the stations of the cross section inserted from the Table of Longitudinal profile.

Delete and modify topographic profiles

Modify
If you want to modify the shape or the position of a topographic profile it is possible to use all the edit functions available in the graphic CAD (move, copy, rotate, etc.) On modifying the longitudinal profile it is possible to verify interactively the length of the profile on model or on survey by opening the window of dynamic profile. See Dynamic Profile. Note. When the planimetric position of a profile vertex is modified, it is necessary to perform again the Calculation of profile elevations in order to obtain the new longitudinal profile.

Cancel
To cancel one or more topographic profiles from graphic CAD window it is sufficient to use the cancel command used to cancel any kind of entity.

Table of longitudinal profile

This table contains profile data of terrain and of project. There is a link between the content of this table and the cross sections: in fact, any profile station is a cross section. As far as topographic sections on a mathematical model, this table can be used only to insert the distances between the sections in order to calculate the volumes. The table can be activated from all of the tool graphic modules: Planimetry, Profile and Sections.

Planimetry
Toolbar Axis Menu Axis > Profile/Sections > Table Command line: TBPROFIL

Profile
Toolbar Profile Menu Profile > Terrain and Project > Table Command line: TBPROFIL

Sections
Toolbar Profile 339

Menu Sections > Profile/Sections Command line: TBPROFIL

Here following you will find some of the options of the longitudinal profile table: a. As for other tables included in the tool, the table of longitudinal profile is made up of seven alternative tables provided in order to manage the different types of data: Longitudinal profile (standard) Datum level/ Axis The various kinds of tables are activated by selecting the different tabs located at the bottom part of the dialog box. b. c. d. Local menu which offers a set of utilities; Every change made on the table data has an immediate consequence on the graphic CAD window and vice versa; The table can stay open together with the CAD window, thus offering a double display of data, both from a graphic and from a table point of view.

Table of longitudinal profile (Standard)

The table needs the following data for each station: Name. Name of the section; if the value is absent the section number is used. Station. Progressive distance; Part.Dst. Partial distance; Terr.Elev. Terrain elevation; Proj.Elev. Project elevation; Description. Station-related description.

Topko

Table of longitudinal profile, Datum level Axis

The table needs the following data for each station : Name. Name of the section; if the value is absent the section number is used; Station. Progressive distance; Part.Dst. Partial distance; Terr.Elev. Terrain elevation; Proj.Elev. Project elevation; Datum Level. Reference elevation for a single cross section; if the field is empty the elevation is calculated automatically; Axis Pos. Abscissa representing the position of the axis inside the section; Dimensioning style: dimensioning style to use to represent the section.

How to erase and modify profile stations from the graphic CAD Modify
If you want to modify distance and elevation of a station directly from the graphic CAD, you can use all the edit functions offered by the graphic CAD (move, copy, rotate, etc.). A rapid means to modify distance and elevation of a station is to use Grips (see Grips). Each station has two grips: one near the reference elevation and the other near the station elevation. You have to use the first in case it is necessary to change the distance, the second when you have to change the elevation. In case of terrain and project stations there are three grips: one near the reference elevation, one near the terrain elevation and the last near the project elevation.

Erase
In order to erase one or more stations from the graphic CAD it is sufficient to use the erasing command used to erase any kind of entity.

Sort topographic profile

Profile sort is a process that is necessary to define the exterme of the topographic profile chosen as start point. The command can be started in one of the following ways: Toolbar DTM Menu DTM > Topographic Profile > Sort profile Command line: SORTPLAN

On the CAD command line the following prompt will appear: Axis Sort ** Indicate start extremity of first axis element **: Indicate the profile extremity chosen as start point.

341

Activate profile graphic window

After defining the position of the profile from a planimetric point of view, by inserting the topographic profile, it is possible to pass to the graphic window displaying the longitudinal profile: the graphic window reporting on X axis the stations and, on Y axis, the elevations. Profile graphic window, as far as the current axis, can be activated as follows: Toolbar Standard > Longitudinal profile

Menu File > Open module > Longitudinal Profile

Profile codes
By the table of profile codes it is possible to set some parameters concerning the elements managed by the profile. The table of profile codes is activated by one of the following modes: Menu Profile > Profile codes Command line: PROFCOD The appearing dialog box is made up of four different tabs, one for each type of codes present in the profile.

Grade lines and vertical curves tab

This table lists all the groups of grade lines and vertical curves available. For each of them it is possible to set a customized description.

Topko

Profile Drawing tab

In the tab the entities are reported which are managed by the longitudinal profile module. Each one of them is marked by a code that is used in order to recall them during certain elaborations. Description. It is possible to modify the description associated only to the supplementary profiles, those having 2LN, 3LN, 4LN and 5LN codes. The new description is automatically reported in the menus concerning the Supplementary profiles. V.Seg. It is possible to set the drawing of the vertical segments of the elements considered. Offset. Value to be added to the number of the section in order to obtain its name when this has not been inserted. To be used in case the profile starts from a section having a number above 1.

Supplementary data tab

343

In this tab codes and their descriptions are reported which can be recalled in Supplementary data table and in Profile dimensioning tab.

Profile polylines tab

In this tab codes and their descriptions are reported of profile polylines that can be calculated from different elaborations and can be recalled in Profile dimensioning.

Calculation of profile elevations

It is possible to calculate elevations not only of terrain and/or project profiles but also the elevations of supplementary profiles. Calculation procedure is activated through one of the following methods: Menu Profile > Calculation of profile elevations Command line: DTM2PRO

Topko

The following window appears:

Profile calculations of: Selecting the kind of profile to be calculated; ...From...: . Selecting the mode to be used for the calculation of elevations: Triangles digital model: every station elevation is determined on the surface of a triangle mathematical model. DEM: every station elevation is determined by using data present inside DEM (Digital Elevation Model). Cross-sections: this option is active only for the calculation of terrain and project elevation; every station elevation is obtained from the elevation on center line of the terrain or project line present in the cross sections. Topographic points: every station elevation is obtained by verifying if the planimetric position of every point coincides, within the tolerance set, with the survey point indicated; if the tool verifies that a profile station coincides with a survey point, it gives the station itself the point elevation; Grade lines and vertical curves: the elevation is calculated by interpolating the stake station on the grade lines and the curves in the group of grade lines and curves selected. Profile polyline: the elevation is calculated by interpolating the station progressive on a profile polyline to be found in the work with the code indicated. See Profile polylines. Select sections: indicate from which section to which section the calculation has to be performed; use buttons on the right of the edit box to consult the list of sections. Elevation to add to calculated elevation: to the calculated elevation it is possible to add a value, positive or negative. By pressing button Calculate the tool goes on with the calculation of elevations as set before. If the calculation has to be performed with the mathematical model or the survey points or with DEM, you will be asked to indicate the survey or the DEM from where data must be taken.

345

Extraction of profiles
It is possible to extract new profiles according to different options. The procedure is activated by one of the following methods: Menu Profile > Extraction of profiles Command line: PRO2PRO

Profile extraction from planimetry

Select Planimetry tab:

Extract profile of: select the kind of profile to calculate among the active ones. Note. Some options are active only when the option has been selected, that specifies the source the data will be calculated from.

Topko

From mathematical model

The profile desired is obtained by the intersection between the axis and the data of the mathematical model. Then, it will be necessary to indicate the mathematical model to use to generate the profile. The profile generated in this way represents the real profile, since it reports all the intersections between the road axis and the mathematical model. In case the profile is extracted from a triangle model, it is possible to obtain the profile on axis by setting value 0 in input field Distance from axis; on the contrary, by setting a different value it is possible to obtain the profile at a certain distance from axis. If this distance is not constant, it is possible to create a planimetry polyline and have its terrain profile projected on reference axis; in this case it is necessary to set the option Planimetry polyline and the code of the polyline to be processed.

From survey polyline

The profile is obtained by the projection of a survey polyline on the reference axis. It is possible to specify the code of the survey polyline and the maximum width of the band within which to accept the projection; the polyline vertexes situated at a distance from reference axis exceeding band width will not be projected.

From planimetry polyline

The profile is obtained by the projection of a planimetry polyline on the reference axis. It is possible to specify the code of the planimetry polyline and the maximum width of the band within which to accept the projection; the polyline vertexes situated at a distance from reference axis exceeding band width will not be projected.

347

From band

The profile desired is generated by using the survey points situated inside a certain band from the axis set. The width of the band is set by using Band width field. The option Move points on axis allows to perform the shift of the planimetric position of topographic points on reference axis.

From differential levelling

Profile elevations are determined by using data coming from differential leveling.

Calculation of real profile

Real profile is the actual development of terrain along the whole alignment; it coincides with the traditional profile on sections, while it can be different elsewhere. The real profile makes it possible to check the correct location of stakes on all the main points of the alignment. If the real profile changes remarkably between a stake and the following one, then it is better to add new stakes in that area, to improve the quality of the final result, mostly as far as the accuracy of volume calculation.

Calculation of real profile

Calculation command can be activated as follows: Menu Profile > Profile extraction Command line: PRO2PRO

Topko

Select Planimerty page:

In the group of checks on the left select the option Profile polyline and choose one of the profile polylines listed. The profile polylines available are managed in Profile codes window.

In the group of checks on the right select the kind of datum to use to calculate the real profile. Press Calculate button to start calculating the profile polyline representing the real profile.

Real profile drawing

As far as the generation of the profile final drawing, usually a drawing is required, representing the real profile but reporting the elevations only on section stakes. In fact, the drawing of a terrain stake is formed by a vertical line, from reference elevation to terrain elevation, on stake station and by two lines linking the stake with the terrain elevations of the preceding and following stake. These two lines must not be displayed when the real profile too is available. It is possible not to obtain the drawing of these two lines by modifying the settings of Profile codes. The table of profile codes is activated in one of the following ways: Menu Profile > Profile codes Command line: PROFCOD

349

Select the page Profile drawing:

The first line represents terrain profile; in this line remove selection on column S.Seg (inclined segments). In this way, inclined segments, linking a terrain stake to the following one, will not be drawn. On the contrary, V.Seg, vertical segments, will be drawn on terrain stake.

Supplementary profiles
Supplementary profiles are lines of profile used to indicate for example ditch or wall profiles, the piezometric of hydraulic profiles or the profile of edges in the planning of a road. Supplementary profiles can be inserted manually from the specific table or directly from the graphic CAD. Besides, there are some functions which allow to calculate or extract supplementary profiles from sections, from mathematical model etc.

Table of supplementary profiles

The profile supplementary profiles table is activated in one of the following ways: Menu Profile > Supplementary profiles Command line: TBSPROFILE

Topko

The following window appears:

For every profile section, it is possible to set name, progressive distance, partial distance, elevation and a description.

How to erase and modify profile stations from the graphic CAD Modify
If you want to modify distance and elevation of a station directly from the graphic CAD, you can use all the edit functions offered by the graphic CAD (move, copy, rotate, etc.). A rapid means to modify distance and elevation of a station is to use Grips (see Grips). Each station has two grips: one near the reference elevation and the other near the station elevation. You have to use the first in case it is necessary to change the distance, the second when you have to change the elevation. In case of terrain and project stations there are three grips: one near the reference elevation, one near the terrain elevation and the last near the project elevation.

Erase
In order to erase one or more stations from the graphic CAD it is sufficient to use the erasing command used to erase any kind of entity.

Definition of profile dimensioning

This procedure allows to set the dimensioning content, the drawing sizes and other parameters that check the final result. It is possible to create different dimensioning styles, each with different settings both as far as columns and other parameters such as sheet size, margins, etc. Menu Profile > Profile dimension Command line : DIMENSIONING

351

The following window appears :

Managing dimensioning styles

The upper section of the window displays styles management, which reports the list of the different styles available and allows their creation, deletion and change of name. From the list it is possible to select the style desired, whose data and settings will be displayed in the rest of the window. Any change made on columns or on any other property is saved on the style active in that moment. There is, however, a default style, called Standard. On opening the window the tool will set, as current style, the style the window was closed with, which is the style the tool will use on generating the drawing of the current project final profile. Duplicate button allows to perform a copy of the current style and to assign the copy a new name; the new style becomes the active style. Delete button allows to delete the current style and all its settings. Standard style cannot be deleted. Rename button allows to change the name of the current style. Standard style cannot be renamed. To set the style the tool will have to use to generate the final drawing of the current axis profile it is sufficient to select from the list the style desired and close the window pressing OK button. To import dimensioning styles from a work to another it is necessary to use the command in File > Import/Export > ProSt/Topko Win In and select the item Profile dimensioning.

Topko

Dimensioning tab

The window is made up of two pages, Dimensioning data, where it is possible to set the information concerning the data to be displayed in the dimensioning, and Dimensioning colors, where to choose the dimensioning graphic settings.

Dimensioning data
The data required for each line of the table are the following: Code: code of the element to be quoted in the dimensioning. This code must be one of the following codes: TER Terrain line PRO Project line 2LN 2 Supplementary profile 3LN 3 Supplementary profile 4LN 4 Supplementary profile 5LN 5 Supplementary profile HDIFF the difference between terrain and project elevations is reported near the terrain sections. DIAM The value of the pipeline diameter is reported between two sections. SUMP The SUMP field text in the table of longitudinal profile (hydraulic mode) is reported. HECTOM Hectometrics are reported. Hectometrics are indicated at the distance set in the Hectometric item in the Layout page of the dialog box. GRADELN The data concerning any grade lines are reported, in particular: length, elevation difference and slope. The three data are reported one below the other, so the row height must be 353

adequate. In this case the dimensioning is reported, concerning the current group of grade lines and curves. To dimension a different group of grade lines and curves, select the specific code proposed at the end of the list. ALIGN the alignment is reported. VALIGN the vertical alignment is reported. ALIGN1R - reports the horizontal alignment where the representation of the curves considers 1/R ratio. In this way, a curve with a shorter radius is drawn at a bigger distance from central axis than a curve with a longer radius. ALIGNREF - reports the horizontal alignment of another axis in the project. This option is very useful in case of parallel or pseudo-parallel alignments, since it allows to verify, at each station, the alignment elements situated in the secondary axis. The reference axis, the horizontal alignment of which can be obtained in the dimensioning of the current profile drawing, can be set in the window of Profile properties. ALIGN1RREF - reports the horizontal alignment, with curves represented by considering 1/R ratio, of another axis in the project. This option is very useful in case of parallel or pseudo-parallel alignments, since it allows to verify, at each station, the alignment elements situated in the secondary axis. The reference axis, the horizontal alignment of which can be obtained in the dimensioning of the current profile drawing, can be set in the window of Profile properties. ALIGNDEV the alignment deviation graphic is reported with deviation angles; it is used in hydraulic profiles in order to display the deviation among the various branches of the pipelines. EDGES the position of the edges obtained from cross sections is reported. WIDEN the widening in curve, obtained from cross sections, is reported.

SIGHT: In this column sight diagram is drawn in the direction followed by the road alignment. INVSIGHT: In this column sight diagram is drawn in the direction opposite to the one followed by the road alignment. SPEED: This column reports the speed diagram of the road alignment. If the height of the column is set on "0" the tool will adapt it automatically to the size of the sheet set.
SGHWIDLH: reports the left widening calculated by sight diagram. SGHWIDRH: reports the right widening calculated by sight diagram.

Besides these standard codes, the list includes also the codes of the groups of grade lines and curves, the codes of supplementary data and the codes of the profile polylines inserted in Profile codes table. In order to obtain the report of additional data or the dimensioning of profile polylines select the respective code. Type : Type of data to be displayed for the element with its code indicated. Possible types are: Num. - Point number progressive number of the section point (printed near the section); Elev.- Elevations elevation of the point (printed near the section); Prog. - Progressive progressive distance (printed near the section); Parz. - Partials partial distance (printed between two progressive points); Slope - Slope slope of the profile segment (printed between two progressive points); H.Dif. - Height difference difference in height of the profile segment (printed between two progressive points); PrIn. - Slope Progressive progressive distance inclined (printed near the section); PzIn. - Slope Partial partial distance inclined (printed between two progressive points); El.Dif. - Elevation difference Indicates that the elevation difference between the element in Code column and the element in Code Aux. column will be calculated: by this means, it is possible to calculate the elevation difference between an element and another. East - Point East Coordinate the East planimetric coordinate of the station is displayed.

Topko

North - Point North Coordinate the North planimetric coordinate of the station is displayed. St.AR - Stations on reference axis. Stations referred to another axis. Therefore, station values are not referred to the axis corresponding to the profile but to another one, more or less parallel to the one considered, which is the real reference to the design. The reference axis to use to report the stations referred to it can be set in the window of Project properties. Pt.AR - Partial stations on reference axis. Partial distances referred to another axis. Partial distance values are not referred to the axis corresponding to the profile but to another one, more or less parallel to the one considered, which is the real reference to the design. The reference axis to use to report the partial stations referred to it can be set in the window of Project properties. .... - Integrative Used to optimize the number of the dimensioning rows since you obtain the representation of two or more lines in a single row. When a line of the table is followed by one or more integrative lines, the tool represents them by drawing a single row that contains the line data along with the data of the following integrative lines. Title: Text reproduced in the dimensioning heading which describes the row; U if it is active the dimensioning row is reported in the upper part of the drawing. H Horizontal label. S if it is active a complete segment in row is inserted. C Centered label. R If active close labels are not displayed:

Example R not active

Example R active

H.Row height of row in mm; H.Char. height of characters in mm; W.Char. width of characters in mm; N.Dec. number of decimals to be displayed with the values; Aux.Code Auxiliary code to be used in case you set the option El.Dif. in Type column.

355

Dimensionig colors
A specific page allows to set title and dimensioning colour in the section dimensioning; in this way it is possible to manage different colours for the different dimensioning rows. The following window will appear:

In this table, for any dimensioning row, it is possible to set the colour to use for the text title and for the texts reporting dimensioning data. Besides the colour standard list, the options Default and From layer are available: Default: uses the layer predefined by the system for title or dimensioning. Predefined layers are managed by the command available in Format > Entities layer command. From Layer: uses the colour assigned to the layer the element to dimension belongs to; for example, the dimensioning of TER element, which belongs to TERRAIN layer, will be drawn with the colour assigned to that layer. In order to change the dimensioning rows display order use buttons table. and situated under the

Topko

Layout tab

In this tab it is possible to set some sizes and parameters concerning the drawing of a profile.

Sheet data
Allows to set the height of the sheet that will contain the profile. It is possible to set also right, left, upper and lower margins.

Datum level
Round datum level the tool asks to specify the rounding value of the reference elevation in case this is calculated by the tool. If, for example, the reference elevation calculated is 143.372, it is possible to set the rounding at 0.5 to obtain 143.5 as reference elevation. Recalculate the tool calculates again the reference elevation trying to center the drawing on the sheet. Drawing optimization if the sheet cannot contain the drawing of the whole profile, some new datum level are calculated.

Grid
Profile drawing can be completed with a grid reporting station and elevation values. X Axis grid: indicates whether a reference grid must be drawn on distance axis. Step: distance between grid lines. Y axis grid: indicates whether it is necessary to generate reference grid on elevations axis. Step: height difference between grid lines. Grid texts are displayed according to the style specified in Text styles page. 357

Aspect
Squaring sheet It is possible to choose the kind of squaring to apply to the section by selecting the possible types in Squaring check box, or by clicking on the preview image. Top distance indicates the distance between the upper edge of the profile drawing and the lower side of the squaring (or of the upper rows). Bottom distance indicates the distance between the profile reference elevation and the lower side of its drawing. Heading width sets the size of the dimensioning heading, the one containing the description of the rows. Drawing edge not used. Drawing title the tool asks you if you want to print the profile title on the upper left side.

Dimensioning tab

In this table you find some settings concerning how to perform special dimensioning.

Hectometric
Hectometric: distance at which to indicate the hectometric in the dimensioning. Hectometric mode: it is possible to decide whether the tool must print the hectometric number (station/100) or the complete station.

Vertical curves table

It is possible to choose the kind of dimensioning of profile vertical curves:

None: vertical curves are not dimensioned.

Topko

Curves and tangent points: in the upper part of the profile you find the tables reporting the
curve data; here, tangent point stations and elevations are reported as well.

Curves and grade lines: at the distance specified in Table distance input field, the table is
positioned with the curve data and the data of the two grade lines are printed:

Maximum and minimum

It is possible to decide whether to display relative max/min points.

Elevation difference: asks whether to report the elevation difference between terrain and project directly on profile drawing. Drawing title: asks whether to report the title of the profile up on the left.

359

Cut/Fill tab

Profile drawing can be completed by a color or hatches identifying cut and fill areas.

Cut / fill filling: activate this option to obtain the drawing of the profile with coloration or filling in cut and fill areas.

Terrain line: allows to decide whether the terrain line to consider must be the sections terrain elevations or a profile polyline. Terrain sections: the terrain elevations of the sections determine the terrain line that will be used to generate a filling. Profile polyline: a profile polyline, the code of which must be specified, is used as terrain line for generating the filling.

Project line: allows to decide whether the project line to consider must be the sections project elevations or the grade lines and curves defined. Grade lines and curves: grade lines and curves determine the project line that will be used to generate the filling. Project sections: the sections project elevations determine the project line that will be used to generate the filling.

Cut: settings for coloration and filling of cut area. Layer: layer where to save the coloration or the hatches in cut area. Solid color: cut area is defined by a solid color. The color used is the one defined by the layer.

Topko

Hatches: cut area is defined by a hatches model. Select button to select the hatches model desired. In Scale factor check list, set the scale factor to use to apply the hatches. The color used will be the one defined by the layer.

Fill: settings for coloration and filling of fill area.

Layer: layer where to save the coloration or the hatches in fill area. Solid color: fill area is defined by a solid color. The color used is the one defined by the layer. Hatches: fill area is defined by a hatches model. Select button to select the hatches model desired. In Scale factor check list, set the scale factor to use to apply the hatches. The color used will be the one defined by the layer.

Text tab

Personalizable texts For each text reproduced on the left it is possible to set the real text to be printed. It is useful especially when it is necessary to comment the drawings using a foreign language. Text size It is possible to set the size (height, width) of the characters used in the different kinds of text used in the drawing.

361

Fonts tab

Fonts. It is possible to select the fonts to be used in the profile dimensioning as regard to the elevation texts, the headings, the tables and the titles. See Loading fonts.

Plotting or plot preview from Profile module

From Profile module it is possible to perform first the plot preview and then the plotting on paper; it is not possible to plot on paper directly. The generation of the preview creates a drawing with its dimensioning and headings set in definition of profile dimensioning. It is possible to generate the plot preview through one of the following modes: Toolbar Standard Menu File > Plot preview Command line: PREVIEW

Topko

In all the cases the following dialog box will appear:

This dialog box is divided into three tabs: in the first tab you can set the data of the profile to plot; in the second tab you can select and set the plot device; in the third tab it is possible to set the parameters concerning the position of the drawing in the sheet.

Longitudinal profile
Start and end station: it is possible to define the portion of profile to be printed by setting the group first and last section; From section: the tool asks you to enter the first section to be drawn (from 1 up to the maximum number of sections present). Once you have inserted the number of the section, its name will appear in the field on the right. By clicking on button ... a complete list of sections will appear from which you can choose the section needed. To section: the tool asks you to enter the last section to be drawn (from the start section to the maximum number of sections present). Once you have inserted the number of the section its name will appear in the field on the right. By clicking on button ... a complete list of sections will appear from which you can choose the section needed. Start and end station: otherwise it is possible to define the portion of profile to be printed by setting start and end station; Start station: start station of the profile segment to print. End station: end station of the profile section to print. Recalculate datum level: if the option is active the tool generates the profile in the center of the sheet and recalculates the datum level; if the option is not active, the tool generates the profile by keeping the datum level set. The datum level is set in Longitudinal profile properties window. Profile optimization: if the option is active the tool recalculates the datum level so that the profile can be drawn even in a sheet that can't contain it completely. 363

Sheet height: you can set the height of the drawing sheet. Set sheet width: in generating the profile drawing it is possible to set the sheet maximum width; according to this value, the tool subdivides automatically the profile into distinct sheets, repeating on each sheet the profile heading. Profile tables of quite long horizontal alignments can therefore be performed very quickly thanks to this option; it is not necessary to carry out the generation by segments, since it is sufficient to specify the width of the sheet to be used. Sheet width: sheet maximum width.

Plot device

From Name list box select the plot device where you want the drawing to be plotted. The tool will list all the plotters configured inside the O.S.. Clicking on Properties button you will open another dialog box through which it is possible to modify the parameters of the plot device selected. To all the new objects created a CAD color is assigned that can be associated to a layer or directly to the object. While plotting, it is possible to use the colors of the objects in order to specify a different plot color and to assign widths or line thickness. See Pen configuration.

Topko

Layout

In Layout tab it is possible to set different parameters defining the paper size and orientation, the area of the drawing to plot and its positioning inside the sheet. Paper size Select from Name list box the paper size for the drawing to be plotted. All paper sizes supported by the plotter selected are listed. If you are setting the data for performing the plot preview, then you can select the option Fit papers to drawing extension. With this option active, it is not necessary to select the paper size since the tool calculates automatically the size of the paper necessary for the drawing; in this way, in the plot preview the whole drawing will be displayed in a single sheet. This option is also necessary when you have to export the whole scaled drawing to a DXF file. See How to export to a DXF file. Drawing orientation It is possible to set the orientation of the sheet where the drawing will be plotted. Plot scale It is possible to specify the two scales, distances and elevations, to be used to obtain the final drawing. Offset It is possible to specify a plot area offset from the bottom angle on the left of the sheet. On paper, values are expressed in millimetres. Through the option Center the plot the tool calculates the two offset values that determine the centering of the drawing on the paper. For drawings whose size exceeds the size of the sheet, it is possible to set Overlapping margins to be taken into consideration for the generation of the sheets next to the first; in this way, it will be easier to join together the single sheets.

365

Sheet squaring

In this page you can choose the kind of sheet squaring to use for generating the final drawing. From the check list you can choose a simple squaring model, that is a box; besides, all the squaring-type enclosed drawings are listed. See Enclosed drawings. By pressing button OK you go on with the generation of the plot preview; the tool will open a new graphic window inside which a sheet containing the drawing will be displayed. In the lower side of the preview there is a "Navigator"; this bar shows how many sheets have been generated and allows to display them one by one:

Since the plot preview is a graphic window all the graphic CAD drawing and editing commands are active. It is then possible to edit the drawing and to import and export DXF files. From the preview graphic window it is possible to plot directly. See Printing from plot preview and Generating a drawing sheet from a drawing preview.

Longitudinal profile reports

In order to obtain the report of the longitudinal profile data, it is necessary to select the item Print from File menu, or digit PRINT command on the CAD command line. In the appearing dialog box select Longitudinal profile tab. It is then sufficient to select the report type of the profile data. Here is a list of the report types you can select: Terrain and project The name of the section, the partial distance and the station, the project and the terrain elevations, the elevation difference of each section on profile and a comment are printed. Planimetric position. The name of the section, the station, the planimetric position of the section axis, the terrain and the project elevations of each section on profile and a comment (for road cross sections only) are printed.

Topko

Superelevations and widenings. The name of the section, the station, the terrain and the project elevations, the name of the typical section used, the left and the right widening, the left and the right crossfall of each section on profile and a comment (only for road cross sections) are printed. Hydraulics. The name of the section, the partial distance, the slope distance, the station, the terrain elevation, the in and the out sump pit elevation, the name of the sump, the diameter of the pipe and a comment are printed.

Printing supplementary profile reports

In order to obtain the report of supplementary profile data, it is necessary to select the item Print from File menu, or digit PRINT command on the CAD command line. In the appearing dialog box select Supplementary profiles tab. It is then sufficient to select the report type to be printed.

Allotments
It is possible to subdivide a mathematical model into allotments where volume calculation can be performed apart from the rest of the model. It is therefore possible to obtain the partial volumes of each allotment instead of those of the whole model; this utility can be used, for example, in a pit earthwork calculation, in case the pit has different owners. It is also possible to apply different leveling parameters to different allotments and this is important for example in land settlements. Allotments can be obtained also by the transformation of drawing polylines and vice versa; for example, it is possible to import a DXF file and then transform drawing polylines into allotments without having to input them again. See Transformation of entities.

Input of allotments
The activation of an allotments input command is carried out through one of the methods listed below: DTM Toolbar Menu D.T.M. > Allotments Command line: ALLOTMENT

On CAD command line, the following questions appear: Allotment Name : From point : End point : The tool asks you to give a name to the allotment to be input, and then to indicate the points which make up its perimeter. If you insert adjacent allotments, make sure that the sides in common are coincident. As far as the outer part of the perimeter, it is not necessary to make it coincide with the perimeter of the mathematical model but it is sufficient that the points are input outside the model itself.

How to erase and modify allotments

Modify
If you want to modify the position or the shape of an allotment, it is possible to use all the edit functions (move, copy, rotate, etc.) the graphic CAD offers.

Erase
In order to erase one or more allotments from graphic CAD window, it is sufficient to use erase command, used to erase any kind of entity. In order to erase all the current subproject allotments, it is sufficient to select Erase all item and then Allotments from D.T.M. menu; On command line you can write DELDATA : 367

Erase data coNstraints/Triangles/cOntour lines/cut Fill lines/Allotments/Drains/Cancel/<C>: A

Break triangles on allotments

By performing a subdivision by allotment inside a mathematical model, you will see that some triangles are positioned on different allotments at the same time. For the elaboration of volume calculation by allotment, this kind of situation is wrong because only the triangles inside the allotment are calculated. It is, therefore, necessary to break triangles on defined polylines. In order to perform this operation, there is a specific command that can be activated through one of the following modes: Menu D.T.M. > Triangulation > Break triangle on defined polyline Command line: BREAKTRI

After the elaboration the triangles are broken on defined polylines and no one of them is positioned on two different allotments at the same time.

Volume calculation by allotment

Before you can calculate volumes with the methods suggested by the tool, it is necessary to execute a command whose function is that of breaking the triangles which belong to two or more different allotments at the same time, so that each allotment possesses a portion of the model, apart from the others.

Volume calculations
On the basis of the triangle mathematical model obtained, it is possible to perform some volume calculations. Remember that precision and reliability of the results obtained depend essentially on how the triangles have been built according to constraints (break lines). The definition of constraints is thus an important phase in obtaining reliable results. The tool offers the following procedures for volume calculation : Solid volume : the volume of a solid is calculated according to a reference elevation ; Levelings : the volume of the model is calculated with reference to a plane that can be defined as follows :

one point and two slopes two points and one slope three points
Leveling calculation can be performed with adjustment plane, and it is also possible to indicate a quantity (in cubic meters) of material that has to be added or subtracted to the adjustment plane; Intersection of models : cut and fill volume is calculated by comparing two different mathematical models; this solution offers precise data as far as earthwork, both as difference between cut and fill and as shift of material inside the model. By this method, it is not necessary that survey points are the same and/or that the perimeter of the two models on which calculation is carried out correspond. The tool returns crossing lines between cut and fill and calculates the second elevation (elevation of overlapped model) for each survey point. All the above mentioned elaborations can be performed on the whole model or on part of it. Allotments. From any kind of volume calculation performed, it is possible to obtain a triangle mathematical model representing one of the models used during the calculation. This function is particularly useful in case of volume calculation by levelings in order to obtain the mathematical model of the leveling inserted.

Topko

Solid volume
Volume calculation is performed as difference between the mathematical model and the horizontal plane situated at an elevation indicated by the user. The process is activated as follows: Menu D.T.M. > Volume calculation > Solid volume Command line: VOLSOLID

The following dialog box will appear:

Calculation on complete model: the tool will use the complete model. Calculation on model allotments: by activating this option it is possible to perform calculation only on specific allotments the model has been subdivided into. By pressing Select all button it is possible to perform the calculation on all the allotments at the same time, but with distinct results. Clear all button, on the contrary, annuls the selection performed on the allotments. The allotments to calculate can be indicated manually in planimetry graphic window by using Select allotments, or they can be selected directly from the list reported sideways. The option Break triangles on allotments breaks automatically the triangles passing through a segment of one of the allotments. For volume calculation on allotment this situation is wrong, since it calculates the volumes of triangles situated only partially within the allotment. It is therefore necessary to break triangles situated along the edges of the allotment. In this way calculation will be defined exactly on the allotment. Press Next button to continue the execution of the command.

369

In this window it is possible to define the reference elevation on which to perform the calculation.

Point name: elevation can be defined by entering the name of the point from which to extract it; by pressing button the point can be selected directly from the graphic window.

Point elevation: when a point is not available, elevation can be defined by entering the value in input field.; by pressing button it is possible to set the elevation directly from the graphic window.

Press Next button to continue the execution of the command.

Topko

In this window different options are requested, concerning volume calculation mode: Process name: name to assign to calculation; the name will be reported on the window summing up the volume calculations performed. Save detailed elaboration: by this option it is possible to save all the information concerning the calculation performed; all the prismoids used for cut and fill volume calculation are then saved. With this information it is possible to print the report Triangles and volumes. Calculate cut/fill area barycenters: for any cut or fill area a barycenter is calculated and on it a text label is inserted, reporting the coordinates of the position and the volume calculated for the single area. By setting Minimum volume the barycenters with a volume below the minimum set will not be calculated; a specific report has been created, containing the data of the barycenters calculated; it is also possible to have access to the report from File > Print > DTM > Volumes barycenters. Calculate cut/fill lines: cut/fill lines between cut and fill areas are calculated and displayed. Delete previous cut/fill lines: by this option, possible cut/fill lines calculated with previous elaborations will be deleted. Calculate second elevation: for each survey point the elevation of the project model, in this case reference elevation, is set as second elevation. Display calculation progress on model: allows to display on screen the process under way by colouring the areas being processed. On big size models it is better to deactivate this option to reduce execution time. Press Next button to continue the execution of the command.

371

This window allows to create new models according to the calculation performed.

Create leveling model: a new triangle model is created, containing the surface used to perform volume calculation compared with the surface of the current model. With the volume of solids this model is one with all the triangles situated at the reference elevation. The new model can be saved on the existing subproject reported in the list, or on a new subproject that can be created by pressing Add button. Create model with elevation differences: a new triangle model is created, whose elevations are the differences between the elevations of the current triangle model and the elevations of the project model. The new model can be saved on an existing subproject reported in the list, or on a new subproject that can be created by pressing Add button. This option is available only to Topko I users. Press Calculate button to start calculation. At the end of the calculation a summary window will appear, reporting the volume calculations performed. In case calculation has been performed by selecting allotments, the window will report as many calculations as the number of allotments on which calculation has been carried out; the name of the allotment the calculation is referred to is added to calculation description.

Volumes by intersection of models

Cut and fill volume is calculated by comparing two digital models; this solution supplies exact data about volume calculation as difference between cut and fill. By this model survey points do not need to be the same and / or the perimeters of the two models on which calculation has to be performed do not need to be equal, since only the surface the two models have in common will be processed. The process is activated as follows: Menu D.T.M. > Volume calculation > DTM intersection Command line: INTERDTM The following dialog box will appear:

Topko

Calculation on complete model: the tool will use the complete model. Calculation on model allotments: by activating this option it is possible to perform calculation only on specific allotments the model has been subdivided into. By pressing Select all button it is possible to perform the calculation on all the allotments at the same time, but with distinct results. Clear all button, on the contrary, annuls the selection performed on the allotments. The allotments to calculate can be indicated manually in planimetry graphic window by using Select allotments, or they can be selected directly from the list reported sideways. The option Break triangles on allotments breaks automatically the triangles passing through a segment of one of the allotments. For volume calculation on allotment this situation is wrong, since it calculates the volumes of triangles situated only partially within the allotment. It is therefore necessary to break triangles situated along the edges of the allotment. In this way calculation will be defined exactly on the allotment.

Press Next button to continue the execution of the command.

373

This window reports all the open subprojects and, for each subproject, all the survey subprojects. Among these subprojects it is necessary to choose the subproject with which to perform the comparison. Press Next to button to continue the execution of the command.

Topko

In this window different options are requested, concerning volume calculation mode: Process name: name to assign to calculation; the name will be reported on the window summing up the volume calculations performed. Save detailed elaboration: by this option it is possible to save all the information concerning the calculation performed; all the prismoids used for cut and fill volume calculation are then saved. With this information it is possible to print the report Triangles and volumes. Calculate cut/fill area barycenters: for any cut or fill area a barycenter is calculated and on it a text label is inserted, reporting the coordinates of the position and the volume calculated for the single area. By setting Minimum volume the barycenters with a volume below the minimum set will not be calculated; a specific report has been created, containing the data of the barycenters calculated; it is also possible to have access to the report from File > Print > DTM > Volumes barycenters. Calculate cut/fill lines: cut/fill lines between cut and fill areas are calculated and displayed. Delete previous cut/fill lines: by this option, possible cut/fill lines calculated with previous elaborations will be deleted.

Calculate second elevation: for each survey point the elevation of the project model is set as second elevation. Display calculation progress on model: allows to display on screen the process under way by colouring the areas being processed. On big size models it is better to deactivate this option to reduce execution time. Press Next button to continue the execution of the command.

375

This window allows to create new models according to the calculation performed. Create model with elevation differences: a new triangle model is created, whose elevations are the differences between the elevations of the current triangle model and the elevations of the project model. The new model can be saved on an existing subproject reported in the list, or on a new subproject that can be created by pressing Add button. This option is available only to Topko M Premium users. Press Calculate button to start calculation. At the end of the calculation a summary window will appear, reporting the volume calculations performed. In case calculation has been performed by selecting allotments, the window will report as many calculations as the number of allotments on which calculation has been carried out; the name of the allotment the calculation is referred to is added to calculation description. During calculation the tool will subdivide the existing triangles of the two models to create coincident prismoids, the volumes of which will be calculated. Calculation finishes by showing the surface and the cut and fill volume calculated.

Leveling calculation
The volume of the model is calculated according to a leveling that can be defined according to three different modes:

one point and two slopes two points and a slope three points one point and maximum slope direction

Leveling calculation can be performed by leveling adjustment, and it is also possible to indicate a quantity (in cubic meters) of material to add or to remove from leveling adjustment.

Topko

The process is activated as follows: Menu D.T.M. > Volume calculations > Levelings Command line: LEVELING The following dialog box will appear:

In this window it is possible to choose whether to perform calculation on the whole model or on part of it; Calculation on complete model: the tool will use the complete model. Calculation on model allotments: by activating this option it is possible to perform calculation only on specific allotments the model has been subdivided into. By pressing Select all button it is possible to perform the calculation on all the allotments at the same time, but with distinct results. Clear all button, on the contrary, annuls the selection performed on the allotments. The allotments to calculate can be indicated manually in planimetry graphic window by using Select allotments, or they can be selected directly from the list reported sideways. The option Break triangles on allotments breaks automatically the triangles passing through a segment of one of the allotments. For volume calculations on allotment this situation is wrong, since it calculates the volumes of triangles situated only partially within the allotment. It is therefore necessary to break triangles situated along the edges of the allotment. In this way calculation will be defined exactly on the allotment.

Press Next button to continue the execution of the command.

377

By this window it is possible to define the levelling to use for volume calculation. The levelling can be defined in four different ways:

Leveling through 3 points Leveling through 2 points and 1 slope Leveling through 1 point and 2 slopes Leveling through 1 point and maximum slope direction

Choose a mode from the list; the content of the window will change according to the option selected.

Topko

Leveling through three points

In the window it is possible to specify the three points to use for leveling calculation. Point data can be inserted manually in input fields. In Point name field it is possible to enter the name of a survey point; the tool will report the point coordinates on the other fields. By button it is possible to select the

survey point directly from the graphic window, while by button it is possible to select any coordinate in the graphic window. Press Next button to continue the execution of the command.

379

Leveling through 2 points and 1 slope

In the window it is possible to specify the two points to use for leveling calculation. Point data can be inserted manually in input fields. In Point name field it is possible to enter the name of a survey point; the tool will report the point coordinates on the other fields. By survey point directly from the graphic window, while by in the graphic window. button it is possible to select the

button it is possible to select any coordinate

It is then possible to specify the slope the leveling must have and also the direction it will assume. The direction can also be defined in the graphic window by selecting Press Next button to continue the execution of the command. button.

Topko

Leveling through 1 point and 2 slopes

In the window it is possible to specify the point to use for leveling calculation. Point data can be inserted manually in input fields. In Point name field it is possible to enter the name of a survey point; the tool will report the point coordinates on the other fields. By point directly from the graphic window, while by graphic window. button it is possible to select the survey

button it is possible to select any coordinate in the

It is then possible to specify the two slopes the leveling must have and also the directions they will assume. The direction can also be defined in the graphic window by selecting Press Next button to continue the execution of the command. button.

381

Leveling through 1 point and maximum slope direction

In the window it is possible to specify the point to use to calculate the levelling. Point data can be inserted manually in input fields. In Point name field it is possible to enter the name of a survey point; the tool will report the point coordinates on the other fields. button allows to select the survey point directly from the graphic window, while to select any coordinate in the graphic window. button allows

It is therefore possible to specify the maximum slope of the levelling and the corresponding direction on which it works. The direction can be defined also in the graphic window by selecting The next slope will be 0 and it will have an orthogonal direction if compared to the first. Press Next button to continue the execution of the command. button.

Topko

In this window different options are requested, concerning volume calculation mode: Process name: name to assign to calculation; the name will be reported on the window summing up the volume calculations performed. Leveling adjustment: by activating this option the tool keeps valid the features of the leveling defined but its elevation is determined so as to make cut volume equal to fill volume. Not available for Topko Express. Supplementary volume: it is also possible to set a supplementary volume (positive or negative) involving a further traslation of the leveling adjustment upwards (increase in fill) in case the value is positive or downward (increase in cut) in case the value is negative. Save detailed elaboration: by this option it is possible to save all the information concerning the calculation performed; all the prismoids used for cut and fill volume calculation are then saved. With this information it is possible to print the report Triangles and volumes. Calculate cut/fill area barycenters: for any cut or fill area a barycenter is calculated and on it a text label is inserted, reporting the coordinates of the position and the volume calculated for the single area. By setting Minimum volume the barycenters with a volume below the minimum set will not be calculated; a specific report has been created, containing the data of the barycenters calculated; it is also possible to have access to the report from File > Print > DTM > Volumes barycenters. Not available for Topko Express. Calculate cut/fill lines: cut/fill lines between cut and fill areas are calculated and displayed. Delete previous cut/fill lines: by this option, possible cut/fill lines calculated with previous elaborations will be deleted. Calculate second elevation: for each survey point the elevation of the project model is set as second elevation.

383

Display calculation progress on model: allows to display on screen the process under way by colouring the areas being processed. On big size models it is better to deactivate this option to reduce execution time. Press Next button to continue the execution of the command.

This window allows to create new models according to the calculation performed. Not available for Topko Express. Create leveling model: a new triangle model is created, containing the leveling surface. The new model can be saved on the existing subproject reported in the list, or on a new subproject that can be created by pressing Add button. In the same subproject the points will be added, corresponding to triangle vertexes and cut-fill lines. Delete previous elaboration: allows to delete the content of the subproject containing the levelling model. Create model with elevation differences: a new triangle model is created, whose elevations are the differences between the elevations of the current triangle model and the leveling elevations. The new model can be saved on an existing subproject reported in the list, or on a new subproject that can be created by pressing Add button. This option is available only to Topko 1 users. Press Calculate button to start calculation. At the end of the calculation a summary window will appear, reporting the volume calculations performed. In case calculation has been performed by selecting allotments, the window will report as many calculations as the number of allotments on which calculation has been carried out; the name of the allotment the calculation is referred to is added to calculation description.

Extraction of DTM from volume calculations

According to the volume calculation performed, it is possible to obtain a triangle mathematical model representing one of the models used during the calculation. This function is particularly useful in case of volume calculation by levelings in order to obtain the mathematical model of the leveling inserted.

Topko

Before using this command, it is necessary to create a survey subproject where to save the mathematical model to be extracted. The subproject created must also be active. See Subprojects management. The command can be activated through one of the following modes: Menu D.T.M. > Extraction of DTM > DTM from volume calculations Command line: DTMEXTRACT

The following window appears:

It is possible to obtain a mathematical model on the basis of previous elaborations according to different modes: Type of extraction Lower DTM (only for M Premium configuration) Higher DTM (only for M Premium configuration) First DTM Meaning A model is created using the lower elevations between the two models. A model is created using the higher elevations between the two models.

Its meaning depends on the type of calculation performed. See table below. Second DTM Its meaning depends on the type of calculation performed. See table below. Elevation difference (only for M Premium A mathematical model is created whose elevation is the difference configuration) between the elevations of the two models elaborated. The Z point of the triangles is then the difference between the Z point of the two models triangles. The types of extractions cyan colored are available only if you have Incas module. The meaning of the first and the second model depends on the type of volume calculation performed according to the following scheme: Volume calculation Solid volume Leveling Meaning of the first model The first model has the elevation set for the volume calculation. The first model represents the leveling plane set for volume calculation. Meaning of the second model The second model is identical with the original one. The second model is identical with the original one. 385

Model intersection

The first model is identical with The second model is identical with the first of the two compared the second of the two compared models. models. For example, if you want to obtain a leveling mathematical model defined in volume calculation it is necessary to use the option First DTM. Source DTM. By Browse button, select the subproject where the volume calculation, which the extraction of the model will refer to, has been performed. Elaboration. By Browse button, select the elaboration, among those available, from which to obtain the model.

Volume calculation summary

The tool memorizes each volume-calculation elaboration performed and gives the possibility to consult them through one of the following methods: Menu D.T.M. > Volume calculation > Volume calculation summary Command line: DTMRES

In the apparing dialog box, for each elaboration performed, you will find: elaboration description, area elaborated (plane and slope), cut and fill volume.

How to modify an elaboration already performed

Volume calculation elaborations are listed in volume calculation summary table; from this table it is possible to select an elaboration and repeat it. The tool will show all the settings by which the same elaboration has been performed; the previous parameters can be modified giving the opportunity to obtain a new elaboration or overwrite the previous elaboration. Once the elaboration has been selected from the list, press Modify button. The tool will show the dialog box of volume calculation with the same parameters used in the original calculation.

Topko

At the end of the calculation the tool will ask whether the new results must overwrite the previous ones or they must be saved as new elaboration.

By answering OK the tool will replace the previous elaboration with the new one; by answering No a new elaboration will be added.

Print volumes from summary window

From the window of volume calculation summary it is possible to obtain the report of the elaboration selected. After selecting the elaboration from the list, press Print button; it will display the window allowing to choose the kind of report to obtain.

Drawing of levelling direction and slope

Volume calculation by levelling generated with option Leveling through 1 point and 2 slopes or 2 Points and 1 slope allow to obtain a specific dimensioning which shows the direction to which the slope has been applied and reports both the azimuth of the direction and the value of the slope. After selecting the levelling, press the button Draw arrow; indicate on the screen where to position the dimensioning arrow.

Characters size and other dimensioning parameters can be modified by dimensioning styles.

How to delete an elaboration

Since saving the elaborations increases remarkably the size of the file it is possible to delete unnecessary elaborations. After selecting the elaboration from the list, press Delete. Note. Since memorizing elaborations makes the file size increase greatly, it is possible to erase unnecessary elaborations. See How to erase a row in a grid.

387

Printing of triangles and volumes

If you have performed a volume calculation (levelings, solid volume, intersection of models) in a mathematical model, it is possible to print the results of the calculation and volume barycentres (if calculated); it is necessary to select Print from File menu, or give PRINT command. In the appearing dialog box select DTM tab. It is then sufficient to select the option Triangles and volumes or Volumes barycenters. Now, the tool asks to select the elaboration, among those performed, to be printed. The report shows the following data: X,Y coordinates of the three vertexes of the two triangles and the elevation of both, the plane area of the triangles, the volume of both the prisms (prism of first triangle and prism of second triangle) and cut and fill volume. Note. Remember that both the triangles are planimetrically coincident; therefore, X and Y coordinates are coincident as well as plane areas. Note. The report results wider than the width of a vertical A4 sheet, then it is necessary to set the printer in order to print on an horizontal A4 sheet.

DEM - Digital Elevation Model

Topko M includes the solution to all the problems concerning management, visualization, analysis and, generally speaking, use of DEM. It is possible to import into the project different DEMs and use them to generate maps, calculate profiles and sections, extract digital models. Every DEM can be represented as raster image according to one of the following modes:

map of altimetries; map of exposures; map of altimetries/exposures;

It is possible to obtain different kinds of raster maps: 256 color, as well as 65536 color or even 16 million color maps. You can personalize the map resolution. Maps can be elaborated also by visualizing contour lines. It is also possible to visualize just a part of the DEM. You can personalize the scales of the colors to be used to represent the different elevations. Besides raster maps, it is possible to visualize point grids. The calculation of profiles and sections from DEM is performed at once also on a DEM with millions of points. From a DEM it is possible to extract the survey and the digital model; it is possible to elaborate only a part of the DEM. In this way it is possible to use DEM data and Topko M commands to calculate, for example, volumetries. From the triangle digital model it is possible to generate a DEM by defining the grid size; the digital model can be used also to update the elevations of a DEM situated in the same area. It is possible to import/export a DEM from the most widespread formats, such as Arc grid and Ascii xyz. The tool allows to generate a DEM starting from an ASCII file containing a non-regular set of points obtained, for example, by LaserScanner systems.

What is a DEM?
What is a DEM? Dem is an acronym which stands for Digital Elevation model and is, therefore, a threedimensional representation of the earth surface. A DEM is a file that reports terrain elevations, referred to a particular area and according to a regular grid. DEMS are used in different fields, from civil engineering to geology, from hydrology to agriculture, from use for military purpose to environmental conservation. Usually a DEM is referred to an area of average-large size and can therefore contain even millions of points; you can find DEMs of a whole province or even of a region, defined on a grid that can span from 20 to 60 meters. Because of their size, DEMS can't be visualized as set of points or triangle surface, but are represented by raster images, where any pixel represents, according to different modes, the corresponding elevation reported in the DEM. There are different ways to represent a DEM by a raster image: Map of altimetries: the color of each pixel identifies the elevation of the DEM in that point.

Topko

389

Map of exposures: the map is represented by one color, the gradations of which show the surfaces' exposure to light.

Topko

Map of altimetries/exposures: it is the sum of the two maps illustrated above, where the color represents the elevation and its hue represents the exposure.

DEM management mode inside the tool

The modes by which DEMS are managed by the tool are the following:

Every DEM loaded in a project is seen by the tool as a sort of sub-project. All the options offered for sub-projects are therefore available also for a DEM. As with subprojects, it is possible to delete, rename, and make DEMS visible / invisible. See DEMS as sub-projects. DEMS are managed by the tool as external files. This means that when you import a DEM into a project, not all the DEM's data can be found in it but only the reference to the name and the folder in which there is the DEM file imported. In this way, the same DEM can e used in different projects at the same time, without duplication of data; since DEMS normally have a remarkable size (hundreds of megabytes), this allows to save a lot of room. Therefore, performing the copy of a work, you do not perform also the copy of the DEMS found in it. The DEMS used in the tool must be in SierraSoft DEM format. So, if you have a DEM in other formats it is necessary to convert it into SierraSoft DEM format. See DEM import.

391

If the DEM is visualized in a project by a raster map, then, in the same folder where there is a DEM file, a TIF format file will be created, containing the image performed. In this way, when you re-open the project, it will not be necessary to elaborate the image again. As we said before, the file will be created in the DEM file folder, with the same name but with TIF extension; it will be possible, therefore, to load the image also from other tools. Besides a TIF file, also a WORLD file will be created, allowing to load an image in the position and in the scale it is referred to (of course only in tools where this option is available). WORLD file will have TFW extension.

DEMs as subprojects
So, DEMS are loaded into a project as a special kind of subprojects. Therefore, all the options offered for subprojects are available also for them. The management of subprojects is activated in one of the following ways: Toolbar: Standard Menu File > Subprojects Command line: SUBPRJ

The following dialog box will appear:

Besides survey, axis and drawing subprojects, and possibly raster images, the DEMS at present available in the project are listed.

Making a DEM visible / invisible

Any Dem can be visible or invisible . In order to modify a DEM's state of visibility it is sufficient to click on the lamp icon to turn it off if it is on or vice versa.

Deleting a DEM
Select by mouse the DEM to delete and press the button Delete. A window will appear, which asks you to confirm the deletion.

Topko

Reconnecting a DEM
The tool memorizes the DEMS only as connections, so a copy of the DEM is not made in the tool files, but once a file is opened, the tool will look for the DEM in the same folder it has been imported from. See DEM management mode inside the tool. If a DEM is removed from the folder where it was originally, on opening the file the DEM will not be loaded, since the tool does not know the new position. In this case, the name of the DEM will appear as if it was non-active (dark grey). To indicate the tool the DEM new position it is sufficient to select the DEM from the list and click on Link button: a file-opening dialog box will appear, allowing to indicate the new position and possibly the new name of the DEM to connect.

Importing a DEM
To import a DEM into the current subproject start the command using one of the following modes: Menu D.E.M. > DEM Import Command line: DEMIN

The following dialog box will appear:

There are two ways to import a DEM: 1. Importing a DEM in SierraSoft DEM format: in this case the DEM has already been converted from its original format to SierraSoft DEM format. Select the option SierraSoft DEM file and then specify the SierraSoft DEM format to be loaded. Use ... button to select the file by the dialog box. In Name of DEM to create text box specify the name to assign the DEM so as to distinguish it in the project. 2. Importing a DEM in a format different from SierraSoft DEM format: in this case it is necessary to convert the file from its original format to SierraSoft DEM format. Select the option Convert from other DEM format and then specify the file to be converted from the original format to SierraSoft DEM format. Use ... button to select the file by dialog box; from the dialog box it is also possible to specify the format of the file to be converted. See Import and export formats.

393

Moreover, specify the name and the folder where to save the SierraSoft DEM format file. Finally, in Name of DEM to create text box specify the name to assign the DEM so as to distinguish it in the project. Press OK to start the importation. If the option Convert from other DEM format has been chosen it is necessary to wait for the original file to be converted into SierraSoft DEM format. If the DEM has to be loaded again later it will not be necessary to convert it anymore but it will be sufficient to load the file into SierraSoft DEM format file. At the end of the importation the tool will show the panel representing the extension of the DEM loaded. Use DEM properties to change DEM visualization mode.

Exportation of a DEM
To export a DEM into a different format start the command using one of the following modes: Menu D.E.M. > DEM Export Command line: DEMOUT

The following dialog box will appear:

From DEM to export check box select the DEM to export. Then specify the name of the file and the folder where to memorize the file containing the data exported. Use ... button to select the file by dialog box. Finally, specify the format to export the DEM with. See Import and export formats. Press OK to start the exportation of the DEM from DEM SierraSoft format to the format chosen.

Import and export formats

The DEM module can import and export a DEM in the following formats: ASCII Arc Grid: it is a format that reports in the first lines the main information about a DEM, such as coordinates of origin, grid size, number of lines and number of columns. Later, all the elevations are reported in matrix format according to the number of lines and columns specified. Example: NCOLS 8 NROWS 5 CELLSIZE 40 XLLCORNER 100.000 YLLCORNER 100.000 NODATA_VALUE -9999 <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation>

Topko

<Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation>

<Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation> <Elevation>

ASCII xyz: it is a very easy format where, for any line, x and y coordinates as well as elevations are reported. Example: <X> <Y> <Z> ...

DEM properties
To have access to DEM properties use one of the following modes: Toolbar D.T.M. Menu D.T.M. > DEM Properties Command line: DEMPROP

The following dialog box will appear:

In this window it is possible to have access to all the intrinsic properties of a DEM (size, grid step,&ldots;) and to the properties a DEM is visualized by.

395

Properties tab

DEM check list reports all the DEMS at present loaded in the project. Select the DEM by which you want to have access to the properties. See How to import a DEM. DEM file: the folder and the name of the external file where the information about the DEM are available. See In-the-tool-DEM management mode. Properties: the main information concerning the DEM is reported; minimum and maximum size, minimum and maximum elevation, grid step. Press OK to confirm the changes made and close the window. Press Apply to confirm the changes keeping the window open. Press Cancel to annul the changes made.

Topko

Drawing filters tab

DEM check list reports all the DEMS at present loaded in the project. Select the DEM by which you want to have access to the properties. See DEM import. Edge: if the option is active a rectangle is drawn, which identifies DEM edges. Grid: if the option is active, inside the DEM edges, a grid of points is drawn, where the pace is specified by the input field Step. Raster: if the option is active, the DEM is represented like a raster. See Raster tab and Map tab. Press OK to confirm the changes and close the window. Press Apply to confirm the changes to confirm the changes keeping the window open. Press Cancel to annul the changes made.

397

Raster tab

DEM check list reports all the DEMS at present loaded in the project. Select the DEM by which you want to have access to the properties. See DEM import. The data of this page are used if in Drawing Filters tab the option Raster has been set and so the DEM is visualized by a raster image. 1 Pixel resolution = : allows to set the resolution of the raster image specifying how many metres a pixel of the raster image corresponds to. The lower the value inserted, the higher will be the resolution and therefore the size of the image. Number of colors: number of colors by which to represent the DEM image. The higher the number of colors, the better will be the quality of the image and the bigger the size of the image itself. Then the data are reported, of the image that will be generated: number of pixels in width and height and the size occupied by the image in the memory. Note. In case of big size DEMS, big size images can be created only to project re-drawing, loading, saving speed's cost; so, it is better to reduce the size of the images reducing the resolution and the number of colors. Press OK to confirm the changes and close the window. Press Apply to confirm the changes keeping the window open. Press Cancel to annul the changes made.

Topko

Map tab

DEM check list reports all the DEMS at present loaded in the project. Select the DEM by which you want to have access to the properties. See DEM import. The data of this page are used if in Drawing Filters tab the Raster option has been set, so the DEM is visualized by a raster image. Map settings: in this group of checks it is possible to choose the raster map to be generated. Map of altimetries: a map is generated, where the color of each pixel identifies the DEM elevation in that point. By Color Scale tab it is possible to set the color the different elevations are represented with. Map of exposures: a map is generated with only one color, the different gradations of which show the surfaces' exposure to light. By Color Scale tab it is possible to set the color the map is represented with. Map of altimetries/exposures: it is a high-effect map connecting the two representations illustrated above, where the color represents the elevation and its hue represents the exposure. Contour lines: you can add to any of the three map types a representation of the contour lines for which it is possible to choose a visualization step. The pixels which are on the contour line are colored according to the color set in Color Scale tab. Map of exposures settings: in this group of checks it is possible to set some values the map of exposures is generated by. Azimuth of light source: angle of provenance of the light. Elevation of light source: angle of incidence of the light on a plane. Elevations scale: scale factor to apply to the elevations to increase or reduce the exposure. Press OK to confirm the changes and close the window. Press Apply to confirm the changes keeping the window open. Press Cancel to annul the changes made.

399

Display tab

DEM check list reports all the DEMS at present loaded in the project. Select the DEM by which you want to have access to the properties. See Importation of a DEM. Partial display: in this group of checks it is possible to set the visualization of the DEM as limited to a specific area instead of to the whole extension. Partial display: activates the DEM partial visualization mode. X Min., Y Min., X Max., Y Max.: area of DEM partial visualization. It is possible to specify the area even using the button Pick < and drawing the panel on display. Layer: a layer to which to assign the drawing of a DEM. The edge of the DEM and the grid of points are drawn with the layer color and line type. Press OK to confirm the changes and close the window. Press Apply to confirm the changes keeping the window open. Press Cancel to annul the changes made.

Topko

Colors Scale tab

DEM check list reports all the DEMS at present loaded in the project. Select the DEM by which you want to have access to the properties. See Importation of a DEM. In this page it is possible to set the colours which will be used for generating the raster map that represents the DEM. Colors style: there are some styles of representation pre-defined by the tool. By selecting the item Personalized it is possible to work directly on the table and specify the intervals of elevation as well as the colours to use. Map of exposures color: colour by which the map of exposures is generated. Contour lines color: colour to be assigned to pixels representing contour lines in raster maps. Press OK to confirm the changes and close the window. Press Apply to confirm the changes keeping the window open. Press Cancel to annul the changes made.

401

Notes tab

DEM check list reports all the DEMS at present loaded in the project. Select the DEM by which you want to have access to the properties. See Importation of a DEM. In this tab it is possible to insert notes and comments about the DEM. Press OK to confirm the changes and close the window. Press Apply to confirm the changes keeping the window open. Press Cancel to annul the changes made.

Topko

Extraction of a digital model (DTM) from DEM

A DEM can be used to extract, from a portion of it, a triangle digital model that can be used for all the calculations concerning topography and road planning. Start the command using one of the following modes: Menu D.E.M. > Extract DTM from DEM Command line: DEM2DTM

The following dialog box will appear:

Source DEM: select the DEM where to generate the digital model from. Destination model: select the survey sub-project where to memorize the triangles and the points generated by the DEM. Settings: settings for generating the model. Grid size: size by which to generate the grid of triangles and points. Create points: if the option is activated, survey points are generated. Create triangles: if the option is activated the triangles are generated. Area to extract: it is possible to extract the digital model from the whole DEM or only from a portion of it. DEM partial extraction: specify the portion of DEM to be used to generate the digital model. It is possible to use the button Pick < to indicate the panel graphically. DEM complete extraction: the model will be generated using all the DEM extension. Press OK to start the generation of the digital model from the DEM.

403

Extracting the DEM from a digital model (DTM)

To create a DEM from a triangle digital model, start the command using one of the following modes: Menu D.E.M. > Extract DEM from DTM Command line: DTM2DEM

The following dialog box will appear:

Source model: select the survey sub-project containing the digital model to generate the DEM from. Name of DEM to create: specify the name of the DEM so as to distinguish it in the project. SierraSoft DEM file to create: specify the name and the folder where to save the SierraSoft DEM format file. Grid size: grid size of the DEM to be created. Press OK to start the generation of the DEM. In the current project a DEM will be added, calculated according to the digital model specified; for each point of the DEM the elevation on the digital model is interpolated. Use DEM properties to change the DEM visualization mode.

Updating a DEM from a digital model (DTM)

This command can be used to update the elevations of a portion of the DEM using the elevations interpolated from a digital model. Start the command using one of the following modes: Menu D.E.M. > Update DEM from DTM Command line: DEM2DTMAGG

The following dialog box will appear:

Topko

Source model: select the survey sub-project containing the digital model to be used in order to update DEM elevations. DEM to update: select the DEM to be updated. Press OK to start the elaboration. The tool will update the DEM elevations using the triangle digital model.

Calculation of profiles and sections on the DEM

DEMS can be used also to extract profiles and sections. The commands to be used are those available in Topko and ProSt modules; among the different types of calculation available it is possible to choose also DEM - Digital Elevation Model.

Extraction of a DEM from an ASCII file of non-regular points

This command allows to generate a DEM starting from an ASCII file containing a non-regular set of points, obtained, for example, from LaserScanner systems. The DEM is calculated according to the following method: Any point in the ASCII file contributes to determining the elevations of the DEM points near it. For each point (P) in the ASCII file, DEM points are determined, (D1, D2, &ldots;, Dn) that P can influence. The distances between P and the different DEM points (D1,D2,&ldots;, Dn) are calculated; according to the distance the different weights (W1, W2. &ldots;, Wn) are determined as well. The shorter the distance, the heavier the weight will be. The elevation of each point D1, D2, &ldots;, Dn, will be determined according to the elevation of P but dependent upon the corresponding weight W1, W2, &ldots;, Wn. In this way, the nearer an ASCII file point is to a DEM point the greater its contribution will be in determining the elevation on that point. Start the command in one of the following ways: Menu D.E.M. > Extract DEM from ASCII file Command line: ASCII2DEM

405

The following dialog box will appear:

ASCII file of coordinates: indicate the name of the ASCII file containing the coordinates to be used to create the DEM. Press Settings button to accede to the dialog box that allows to set the parameters for the interpretation of an ASCII file. SierraSoft DEM file to create: specify the name and the folder where to save the DEM file in SierraSoft DEM format. DEM settings: settings for creating a DEM. Grid size: size by which to generate DEM grid of points. Point range of action: distance which allows to determine the DEM points on which any ASCII file point can influence the calculation of the elevation. The bigger the distance, the bigger will be the area the ASCII point influences. Sizes: coordinates of the rectangle occupied by the DEM. The coordinates can be determined automatically by analysing the ASCII file content. Press Calculate from ASCII file button to determine automatically the minimum and maximum coordinates found in the ASCII file, which will then determine the area occupied by the DEM. Settings: this button opens a second dialog box where it is possible to set the parameters for the correct interpretation of the ASCII file.

Topko

File type: specify whether the format of the ASCII file is delimited (each value is delimited by a character) or it is a fixed length text (each value is divided into columns). In case of Delimited text it is possible to specify the character acting as separator between the different values. Besides, it is possible to specify the sequence of the different values (x, Y, Z) on any line. In case of Fixed length fields it is possible to specify for any value (X, Y, Z) the column where the value appears first and the number of characters occupied. Press OK to start the creation of the DEM from the ASCII file indicated. At the end, the tool will have created a SierraSoft format DEM file that can be imported into different projects and used as DEM.

407

Topko M Premium Tridimensional planning

Topko M Premium is a Topko M Standard-added module introducing an extraordinarily powerful tool of commands for the 3D design of pits, dumps, car-parks, terracings, embankments, ramps, tracks and generally speaking, everything concerning the design of models. By Topko M Premium it is possible to obtain quickly extremely precise project models as far as the creation of sideslopes and intersections with the existing terrain model. By Topko M Premium the traditional method of planning through sections is surpassed, since it is possible to work completely from a planimetric/tridimensional point of view, creating sideslopes, benches, terracings, roads, etc. with a set of simple but extremely effective commands. It is possible to create more models of a project, one for each situation required by the project: main model, access road, etc; it is also possible to create automatically the final model integrating the project model with the existing situation. From terrain and project models, using Topko M commands, it is possible to obtain the sections which therefore become one of the final results of the design performed by Topko M Premium; again with Topko M it is possible to calculate cut and fill volumes, extremely reliable thanks to the precision of the models designed.

Setting elevations to polylines The design starts from the definition of a polyline which at the beginning can also be bidimensional, since, for example, only the shape of the excavation, the size of the square etc. are known but the exact elevation of each vertex is unknown. By Topko M Premium it is possible to assign quickly the elevations to the polylines by setting a fixed elevation for each vertex, or by setting a plane with predefined slopings on which the polyline must stay or by placing the polyline on the mathematical model of the existing situation.

Creation of sideslopes and benches Starting from the 3D polyline that has been defined, it is possible to build sideslopes and benches automatically by different methods according to the kind of information available for the design: it is possible to specify the final elevation that the sideslope must reach and the sloping, or the height of the sideslope and the sloping, the width and the sloping or the width and the height of the sideslope. Another way to create sideslopes and benches allows to specify both the horizontal offset and the vertical offset on the starting and final point of the main polyline; it is therefore possible to create plans that vary in width and height according to the starting polyline.

How to create sideslopes on an existing model Again using a starting polyline, it is possible to obtain automatically the sideslopes reaching the model which represents the existing situation. The tool calculates with the greatest precision the end points of the sideslopes also on non-uniform terrain models. It is possible to set a sloping for cut and one for fill segments; it is also possible to specify the sloping that each segment of the starting polyline must respect. On the edges of the polyline the tool can calculate rounded off sideslopes.

Merging of models The merging allows to obtain automatically a definitive model, where you can find a project model inserted in the background of a terrain model; what you obtain is therefore the model of the final situation.

Topko

Modelling utilities Different utilities have been prearranged, allowing to complete survey and project models with supplementary elements such as buildings, guard-rails, new-jersey; other utilities allow to position blocks on the model, as well as to extrude and position blocks along lines and polylines.

Other commands Topko M Premium provides also for other functions, integrating the commands described above: Triangulation between two polylines: starting from two 3D polylines the tool builds the triangles between the vertexes of the two polylines; Extraction of models from elaboration: It is possible to obtain mathematical models according to the volume calculations performed. It is possible to obtain, for example, a mathematical model where the elevations of the vertexes represent the differences of elevation between the terrain model and the project model; Extraction of a survey from sections: If a design is performed by sections, it is possible to obtain a survey representing the project points of the sections; Triangulation on polyline: Starting from a 3D closed polyline, the tool can build the triangle model using the polyline vertexes; How to erase points and triangles automatically: Given a closed polyline, Incas allows to erase automatically the triangles and the points inside or outside the polyline.

Topko M Premium Toolbar

Incas module adds the following toolbar. Incas Toolbar: It contains the main commands of Incas.

Set elevation to polylines

By this command it is possible to turn 2D polylines into 3D polylines by giving automatically an elevation to the polyline vertexes. This command is particularly necessary when you have a polyline representing a project situation in a planimetric mode only (for example a limit line of an excavation or a line representing the bottom of an excavation or else). In order to start the project it is, then, necessary to turn this polyline into the third dimension by assigning an elevation to it. The elevation can be set through one of the following methods:

fixed elevation: all polyline vertexes get the same elevation ; from leveling: a leveling plane is defined according to the modes (by three points, by two points and one slope, by one point and two slopes) and the vertexes elevation is calculated on the plane. from DTM: the polyline is "settled" on the mathematical model and its vertexes assume the elevation of the plane represented by the triangle on which the point is situated. Besides, new vertexes are inserted where the polyline intersects the triangle sides. This option is particularly efficient when you have at your disposal the limit line of excavation from which to start planning slopes.

If you have a 2D project polyline it is better to use this command to turn it into a 3D polyline and start the project.

409

Set a fixed elevation to all polylines

The command can be activated through one of the following modes: Toolbar Incas Menu D.T.M. > 3D Polyline > Set elevation Command line: SET3DPOLY

On CAD command line the following questions appear: Elevation to set <0.000>: Specify the elevation to assign to polyline vertexes Select polylines: Select the polylines to which the elevation has to be assigned

Set an elevation from leveling to polylines

The command can be activated by one of the modes listed below: Toolbar Incas Menu D.T.M. > 3D Polyline > Elevation from leveling Command line: SET3DPOLY

In the appearing dialog box, it is possible to specify leveling parameters. It is possible to set the leveling by three modes: Leveling through 3 points: you have to indicate the three points plano-altimetric coodinates; if the points are in the table of topographic coordinates it is sufficient to indicate their names in Point name edit box and the coordinates will be input automatically. Leveling through 2 points and one slope: You have to indicate the two points plano-altimetric coordinates; if the points are in the table of topographic coordinates it is sufficient to indicate their names in Point name edit box and the coordinates will be input automatically. It is, then, necessary to specify the value of the slope, as ratio between height and basis, and the direction of the slope (Azimuth), in centesimal degrees. Leveling through one point and two slopes: You have to indicate the point plano-altimetric coordinates; if the point is in the table of topographic coordinates it is sufficient to indicate its name in Point name edit box and the coordinates will be input automatically. It is, then, necessary to specify the value of the two slopes, as ratio between height and basis, and their direction (Azimuth), in centesimal degrees. On CAD command line the following question appears: Select polylines: Select the polylines to which the elevation has to be assigned

Set an elevation from DTM to polylines

The command can be activated by one of the following modes : Toolbar Incas Menu D.T.M. > 3D Polyline > Elevation from D.T.M. Command line: SET3DPOLY

Topko

On CAD command line the following questions appear: Subdivision step in curve <5.000>: If the polyline includes arcs, it is possible to approximate them with segments. Specify the length of the approximation segments. In the appearing dialog box it is necessary to select the mathematical model on which to "settle" (place) the polyline. Select polylines: Select the polylines to which the elevation has to be assigned

Triangles between two polylines

By this command it is possible to build automatically the triangles between two polylines. The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar Incas Menu DTM > Triangles > Triangles between two polylines Command line: TRIANGPLINE

On the command line the following prompts will appear: Indicate first polyline: select the first of the two polylines to use to build the triangles.. Indicate second polyline: select the second of the two polylines to use to build the triangles. Note. The two polylines can also be closed polylines, where one of the two contains the other.

3D Points and blocks

The tool allows to manage the insertion of CAD blocks in different ways, since it is equipped with guided procedures for the repetitive insertion of drawing blocks, according to modes the user can customize. In this way, quick and simple commands are available, by which to speed up the insertion of such entities.

Insert blocks on DTM

The tool allows to insert a block on a reference DTM model; the command can be activated in one of the modes reported below: Toolbar Incas Menu D.T.M. > 3D Points/Block > Insert block on DTM Command line: DDINSERTONDTM

The following request will appear: Enter reference survey subproject. Enter the survey subproject from which to set the elevation of the block to insert;

411

The following window will appear:

. In the window it is necessary to specify the following information: Name. Specify block name, choosing from the list of the blocks inserted, or, by Browse button, start the external path in which it is saved; Insertion point. Specify insertion point on screen, or insert coordinate values; Scale and rotation. Scale factor and block rotation angle can be defined on screen or by specifying a value. Explode. To use once the block has been entered, to subdivide it into the different elements that constitute it, instead of keeping it as a single entity; At the window right button the preview of the block selected will appear; Press OK to complete the insertion.

Enter blocks into closed polylines

It is possible to enter a block repeatedly into a closed perimeter, described by a polyline. The insertion can be performed by grid or at random, and it is possible to specify the elevation and the properties to set to the blocks. It is possible to gain access to the command as follows: Toolbar Incas Menu D.T.M. > 3D Points/Block > Blocks automatic insertion Command line: INSERTAUTO

The following window will appear:

Topko

In this window the following requests will be listed: Block settings: Block. Choose from the list the block to enter; Fixed scale. Define the scale factor to set to the blocks (the same for all); Random scale. Enter a minimum and maximum scale factor which, at random, will be adopted in inserting the block; Position: Regular grid. Enter a step X and a step Y to define the insertion grid; Random. Define the number of blocks to insert in a surface; the tool will position the blocks at random inside the perimeter selected, respecting the density specified; Elevation: Fixed. Sets a fixed elevation to the blocks to insert; From triangles model. Derives block elevation from the triangle digital model activated in the selection list; Additional elevation. Specify a possible supplementary elevation from the reference model; Insertion settings: Choose layer and destination drawing subproject; Press OK to complete the insertion. The tool requires to specify the area in which to insert the blocks; on command line the following prompt will appear: 413

Select closed polylines: Enter the polyline representing insertion perimeter.

Repeat block on polyline

The tool automatically inserts some blocks also along a selected line or polyline object. Activate the command by one of the following modes: Toolbar Incas Menu D.T.M. > 3D Points/Blocks > Insert block on DTM Command line: MEASURE B

The following window will appear:

In this window the following requests are dispayed: Insertion settings. Define an insertion step of the block along the object; choose layer and destination drawing subproject; Elevation settings: Elevation by object. Assume block elevation as equal to object elevation; Fixed elevation. Set a fixed elevation to the blocks inserted; Elevation by 3D model. Set elevation according to a 3D model chosen from selection list; Block settings: Block. Select from the list the block to insert;

Topko

Scale. Specify scale factor by which to insert the block; Rotation. Define the block insertion angle; Block direction by object. By this option it is possible to set the block direction according to the object in which it is inserted; Press OK to confirm the settings. The tool requires to carry out the selection of the line or polyline; on the command line the following prompt will appear: Select object: Enter line or polyline in which to insert the block.

Elevation/point calculation from DTM

It is possible to set to points and blocks an elevation corresponding to that of a reference triangle model. Activate the command by one of the following modes: Toolbar Incas Menu D.T.M. > 3D Points/Blocks > Inserti block on DTM Command line: PROJEC2DTM

The tool prompts the selection of a reference model, so the following request appears on command line: Indicate points to be interpolated: Enter the points or blocks whose elevation has to be modified, setting the reference subproject elevation.

Create manual sideslopes

The tool allows to create a sideslope manually, by indicating its start and final points. The command can be activated as follows: Menu D.T.M. > Sideslope creation > Manual sideslope Command line: TRIANG D

On command line the following prompts will appear: First point: Specify sideslope first point; Second point: Specify sideslope second point; Third point: Specify sideslope third point;; Fourth point: Specify sideslope fourth point;. Note. The command provides for the insertion of a sequence of sideslopes, so it goes on with the request for the third and fourth point of the following sideslope; stop the insertion by ESC. Some triangles will be created, representing the surfaces of the sideslopes inserted.

Sideslope creation to DTM

This command allows to create automatically sideslopes to an existing DTM starting from a 3D polyline. It can be used, for example, to create automatically sideslopes which start from a 3D polyline, representing a bottom excavation project line, and reach the real situation model (terrain model). Generally speaking, 415

the command can be used in all the situations where you have to calculate sideslopes which intersecate another model. The command can be activated through one of the following modes: Toolbar Incas Menu DTM > Triangles > Sideslope creation > Sideslopes to D.T.M. Command line: DTMSLOPE

The following window appear:

In the dialog box it is necessary to set the following data: Origin subproject: select the subproject representing the real situation (the subproject where sideslopes have to get to); Project subproject: select the subproject that will contain the triangles resulting from sideslopes calculation to the origin subproject. It is necessary to create a subproject that will contain the project model. See How to create a subproject. Fixed slope\Different slopes: it is possible to calculate fixed slope sideslopes (i.e. all sideslopes have the same slope) or set for each sideslope segment the slope that must respect. Cut slope\Fill slope: it is possible to differentiate slopes in cut and fill segments. Use maximum distance: it is possible to set a sideslope length limit; if, during the calculation, the tool obtains sideslopes longer than the maximum distance set, they are reduced to the maximum distance; therefore, they will not reach the origin model. Fillet corners: it is possible to create sideslopes with fillet corners; you can also define corners draw step which represents approximation segments length. Curve step: if the start polyline contains arcs, these are approximated with segments whose length results from the value of this parameter. Create triangles: if this option is active you can create not only the sideslopes but also the triangles forming the project model.

Topko

Reduce number triangles: if this option is active, the tool performs a further check during triangles calculation greatly reducing the number of triangles and joining all the adjacent triangles having the same slope. Layer: It is possible to specify the layer to be assigned to the triangles created. On CAD command line the following questions appear: Select polyline: Select the 3D polyline from which the slopes have to start Slope direction: Select the direction, according to the polyline, of the sideslopes to be calculated; it is sufficient to click on the area where sideslopes have to be created.

Creation of sideslopes and benches

This command allows to create fixed size sideslopes and benches. It necessary to start from a 3D polyline and then create sideslopes through one of the following methods: Slope and final elevation : sideslopes start from the selected polyline and end at the specified elevation with the slope set Slope and height: sideslopes start from the polyline with set slope and end at the specified height. Slope and width: sideslopes start from the polyline with set slope and end at the specified width. Height and width: sideslopes start from the polyline and end at the specified width and height; the slope of the sideslope is a result of the ratio between HEIGHT/WIDTH. This option is useful to create horizontal benches since it is sufficient to specify Height=0 and Width=bench width. The command can be activated through one of the following modes: Toolbar Incas Menu DTM > Triangles > Sideslope creation > Sideslopes 3D Command line: DDSLOPE

417

The following dialog box appears:

In the dialog box it is necessary to specify the following data: Project subproject: select the subproject that will contain the triangles obtained from sideslope calculation. It is necessary to create a subproject that will contain the project model. See How to create a subproject. Intersect with origin subproject: this option allows you to take into account the presence of an origin model (real situation model) in the creation of sideslopes; infact, if you have to create fixed-size sideslopes, their creation must not exceed the limits set by the presence of another model. Suppose you have to create a dam sideslope having particular features: you will have a starting 3D polyline perpendicular to the valley that joins the two versants; when the tool calculates the sideslope it must take into account the two slopes of the valley in order to obtain a narrower development towards the center of the valley. Project data: choose the type of data that you need for sideslope calculation: Sideslope and final elevation, Slope and height, Slope and width, Height and width. Curve step: if the start polyline contains arcs, these are approximated with segments whose length results from the value of this parameter. Fillet corners: it is possible to create sideslopes with fillet corners; you can also define corners draw steps that represents the approximation segments length. Create triangles: if this option is active you can create not only the sideslopes but also the triangles forming the project model. Layer: it is possible to specify the layer to be assigned to the triangle created. On CAD command line the following questions appear: Select polyline: Select the 3D polyline from which the slopes have to start Slope direction: Select the direction, from the polyline, of the sideslopes to be calculated; it is sufficient to click on the area where sideslopes have to be created.

Topko

Sideslope creation by Vertical and/or Horizontal 3D offset

This command allows to create sideslopes, benches or fixed-size planes in general; size can be defined either horizontally or vertically (i.e. it is possible to set the vertical and the horizontal offset according to the starting polyline). The command can be activated by one of the methods listed below: Toolbar Incas Menu DTM > Triangles > Sideslope creation > 3D Offset Command line: OFFSET3D

The following dialog box appears:

Nella finestra di dialogo necessario specificare i dati seguenti: Project subproject: select the subproject which will contain the triangles obtained from sideslope calculation. It is necessary to create a subproject which will contain the project model. See How to create a subproject. Method: choose the method you need to set the vertical offset: Offset / Offset: set the elevation difference in the first and in the last point of the polyline. Offset/Long. slope: set the elevation difference according to the first point of the polyline and the longitudinal slope of the sideslope. Long. slope/Offset: set the elevation difference according to the last point of the polyline and the longitudinal slope of the sideslope. Elev./Elev.: set the end elevation of the first and the last point of the polyline. Elev./Long. slope: set the end elevation of the first point of the polyline and the longitudinal slope of the sideslope. Long. slope/Elev.: set the stop elevation of the last point of the polyline and the longitudinal slope of the sideslope. Horizontal offset: set the sideslope horizontal offset according the first and the last point. Curve step: if the start polyline contains arcs, these are approximated with segments whose length results from the value of this parameter. Create triangles: if this option is active you can create not only the sideslopes but also the triangles forming the project model. Layer: it is possible to specify the layer to be assigned to the triangle created. On CAD command line the following questions appear:

419

Select polyline: Select the 3D polyline from which the slopes have to start Slope direction: Select the direction, according to the polyline, of the sideslopes to be calculated; it is sufficient to click on the area where sideslopes have to be created.

3D Model/Drawing from parametric objects

By this command it is possible to generate a 3D drawing/model made of polylines, by inserting, along a reference polyline, parametric 3D objects such as sideslopes, ditches, walls, sidewalks. This means that it is possible, for example, to survey a sidewalk edge and measure its width on main points and then rebuild this situation simply by merging edge points by a polyline and applying on it the object "sidewalk" by setting the widths measured; the tool will rebuild the sidewalk in 3D, generating the sidewalk upper edge line and the external edge line. The same concept can be applied to other elements such as ditches, walls, sideslopes. In this way, it is possible to produce a very detailed final drawing in a very short time. Any object possesses different parameters regulating its size and can be inserted by using different insertion points: in case of a sidewalk, it is possible to use as insertion point either the edge towards the road or the external edge. The object can be inserted with the same parameters from the beginning to the end of the polyline, but it is also possible to specify start and end size, leaving the tool the task of performing the interpolation; speaking about the sidewalk again, it is possible to set different widths for the beginning and the end of the polyline, but it is also possible to set intermediate widths: the tool will build the drawing taking into account the values set by performing an interpolation along the polyline.

Insert object on complete polyline

The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar Survey Menu Survey > 3D drawing by object > On polyline Command line: PL3DOBJ C

On the CAD command line the following prompt will appear: Select reference polylines: select the polylines on which to apply the object.

Topko

A window resembling the following will appear:

The objects available are the following: Offset 3D: creates a surface by applying a 3D offset to the polyline. It is possible to specify offset on distances and elevations. Ditch by widths: creates a ditch by setting bottom width and top width. Ditch by slopes: creates a ditch by setting the slopes of the two sideslopes. Curb/Sidewalk: creates a curb or sidewalk type object. It is possible to set a height and a width from reference polyline. Wall (simple): creates a wall by setting the wall internal and external height, as well as the top width. Sideslope on right: creates a sideslope on the right of the polyline, as long as it meets a reference model. Requires Topko M Premium. Sideslope on left: creates a sideslope on the left of the polyline, as long as it meets a reference model. Requires Topko M Premium. Sideslope with berms on right: creates a sideslope with berms on the right of the polyline, as long as it meets a reference model. Requires Requires Topko M Premium. Sideslope with berms on left: creates a sideslope with berms on the left of the polyline, as long as it meets a reference model. Requires Topko M Premium. Pipe (Circular): creates a 3D circular pipe along the reference polyline. Requires Topko M Premium. Pipe (Rectangular): creates a 3D circular pipe along the reference polyline. Requires Topko M Premium

Object
Select from list the kind of object desired. After selecting the object it will be possible to choose the insertion point to use to insert the object. Insertion point will be the point along the polyline chosen as reference. In the table on the right it is possible to set the parameters regulating the drawing of the object selected. 421

Lines

Create drawing/lines model: activate this option to generate the object 3D polylines. Drawing type - Polylines or Constraints / Break lines: the tool can generate polylines or break lines to use to create a triangle model. To generate break lines it is necessary to possess Topko M module. Use reference polyline properties: by this option it is possible to generate new elements while keeping the origin polyline properties (color, layer). If this option is not active, it is possible to set another layer and color to the new elements. Create sideslope hatch drawing: by activating this option, sideslope hatches are drawn if there are some surfaces slopes between minimum and maximum slope. The button Settings allows to define sideslope hatches drawing parameters.

Model

Generates mathematical model: this option allows the generation of triangles on calculated surfaces.

Topko

Reference terrain model: for sideslope objects it is necessary to set the triangle model on which they must interrupt. Terrain band to calculate: terrain band to extract to calculate sideslope intersection on reference model. Maximum step for model creation: maximum distance of objects insertion along the polyline. To improve the quality of the final result it is possible to reduce this value. Check model intersections: by this option it is possible to solve the intersections that may be determined between the surfaces created. The option is active when the option Create drawing/lines model is not active. Triangles layer: layer to assign the triangles created to. Triangles color: color to assign to the triangles generated. Press OK to start the process.

Insert an object on polyline by intervals

The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar Survey Menu Survey > 3D drawing by object > On polyline by intervals Command line: PL3DOBJ I

On the CAD command line the following prompt will appear: Select reference polyline: select the polyline on which to apply the object. Enter start point along the polyline: indicate a point, along the polyline, to start applying the object from. A window resembling the following will appear:

Set the object and the parameters it will assume on the point indicated. Press OK. On the command line the following prompt will appear: 423

Enter end point along the polyline: indicate a point along the polyline, on which to stop applying the object.

The same window will appear again, on which it is possible to set the parameters the object assumes on the point just indicated. Press OK. The tool will start inserting the object along the polyline, by interpolating the parameters inserted from start values to end values. The process continues by asking a new end point and new parameters. To stop it, annul the prompt by ESC button.

Modelling utilities
The tool provides for some guided procedures for the modelling of guard-rails, new-jerseys, 3D buildings and road signs. Any block can easily be extruded along a reference polyline, creating quickly a continuous element; it is possible to model the traffic signs concerning road lanes by setting the properties to attribute to the strips; by setting the geometric properties of guard rails and new-jerseys it is possible to obtain quickly the corresponding model; from the perimeter of a building it is possible to create the 3D model of that building.

Extrude block on polyline

Starting from a block that represents the section of the model to be obtained, it is possible to project it along a direction defined by a polyline, obtaining a continuous 3D model. In this way, the block chosen will be extruded, creating a model formed by continuous surfaces and, very simply and quickly, it will be possible to obtain the model of a wall or of other constant-section objects. The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar D.T.M. Menu D.T.M. > 3D Modeling > Extrude block on polyline Command line: EXTRUDE

Topko

The following window will appear:

In the window the following requests will be displayed: Block settings. Block. Enter block to be extruded along the polyline; Cover block. Define a cover block, formed by 3D faces elements, to apply at the beginning and at the end of the polyline in a transversal direction. Scale. Specify the scale factor to be applied to the block; Arc-Chord distance. Specify arc-chord distance, in case the object in which a block is extruded contains some curvilinear segments; Insertion settings. Choose layer and destination subproject. Press OK to confirm the settings. The tool displays the following request: Select objects: Enter the polyline along which to extrude the block selected.

Example: After choosing a block that stands for the section of a wall having the following shape

I choose another block, having the same shape as the wall, made up of 3Dfaces, to model the wall start and end points: 425

Suppose the perimeter of the wall is defined by the following polyline:

activate Extrude block command and configure the following settings:

OK to confirm the settings. .

Indicate the polyline; the tool extrudes the block selected along the whole length of the polyline selected:

Topko

A 3D model is obtained, which, by axonometric projection, becomes:

427

Create strips on polylines

The tool allows to insert traffic signs automatically. By a specific window it is possible to insert all the data concerning the strip to create. The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar D.T.M. Menu D.T.M > 3D Modeling > Strips Command line: 3DOBJ

The following window will appear:

In the window the following information will be required: Strips data. Strip width: Enter the width of the strip to be created; White color: choose this option to obtain white strips; Yellow color: choose this option to obtain yellow strips;

Stripes type.

Topko

Continuous stripe. Creates a continuous stripe; Dashed stripe. Creates a dashed stripe; Dash length: Set dash length; Space lenght: Set the length of the space between a line and the following one; Double strip. Choose this option to create a double strip; Insertion settings. Layer: Define the layer the strips belong to; Subproject: Set the destination subproject of the strips; Press OK to confirm the settings. The tool displays the following request: Select objects: Enter the polyline along which to create the road sign chosen.

429

Create New-Jersey
The tool provides for a guided procedure allowing to create automatically a New Jersey to extrude continuously, following the direction of a polyline contained in the work. It is possible to set the geometry of the New-Jersey to be inserted by using a window which can be activated by the following commands: Toolbar D.T.M. Menu D.T.M > 3D Modeling > New-Jersey Command line: 3DOBJ

The following window will appear:

The tool prompts to specify the geometric properties of the New-Jersey as well as the following information: New-Jersey. Left. Creates a New-Jersey on the left of the insertion line or polyline; Right. Creates a New-Jersey on the right of the insertion line or polyline; Arc-Chord distance: Enter distance of the New-Jersey from possible arcs found in the object along which to extrude the New-Jersey. Insertion settings. Layer: Specify the layer the New-Jersey belongs to; Subproject: Specify destination subproject;

Topko

Press OK to confirm the settings. The tool displays the following request: Select objects: Enter the polyline along which to insert the New-Jersey.

Example: Given a polyline:

suppose a New-Jersey has to be created following the polyline direction. Activate New-Jersey 3D modelling command and choose the settings:

Press OK to confirm the command. 431

Select the polyline and ENTER; the New-Jersey modelling will be obtained as follows:

Create Guard-Rail
The tool provides for a guided procedure allowing to create automatically a Guard-Rail to extrude continuously, following the direction of a polyline contained in the work. It is possible to set the geometry of the Guard-Rail to be inserted by using a window which can be activated by the following commands: Toolbar D.T.M. Menu D.T.M. > 3D Modeling > Guard-Rail Command line: 3DOBJ

Topko

The following window will appear:

The tool prompts to specify the geometric properties of the Guard-Rail as well as the following information: Guard-Rail. Left. Creates a Guard Rail only on the left; Right. Creates a Guard-Rail only on the right; Arc-Chord distance: Enter distance of the Guard-Rail from possible arcs found in the object along which to extrude the Guard-Rail. Insertion settings. Layer: Specify the layer the Guard-Rail belongs to; Subproject: Specify survey or drawing destination subproject; Press OK to confirm the settings. The tool displays the following request: Select objects: Enter the polyline along which to insert the Guard-Rail.

Example: Given a polyline:

433

suppose a Guard-Rail has to be created following the polyline direction. Activate Guard-Rail 3D modelling command and choose the settings:

Press OK to confirm the command. Select the polyline and ENTER; the New-Jersey modelling will be obtained as follows:

Topko

Create 3D buildings
The tool provides for a guided procedure allowing to create automatically a building, starting from a closed perimeter contained in the work. The perimeter is extruded in height, creating the building. It is possible to set the geometry of the building to be inserted by using a window which can be activated by the following commands: Toolbar D.T.M. Menu D.T.M. > 3D Modeling > 3D buildings... Command line: 3DBUILDINGS

The following window will appear:

The tool prompts to specify the following properties of the building: Buildings bottom elevation.

435

Extract bottom elevation from terrain model. Assumes the building bottom elevations as equal to those of a reference model; enter the survey subproject which represents the terrain model; Bottom elevation from polyline vertexes. The building bottom elevations are assigned to the vertexes of the polyline representing the perimeter of the building; Buildings height. Fixed height. Assigns the buildings a fixed height; specify in Height the fixed height; Random. Sets the buildings a random height, between a minimum and a maximum value; specify height interval in Min. and Max.; Insertion settings. Layer: Specify the layer the building belongs to; Subprojects:Specify survey or drawing destination subproject; Press OK to confirm the settings The tool displays the following request: Select objects: Enter the polyline representing the perimeter to extrude Example: Given a terrain on which a closed polyline is inserted

suppose a building has to be created starting from the perimeter specified in the polyline. Activate 3D modelling command for the creation of buildings and choose the settings:

Press OK to confirm the settings.

Topko

Select the polyline and ENTER; the building modelling will be obtained as follows:

Automatic merging of models

This command allows to merge automatically two models in order to obtain a third model. The command perfoms the following sequence of operations: 1. if the option Automatic mode is active, the tool calculates the Project subproject perimeter polyline; if the option is not active, then the tool asks you to select the perimeter polyline; 2. all the Origin subproject triangles and points are copied in the Destination subproject; 3. Destination subproject triangles are broken on the perimeter polyline previously calculated. 4. Destination subproject triangles and points, which are inside the perimeter polyline, are deleted; 5. all the Project subproject triangles and points are copied in the Destination subproject; As you can see, this command performs automatically a sequence of commands available with Incas module; this means that the same operation can be carried out also manually.

437

In order to activate the procedure use one of the following methods: Toolbar Incas Menu D.T.M. > Extraction of DTM > Merge DTM. Command line: DTMMERGE

The following dialog box appears:

In this window it is necessary to select the Destination subproject which will contain the model obtained once the operation has been performed. Before carrying out the command it is then necessary to create a new survey subproject. See How to create a subproject. Besides, you must select the origin subproject (real situation) and the project subproject. You can choose among the following merging options: Merge points: if this option is active, the points of both models are merged; Origin subproject points which are inside the Project subproject perimeter, are not merged. Merge triangles: if this option is active, the triangles of both models are merged; Origin subproject triangles which are inside the Project subproject, are broken and not merged. Automatic mode: if this option is active Project subproject perimeter is automatically calculated, on the contrary, the tool requires the perimeter polyline.

Extraction of DTM from volume calculations

According to the volume calculation performed, it is possible to obtain a triangle mathematical model representing one of the models used during the calculation. This function is particularly useful in case of volume calculation by levelings in order to obtain the mathematical model of the leveling inserted. Before using this command, it is necessary to create a survey subproject where to save the mathematical model to be extracted. The subproject created must also be active. See Subprojects management. The command can be activated through one of the following modes: Menu D.T.M. > Extraction of DTM > DTM from volume calculations Command line: DTMEXTRACT

Topko

The following window appears:

It is possible to obtain a mathematical model on the basis of previous elaborations according to different modes: Type of extraction Meaning Lower DTM (solo per configurazione M A model is created using the lower elevations between the two models. Premium) Higher DTM (solo per configurazione A model is created using the higher elevations between the two models. M Premium) First DTM Its meaning depends on the type of calculation performed. See table below. Second DTM Its meaning depends on the type of calculation performed. See table below. Elevation difference (solo per A mathematical model is created whose elevation is the difference between the configurazione M Premium) elevations of the two models elaborated. The Z point of the triangles is then the difference between the Z point of the two models triangles. The types of extractions cyan colored are available only if you have Incas module. The meaning of the first and the second model depends on the type of volume calculation performed according to the following scheme: Volume calculation Solid volume Meaning of the first model Meaning of the second model The first model has the elevation set The second model is identical with the for the volume calculation. original one. Leveling The first model represents the The second model is identical with the leveling plane set for volume original one. calculation. Model intersection The first model is identical with the The second model is identical with the first of the two compared models. second of the two compared models. For example, if you want to obtain a leveling mathematical model defined in volume calculation it is necessary to use the option First DTM. Source DTM. By Browse button, select the subproject where the volume calculation, which the extraction of the model will refer to, has been performed. Elaboration. By Browse button, select the elaboration, among those available, from which to obtain the model.

439

Automatic creation of DTM perimeter

This command allows to create automatically a polyline outside, and if necessary inside, the model. The polyline represents exactly the external, and internal, perimeter of the model. Once the polyline is created you can, for example, delete the triangles of another model which are present inside the polyline; in this way, you can delete the overlapping of the two models triangles. Suppose you have a model representing the real situation (terrain model) and a model representing the project (project model); of course, terrain model triangles are present inside project model. By using the following sequence of commands you will be able to delete all terrain model triangles present inside the project model: 1. calculate project model perimeter; 2. break triangles of the terrain model on the perimeter polyline; 3. delete triangles inside the perimeter polyline;

The same procedure can be perfomed through a fully automatic mode by using Merge DTM command. Follow one of the methods listed below to activate the procedure: Menu D.T.M. > 3D Polyline > DTM Perimeter Command line: DTMPERIM

Once the elaboration is finished, the external, and if necessary the internal, perimeter polyline is drawn. The internal perimeter polyline is calculated only if inside the mathematical model there are internal exclusion zones where triangles are not present.

Topko

Automatic triangulation
The tool can build the triangles automatically in two ways : Free triangulation : the tool generates the triangles without taking into consideration possible boundary or break lines ; Constrained triangulation: if boundary or break lines have been set, the tool will follow this information during the generation of the triangles which will not exceed the boundary set and will not cross a break line (see Constraints). This procedure can be activated through one of the following modes: Toolbar DTM: Menu D.T.M. > Triangulation > Automatic Command line: MAKEDTM

The following dialog box appears :

Triangulation
The following data are required: Subproject. Select the subproject on which to carry out the triangulation. Triangulation mode. Select the triangulation mode to be perfomed: Free: on triangles creation constraints are not taken into account. Constrained: triangles creation depends on the presence of constraints. Polyline: triangles are created inside a closed polyline (only for Incas users). 441

Allotment: triangles are created inside an allotment (only for Incas users). Entities to triangulate: In case of Free and Constrained triangulation it is possible to decide on what entities to carry out the triangulation. Not available in Topko Express. All: all the points and break lines contained in the survey subproject are used. Select by window: After pressing Apply button the tool will prompt the creation of a check window in the graphic CAD; the model will be created by using only the points and the break lines selected. Select by polyline: After pressing Apply button the tool will ask to indicate the polyline delimiting the area to triangulate; the model will be created by using only points and break lines inside the polyline. The break lines partially included in the polyline are automatically broken. If the option Delete previous triangles is active, the tool, before performing the triangulation, will delete automatically the possible triangles inside the polyline. Speed. In order to perform the elaboration, the tool gives the possibility to choose among three different speeds. They differ from the mode by which the tool creates triangles: a slower elaboration creates triangles better than a faster one, which creates triangles without performing a choice of points. Max length side. For triangle sides it is possible to set the maximum length. Use this setting to avoid creation of insignificant triangles on model boundary. If the edit box is empty, the condition is ignored. Break constraints with length over: The constraints with lenght over the value set are subdivided into smaller parts. Check data. If the option is active, a data check is carried out during triangulation; it consists in verifying the presence of the following error situations: Survey points with coincident planimetric coordinates: if the tool is confronted with such a situation, the double point will not be used to perform the triangulation; Intersection of constraints: in this case the tool informs you of the error and interrupts the elaboration; Overlapped constraint lines: one of the two lines will not be used to perform the triangulation; Zero-length constraint: the constraint is erased; Point with no distance from the constraint: the situation is pointed out and the elaboration is interrupted; Delete previous triangles. If the option is active, the previous triangles are deleted before performing triangulation. Symbols. It is possible to choose one of the three symbols listed below to represent the triangle: Lines: the three bisecting lines of the triangles are created; Number: triangle number is drawn. This option is particularly useful when volume calculation printout is added to drawings; by this way, it is possible to compare printout data with drawing ones. None: Only the three sides of the triangle are drawn.

Topko

Layers

Layer. It is possible to set the layer where to save the triangles created. Flat triangles color. It is possible to set a specific color for those triangles created using points with the same elevation. As this kind of triangles may return unreal contour lines, through the chromatic differentiation it is possible to find out easily the triangles to be corrected.

443

Colours not available in Topko Express

In this page it is possible to set triangle colour according to barycentre. Triangles with colors shade: this option activates the generation of triangles with colour according to elevation. Elevation intervals customized: by activating this option it is possible to specify the intervals to which to apply the colours defined in the table below. When this option is not active, the tool distributes uniformly the colours along the whole interval between minimum elevation and maximum elevation. In the table it is possible to define the colours to be used for colouring. It is possible to define up to 16 different colours.

Press Apply button to start the triangulation.

Note. To stop the elaboration press ESC.

Horizontal sections
With this command it is possible to insert sections that cut horizontally, but not transversely, the mathematical model. Horizontal sections return lines that are mainly contour lines at the elevation fixed by the section. The command can be activated through one of the methods below: Menu D.T.M. > Topographic cross-sections > Horizontal sections Command line: SECTIONS

The following dialog box appears:

Topko

In this window, it is possible to insert the maximum and minimum elevation inside which to insert horizontal sections; besides, it is necessary to specify the step of section insertion starting from the minimum elevation. Horizontal sections are not visible in the planimetric view; it is possible to see the list of the sections in Table of Profile/Sections. In order to perform the horizontal section calculations go to Sections module and carry out the Calculation of section elevations.

How to erase automatically points inside/outside a polyline

This command allows to erase automatically all survey points which are inside, or outside, a polyline. In order to activate the procedure operate in one of the following modes: Menu Survey > Coordinates > Erase points in/out Command line: DELCOORD

On CAD command line the following questions appear: Select polyline or allotment to calculate: Erase Points Inside/Outside/<I>: Specify whether the points to be deleted are inside or outside the selected polyline.

How to erase automatically triangles inside/outside a polyline

This command allows to erase automatically all triangles which are inside, or outside, a polyline. In order to activate this procedure operate using one of the methods listed below : Menu D.T.M. > Triangulation > Erase triangles from polyline Command line: DELDTM

On CAD command line the following questions appear: Select polyline or allotment to calcualte: Erase Triangles Inside/Outside/<I>: Specify whether the triangles to be deleted are inside or outside the selected polilyne. The tool deletes all triangles whose baricenter is inside or outside the polyline. In order to erase triangles right along the polyline, it is necessary to break them on the polyline and then use this command. See Break triangles on defined polylines. 445

Topko H - Hydrology and Hydrography

Topko Hydro introduces a set of functions which provide the user with a lot of precious information about the terrain morphology as far as the presence of water, thus making the decisional process preceding any kind of intervention (preventive or other ) easier and faster. The same tools can be applied to the models of the new designs, allowing to verify whether the planning parameters concerning, for example, the downflow of water are correct. Hydro is one of Topko modules, which integrates completely with Geomatics Suite products and can be used directly at any time, on data coming also from elaborations performed by other modules. The commands and the functions introduced by Hydro are the following: Display slopes Display flat areas Display peaks and pits Display valleys and ridges Display tributaries Contour line on point Watershed volume Water path

Hydro toolbar
Hydro module adds the following toolbar:

Display slopes
By Topko H it is possible to obtain a visualization of the model triangles where, for each triangle, an arrow is displayed, indicating the direction of maximum slope of the triangle. Besides the arrow drawing it is also possible to have the text reporting the slope and the text reporting the direction angle. The settings that regulate the modes by which to obtain the drawing of the maximum speed arrow for the current subproject are situated in the window of survey properties. The command can be activated in one of the following ways: Menu Survey > Survey properties Command line: DDAXPROP

Topko

Display triangle slope vectors: by activating this option, the triangle slope vector is drawn in the middle of each triangle. Apply to all subprojects: by activating this option, all the settings in Hydrology page will be reported also on the other survey subprojects contained in the file. Slope vector Color: color by which to display maximum slope line and arrow. Arrow type:type of arrow by which to represent maximum slope direction. Arrow size (mm): arrow size in mm. Fixed length (mm): length of maximum slope line; by this option the maximum slope line has the same length in each triangle. Proportional length: by this option, the length of maximum slope line is proportional to the slope itself; the bigger the slope, the longer will be the line. In this case it is possible to set the scale factor to use to adapt the length to the kind of drawing. Slope text Display slope text: when this option is active, the tool will display, for each triangle, the maximum slope value of the triangle itself. Number of decimals: number of decimals to use to represent the slope Display angle text: when this option is active, the tool will display, for each triangle, the value of the direction angle of the triangle itself. Number of decimals: number of decimals to use to represent direction angle. Text style: text style to use to represent slope text and direction angle. Color: color to display slope text and direction angle with. Text height (mm): height of the text to display slope text and direction angle with. 447

Text width (mm): width of the text to display slope text and direction angle with. Press OK button to confirm the settings.

Display flat areas

By this command it is possible to obtain the representation on model of all the flat areas, areas where elevation differences between points are practically absent. These areas can be particularly interesting, since in them the water may stagnate instead of flowing down towards other parts of the model. If the triangle model has been obtained from the project of a road or of a crossroads, this command allows to test the project according to the water, to avoid areas where the water can accumulate, creating safety problems. The command can be activated in one of the following ways: Toolbar Hydrology Menu DTM > Hydrology > Display flat areas Command line: HYFLATAR

Subproject: subproject where to calculate and display flat areas. Settings Display: in this check list it is possible to choose the kind of flat area to display; the different kinds of flat areas are the following:

Topko

All flat areas: all the kinds of flat areas are displayed: top, depression and mixed. Top area: areas where all the points out of the area have a lower elevation. Depression areas: areas where all the points out of the area have a higher elevation. Mixed areas: areas which are neither completely top areas nor completely depression
areas.

Minimum elevation difference: it is the minimum difference in elevation between the vertexes to consider the surface as flat. If three points have, to each other, a difference in elevation below the minimum, then the surface they determine is a flat one. By this value it is possible to decide when a surface must be considered flat. Minimum area: it is the minimum surface to be considered as a flat area. In this way it is possible to cancel from the visualization too small flat areas. Areas to elaborate:

Whole model: the tool performs the check on the whole model. On allotment: the tool performs the check only on the internal surface of an allotment.
In this case, after pressing OK button, the tool will ask you to indicate the allotment to be elaborated. Drawing Layer: layer to which to assign the polylines and the hatches delimiting the flat areas. Color of top areas: color to assign to the polylines and the hatches delimiting top flat areas. Top backfilling: backfilling to assign to top flat areas; it is possible to assign no backfilling, a solid backfilling or one of the hatches uploaded in the project. Backfilling scale factor: in case of hatches it is possible to set the scale factor to repeat the hatching pattern with. Color of depression areas: color to assign to the polylines and the hatches delimiting depression flat areas. Depression backfilling: backfilling to assign to depression flat areas; it is possible to assign no backfilling, a solid backfilling or one of the hatches uploaded in the project. Backfilling scale factor: in case of hatches it is possible to set the scale factor to repeat the hatching pattern with. Color of mixed areas: color to assign to the polylines and the hatches delimiting mixed flat areas. Mixed backfilling: backfilling to assign to mixed flat areas; it is possible to assign no backfilling, a solid backfilling or one of the hatches uploaded in the project. Backfilling scale factor: in case of hatches it is possible to set the scale factor to repeat the hatching pattern with. Press Apply button to start calculating the flat areas on model.

449

Display peaks and pits

By this command it is possible to obtain the representation on the model of all the peaks and pits found. A peak point is a point with a higher elevation if compared to all the other points surrounding it, while a pit is a point with a lower elevation if compared to all the other points surrounding it. Peak points and pits can be important because they can point out, sometimes, anomalies on the triangle model or, in case of models derived from a road design, points where an accumulation of water may take place. The command can be activated through one of the following methods: Toolbar Hydrology Menu DTM > Hydrology > Display peaks and pits Command line: HYPEAKPIT

Subproject: subproject where to calculate and display peak points and pits.

Settings

Display: in this check list it is possible to choose the kind of point to display; the different kinds of points are the following:

Minimum and maximum points: all the kinds of points are displayed : relative
minimum and maximum points.

Minimum points (pits): only the minimum points are displayed.

Topko

Maximum points(peaks): only the maximum points are displayed.

Area to elaborate:

Whole model: the tool performs the check on the whole model. On allotment: the tool performs the check only on the internal surface of an allotment.
In this case, after pressing OK button, the tool will ask you to indicate the allotment to be elaborated.

Drawing Layer: layer to which to assign the symbols indicating minimum and maximum points. Colour of minimum points: colour to assign to the symbols indicating minimum points. Symbol of minimum points: symbol to represent minimum points with; select the symbol or the block desired by pressing Browse button. Colour of maximum points: colour to assign to the symbols indicating maximum points. Symbol of maximum points: symbol to represent maximum points with; select the symbol or the block desired by pressing Browse button. Points size: size of the symbol to represent minimum and maximum points with.

Press Apply button to start calculating the minimum and maximum points.

Display valleys and ridges

By this command it is possible to obtain the representation on the model of ridge and valley lines. Ridge lines are situations determined by adjacent triangles both with a negative slope but with different directions; valley lines, on the other hand, are situations determined by adjacent triangles both with a positive slope but with different directions. Representing ridge lines can be useful to determine the edges of the watersheds found in a model, while valley lines can be useful to determine the main watercourses. The command can be activated through one of the following methods: Toolbar Hydrology Menu DTM > Hydrology > Display valleys and ridges Command line: HYVALRID

451

Subproject: subproject where to calculate and display valley lines and ridges.

Settings Display: in this check list it is possible to choose the kind of point to display; the different kinds of points are the following:

Valleys and ridges: both valleys and ridges are displayed. Valleys: only the valleys are displayed. Ridges: only the ridges are displayed.
Minimum slope: Slope minimum value (absolute) to say that a valley or a ridge have been determined. Thanks to this option, the tool will not consider as valleys or ridges areas which simply have a slight slope. By increasing the value of the minimum slope the tool will consider only the situations where the triangles slope is above the limit set, thus reducing the total number of the situations met. Areas to elaborate:

Whole model: the tool performs the check on the whole model. On allotment: the tool performs the check only on the internal surface of an allotment.
In this case, after pressing OK button, the tool will ask you to indicate the allotment to be elaborated. Drawing

Layer: layer to which to assign the polylines indicating valleys and ridges. Colour of valley lines: colour to assign to the polylines indicating the valleys. Valley line type: line type to assign to the polylines indicating the valleys. Color of ridge lines: colour to assign to the polylines indicating the ridges.

Topko

Ridge line type: line type to assign to the polylines indicating the ridges. Press Apply button to start calculating the minimum and maximum points.

Display tributaries
By this command it is possible to obtain the representation on the model of the main tributaries of the watercourses considered. The representation is obtained by starting from the ridges found in the model and supposing the water goes down from the lower vertex of each ridge line. The water will follow a path that will make it stop on a valley, which will become, in turn, a new start point for the water towards another valley line. The command can be activated as follows: Toolbar Hydrology Menu DTM > Hydrology > Display tributaries Command line: HYTRIBUTARIES

Subproject: subproject on which to calculate and display the tributaries. Drawing Layer: layer to which to set the polylines indicating the tributaries. Color: color to set to the polylines indicating the tributaries. Line type: type of line to set to the polylines indicating the tributaries.

Press Apply button to start calculating the tributaries.

The tool displays the tributaries by 3D polylines. 3D polylines are displayed with a small arrow for each segment, indicating its slope. The size of the arrow can be set in File menu , Project properties, Miscellaneous page.

453

Contour lines on point

By this command it is possible to obtain the interactive display of contour lines simply by moving the cursor on the model. According to the position of the cursor, the tool calculates the corresponding elevation on the model, then it calculates and displays the contour line passing by that elevation and by that point. Being interactive, the command allows to move freely by the cursor on the model and obtain immediately the corresponding curve; in this way you can know, for example, the zones that will be flooded if the water reaches a certain point on the model. The command is so flexible, however, that it can be used in many other situations. The command can be activated in one of the following ways: Toolbar Hydrology Menu DTM > Hydrology > Contour line on point Command line: HYCONTOURLN

Subproject: subproject on which to calculate contour lines. Drawing Layer: layer to set the contour lines created to. Color: color to set to the contour lines created. Line type: type of line to set to the contour lines created to. Dynamic mode: when this option is active, the tool will allow to see interactively the contour line corresponding to the position of the cursor. Press Apply button to start calculating the contour lines. If the dynamic mode has been set, by moving the cursor on the model the tool will display the corresponding contour line. In any case, by clicking with the mouse on the point desired, the polyline corresponding to the contour line calculated on that point will be inserted in the drawing.

Watershed volume
This command offers different functions, the most important of which is the opportunity to know the total volume of water necessary to fill a watershed as far as a certain height. Besides, the tool allows to make also the opposite calculation: given a certain volume of water it is possible to know the height reached. The same command also allows to simulate the filling of the watershed, increasing the height progressively, from the minimum to the maximum, following an increment that can be set by the user.

Topko

Moreover, it is possible to draw the contour line at a certain height or generate the triangle model of the water. very useful is the use of this command combined to Orbit module of 3D visualization. In this way it is possible to verify what is going on on the model, not only from the map but also from a 3D point of view. The command can be activated in one of the following ways: Toolbar Hydrology Menu DTM > Hydrology > Watershed Volume Command line: HYVOL

Indicate lowest point inside area to fill: the tool prompts for a minimum point in the watershed. It doesn't matter if the point indicated is effectively the minimum, provided the point is inside the watershed.

Manual simulation
The manual simulation of the watershed filling is activated by button. It can be performed by simply moving the vertical indicator upwards or downwards. It is also possible to set the elevation value by digitizing it on Elevation check box. On the model the water filling zone will be displayed by hatches or by a solid filling, according to the state of button.

Volume text box will report the water volume needed to reach the height set. Besides, some more information are available: filling plane and slope areas.

Automatic simulation
The automatic simulation of the filling is activated by button. The tool will start from the minimum height and will increase automatically the height until it reaches the maximum height. To stop the simulation click on button which activates manual simulation.

The settings for the automatic simulation are performed in the dialog box that appears by clicking on button.

455

Height increment step: set the value by which to increase the height at any step of the simulation. Time interval: indicate the time, in seconds, between a height increment and the next one.

Determine the height from the volume

To determine the backfilling height by setting the water volume it is sufficient to insert the volume desired in Volume text box. Automatically, the tool will determine the height reached by that water volume.

Contour line
To obtain the drawing of the contour line at a certain elevation it is sufficient to select button.

Triangle model of the water

By selecting button, the tool will ask you to indicate the name to assign to a survey subproject that will contain the triangles concerning the water filling surface at the current elevation.

Water path
By this command it is possible to obtain the interactive display of the path followed by the water on the model, starting from the point where the cursor is situated. The command can be activated through one of the following methods: Toolbar Hydrology Menu DTM > Hydrology > Water path Command line: HYWATERPATH

Topko

Subproject: subproject where to perform the analysis of the water path. Settings Path direction: by this check box it is possible to choose between two ways to display the the water path:

Move down: starting from the point indicated the tool will calculate the path followed by
the water going downwards.

Move up: starting from the point indicated the tool will calculate the path followed by the
water to get to the point indicated from above. Dynamic mode: when this option is active, the tool will allow to see interactively the path followed by the water corresponding to the position of the cursor.

Drawing Layer: layer on which to set the polylines indicating the water path. Path Color: color to set to polylines indicating the water path. Path Line type: type of line to set to the polylines indicating the water path. Press Apply button to start calculating the contour lines.

If the dynamic mode has been set, by moving the cursor on the model the tool will display the corresponding path followed by the water starting from that point. In any case, by clicking with the mouse on the point desired, the polyline corresponding to the path followed by the water starting from that point will be inserted in the drawing.

The tool displays the tributaries by 3D polylines. 3D polylines are displayed with a small arrow for each segment, indicating its slope. The size of the arrow can be set in File menu , Project properties, Miscellaneous page.

457